Home

Glink Administrators Guide

1. 34 FU eee RE EE e e n 34 b ck p z eR tege ERR ERR ees 34 up 35 MaMe isset ee iet eee eie eee eds 36 lom 36 Examples ee uere cete t t e Ee eee 36 License Monitor 4s die Rede ee ante ftnt desee a e iet on 37 Monitoring license requests ssssssssssesseeeeeeereneeneeneene nenne 37 ii Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents Remote monttormg ce V TO ERA RS 38 License Updating o eee RR TORRE REND AA SERNS 38 Tracing logging requests cnni a n o 38 Advanced carer o no ne n n E E EREE A EEO E EE 39 Running in the foreground sse 39 Manually stopping starting ssesssssseseeneeeeneneneeneee 39 Manually installing uninstalling eerte 39 Changing the port number ete ee i oe eines 40 Glink glink ini glinkdata file options sse 40 Troubleshootitig o oit te eee m ere ntelens 40 Network setup NETSETUP sees eene nennen nnne 41 Optional and grouped items sessssssssseeeeeenenneeneen enne 42 IDIN CHV ES 425 fot natos cub bn ua AE Lue fenis 43 Add ToDesktop hne ted e em e e nts 43 CommandParametets bona diede e enables 44 GCommonGTrOUp s cd oe re ote tetete bei eteiss 44 Create GTOUDA s aot stre ah eae ded Dee enne Salary 44 Executablecx Pun diinfiin leh LC E e id edes less 44 GTOUP onis doe at ea eh aded be a oeste cie 45 IconEronm5s a
2. Certificates are only required for authentication when the server needs to validate which client he will accept connections from or Glink requires to check that the server is in fact the server he intends to connect to Authentication will probably only be required when connecting to hosts over the internet Client certificates Clients certificates are stored in the Personal list of the certificate database Client certificates are required if the host system is to identify the incoming connecting Glink client Server certificates Server certificates are received in the SSL negotiation when Glink connects to the host If configured Glink will request a server certificate and will verify its validity before accepting the connection If server name validation is configured then Glink will check that the CN part of the server s certificate either matches the host address to which Glink is connecting to or the configured server name Trusted root certificate authorities The PC s certificate database already contains a list of trusted root certificate authorities CA Certificates with a certification path to a root CA certificate are trusted by the computer for all valid purposes of the certificate Glink will verify that the certificate is signed for server authentication usage This list is normally maintained and updated by system administrators or when updating Internet Explorer or Windows Certificate requirements Norma
3. This specifies the directory in which the GL EXE program resides The default value for this is the same directory as in which NETSETUP EXE resides and in that this will usually be the case then you will normally not have to specify this directive If GL EXE is to be loaded from a different directory then you will need something like NetGlinkDirectory K GLWIN NetScriptDirectory This specifies the name of the directory containing the common script library for the installation The default is nothing no script library so if you have common scripts then this directive must be included for example NetScriptDirectory K GLWIN SCRIPTS Inclusion of a NetScriptDirectory directive will automatically add a O parameter to the command line of the icon being installed Optional This specifies whether the icon to be installed should be optional the default is that icons are always installed If one or more icons contains a directive Optional TRUE then the user will be presented with a dialog box at setup time which will list all icons that are part of the current installation as defined by the Groups section and Group directives 1f present Icons that are not optional will be listed but the checkbox where the user may indicate whether the item should be installed will be pre checked and disabled The optional items will be displayed unchecked by default but this may be changed with the Opt ionChecked
4. sse nennen eene nnne nes 109 loh Ma DE 109 IBM log mode eee ee ee e DEI cesta ea 110 Local mailbox name 4 eet dee te e e tends 110 Mailbox extension eee eee eie te Here eie ee 111 Password ecu te e RR EL ns 111 Printer connect to host octies tee ene 111 Printer connection name Ggate only 111 Printer mailbox and Printer extension DGA only sss 112 Project zoe ine e e eee e e E eS 113 linum 113 DAV Cys cis aeneo pee oe ee o EC oe Reo an 114 SaVe AS e eee eode REED HC ae tii o REO RO 114 Script aftef CODect e idee at itc a a 114 Terminal mode te e ET TRUE E 114 vi Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents Use check mark for interactive prompting essen 116 Ir uip e 116 GLHOST INI GLINKDATA files sees 117 GLHOST INI GLINKDATA file format sese 118 Seryice messages odere deett teer aet ette deas 119 PUP EY SSHD OptlOnsz eerte ec a ete E ate oink Hectic eases 122 Collect Password interactively essere 122 Collect User anteractively od re st ERR E dees 122 IGPU ao att eno eme 123 Private key file 4 ent enti he ea ha didnt a esee e eet ats 123 SSH VetSiOfl s acides ose netta ere tide bideers 124 SSHD Password o dise ee beue e neleces 124 SSHD Setver address sdb entstand tt idees 124 SSHD USet nate doe tar bent ea ustedes
5. Strip parity In some cases you may need to run the emulator with the no parity setting but will still find that the host machine is adding parity to the output being sent to you In this case you may use this option to remove the unwanted parity bit from the data coming from the line TAPI controls modem Specifies whether your modem should be controlled entirely by the Telephony drivers or be accessed via Telephony drivers but still controlled by Glink There are in general two distinct ways of accessing a modem on your serial port If you configure the port using the Windows serial interface then access will be direct to the port concerned and will have full control of both the port and the modem This type of access is most suited to a hardwired connection where there is no modem at all or for a configuration inherited from an older version of the software which is already set up correctly for the modem you are using and where you wish to change as little as possible The disadvantage to this method is that it takes over the port completely and makes it unusable by other Windows applications especially those that are Telephony enabled 90 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator If you choose the TAPI interface then access will be via the Telephony drivers and this will provide you with better coexistence between Glink and other appli cations in your PC for example a Telephony enabled f
6. You can specify an initial license backup server list using the LB parameter Glink LB parameter The names used must obviously be known to the clients in order to send license requests In Glink the backup server name list can be supplied in the command name LB parameter LB backupl mydomain com backupl mydomain com Note that names of backup servers are optional on the client side these addresses are provided by the license service itself and are retained between client sessions to provide for the situation where Glink is started at a time where the main server is unavailable As an alternative to the LB parameter license backup server information may also be set up in the glink ini glinkdata file Installation Installation of the main licensing service is done automatically as part of standard Glink setup Additional installation that may require manual intervention includes 32 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation installation of the service with non default parameters provision for backup servers Command line options The following options are available for the gllservice command for interactive usage install start stop uninstall Additionally you may supply one or more of the following parameters at the same time as the install parameter These will then be applied whenever the service is started alt alternate host list altint backup int name serve
7. Drag and drop a function to a key combination Some of the VT100 terminal clones assign ASCII DEL to the Backspace key but retain ASCII BS on the shifted Backspace key You can make this change quickly and easily by dragging the Backspace function from the Functions pane and dropping it onto the key combination Note that although ASCII BS is available as a single character function in the function tree there is also a Backspace function defined in the emulation We will use this terminal function rather than the ASCII BS function Select the VT102 340 in the Layouts pane Make sure that you have not selected a modifier in the Keyboard pane If you have then de select it as described in the previous example before proceeding Expand the function tree in the Functions pane category Terminal keys sub category Movement Select the Backspace function Drag the function to the Keyboard pane and hover over the Backspace key While hovering over the Backspace key press down one of the Shift keys on the keyboard and you will see both the Shift keys become green as they are selected Hold down the Shift key and release the mouse button to drop the function onto the Backspace key This assigns the key to the generic shifted backspace key either Shift key in combination with Backspace gives the function You can assign a function to a specific modifier key such as left Shift Backspace so it is not selected by right Shift Backspace In this c
8. GLINK PROFESSIONAL EDITION ENTERPRISE EDITION Administrator s Guide GALLAGHER ROBERTSON Microsoft Windows MS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp IBM and PC are registered trademarks of IBM Corp Glink Enterprise Edition version 8 2 Glink Professional Edition version 8 2 Gallagher amp Robertson A S 1987 2009 All Rights Reserved GALLAGHER amp ROBERTSON A S Kongens gate 23 N 0153 Oslo Norway Tel 47 23357800 Fax 47 23357801 www http www glink com e mail support glink com Contents Contents COMPOS EE E EEE E E E EN I Introduction i iiieiesiiices sesso se sto ete es ub os Te oue ea ees eu t cote ete cease ssus snl Insta llatiOn i iieteteecco es coss et eee eco ea eo aene ee ases deae ore ecu s acus eese eu ee ee suse usn c Before you install the software 3 Installing Glinkz 494 tetti esee eee tener eerte deett Meee 4 Customer validation of generic versions sse 6 Optional command line parameters essssssseseeeenereen 8 Uninstalling Climk eese ee eee co tete ere 8 UperadmgGlink sese rettet toa deett tee a 9 Installing Glink on a file server sse eene 10 Command lines te deneeesta caeca attt dti tx 11 Command line Options ccccesccesecsseeeceseceeecseeeaeeeseesseeseceeeesereeeeeeeeeenaees 11 Environment and internal VARIABLES parameters 16 Default command line options sse 17 GLINK INI GLIN
9. Generating a Public private key pair If you do not have a public private key pair but would like to begin using Public key authentication use the Generate button in the Glink SSH configuration dialog box Glink starts the PuTTY key generation utility If the utility is not available in the Glink directory and you are connected to the Internet Glink will fetch it for you The key generation utility allows you to store your private key in PuTTY native format PPK and optionally encrypt it using a passphrase that will be required each time you use the key Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 279 Administrator notes Installing your public key You must use the Glink PuTTY SSHD network interface to open a command line SSH channel on the SSHD server system using your user name and password The exact procedure varies but typically you change into the ssh directory and open the file authorized_keys with your favourite editor You may have to create this file if this is the first key you have put in it Then switch to the PuTTY key generation utility window select all of the text in the Public key for pasting into authorized keys file box and copy it to the clipboard Then switch back to the Glink window and insert the data into the open file making sure it ends up all on one line Save the file Scripting SSH Use the SET PKEY script command for setting the private key used in the SSH PuTTY inter
10. Once all authentication and encryption key negotiations have concluded successfully the Glink session will continue as normal Encryption algorithms are CPU intensive and you may find that this affects system performance Prerequisites All currently supported versions of Microsoft Windows include SSL and data encryption as a standard and require no additional software Some older versions of Windows don t have the necessary security package versions installed for data encryption On Windows 98 and Windows 95 clients you may need to install the two Microsoft products below Internet Explorer 5 01 or above Directory Service Client froma Win2000 server CD The Internet Explorer is downloadable from the Microsoft WEB site and the Directory Service Client can be found on the Windows 2000 Server installation CD Please note that some countries have laws against strong encryption please refer to the Miscrosoft WEB site for details on SSL export restrictions in Microsoft products If authentication is required you will probably need to acquire and install a client certificate Certificates Certificates are stored in the PC s system certificate database The certificate database can be viewed via the Internet properties dialog boxes either from the Control Panel or from Internet Explorer s tools menu Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 281 Administrator notes Internet options Content Certificates
11. cable for CTS flow control oOoANN BONU O 268 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes DPS6000 configuration You should normally configure the PC as a 7801 terminal This will be done with something like the following in your CLM_USER file ATD 52 20 X C280 0 9600 7801 DEVICE ATD02 52 20 X C280 ATD02 255 Most of these parameters are dependent upon your hardware configuration and will be set by the system administrator The important parameter is the 7801 terminal type For full Server functionality you must also ensure that the terminal runs the GVLINK video interface module rather than the standard VIP7801 module GV7801 To do this simply change the Answer to ENQ string in the emulation options menu to send 730G instead of the standard 7301 or 7801 Server6 will detect this and automatically start the correct handler for your terminal If this is not possible for any reason and you get the incorrect handler note that Server 6 also provides facilities for configuring your terminal via a PROFILE to ensure that you do get the GVLINK module If all else fails start the handler yourself using GVIDEO OFF to turn off the incorrect interface GVIDEO DEV LINK EC You may also have a printer on your PC that you would like to configure as a DPS6000 device this will allow other DPS6000 users to direct their output to your printer The configurati
12. GLUSE directory Files affected by this parameter are the following Configuration files default DEF g1inkconfig Dial directories default GLINK PHO Appointment files default GLINK APP If a user directory is specified then keyboard transliteration glinkxlit and keyboard layout layouts glinklayout files may reside either in the standard Glink config directory CD or in the user directory If one of these files exists in both directories then the user directory takes precedence Additionally if the help files are not found in the Glink directory then the program will also search for them in this user directory Password for dial directory V This parameter lets you specify the password for the dial directory directly from the command line thus avoiding the password question that would otherwise be asked when the dial directory is called up This may be found useful in the case where you want to run an unattended job with a password protected dial directory but be aware that this compromises security somewhat Version update VER 28 This parameter can be used to initiate automatic Glink updates in a web controlled Glink environment VER 723 http Awww mydomain com glink download glinksetup exe At each execution Glink will check if its version is less than the version in the command line Glink version 7 2 3 in this example if so it will access the web server and download and execute the new ve
13. If there is no response or you cannot see what you are typing then repeat the command At the latest by the second try you should see what you are typing and receive an answer of OK from your modem If you do not then either you are set up incorrectly wrong communication speed wrong communications port etc you have a cabling problem or you do not have a Hayes compatible modem after all Check your configuration settings your modem manual and your modem cable and try again Given that you now have a response from the modem see which commands are relevant for your modem both by checking the modem manual and by trying to type in the commands manually To see whether your modem accepts a particular command type AT then the command and then press the ENTER key For example to see whether your modem accepts the amp C1 command type AT amp C1 lt enter gt If the modem accepts the command it will answer OK if it does not then it will answer ERR If it does not answer at all then you probably made a typing mistake with the AT at the beginning of the line try again Once you have decided which additional commands you wish to include in your setup then you can add them to the end of the modem initialization string You only have to add the commands themselves not the AT A line starting with AT can contain multiple commands 202 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator
14. Keyboard mappings E Function bar 4 Keyboard bar E Menu setup Layout name HE F3 Te functi h dina ER um Selected function Selected key H Glink functions EO Macros Mapped to zave EE Scripts 7 E z E Menu shortcuts Configured on Map key to EA Settings Terminal type EA Characters Remove mapping You configure your Glink keyboard layout using a friendly graphical interface GUTI in a single configuration window The Glink emulation window is updated with your configuration changes dynamically as you make them The basic mode of operation is that you expand the function tree in the Functions pane to reach the function you would like to configure and then drag it to the Keyboard pane and drop it on the key or key combination where you would like the function Completely new functions are first defined as macros in the function tree in the Functions pane and then the macro is dragged and dropped in the same way as any other function Single ASCII characters are a special case You don t need to use a macro the whole of the PC character set is provided as a set of functions in the Characters category in the function tree 172 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator There is a separate group with tabbed panes for the Function bar the Keyboard bar and the Menu setup You can configure each of these in the same way by dragging a function from the
15. ssssssssssssee 95 TN5250 Printer device request print transform eee 95 TN5250 Printer device model etre i ein 96 TN5250 Printer device paper source 1 sse 100 TN5250 Printer device paper source 2 sssssssssseeeeee 100 TN5250 Printer device envelope source ssssssesess 101 TN5250 MOdSL 55d dere p Eme bem ME ERE vs 101 EN VIPARESOURCE MAME 66 eer erf ette e ie rei eee iode 102 TNVIP Terminal type it trei tee ee E Pd RS ns 102 TE WO WITe COriieCtIOD oh des podre e ER eee ts 102 Use notifications ot idend eee nee ies 103 Use PUT EY SSHD3 5 n dnniechsameeat antreten A 103 Use secure sockets SSL 5n ide e et eee et ias 104 Wet datas isst hee etam vi ese ebbe tea hebes 104 USER SOUP oontra EE eerte ie 104 X 25 addtes 55 aen ent doe hb bet e eeu 104 X 25 TAW mode 3 tte va et edet ba ies 104 X our locatiOn sa nescio ee d e dedi ets 105 Host configuration for Ggate and DGA ssssssssssseeeeeeenenee 106 Additional parameters cccccecscessceesceseceseeeecesecesecaecseecaeecaeeeneeeaeeneeeneeeas 106 Billig in tres cete E lta tea ahs mele ts f EU EL LEE oda 107 Deleted coe ts i a8 td M debi tds dion E E tdt 107 DeSCEIDUOD A tede ttt ee teu iit dels 107 Ggate coname Ggate only 107 GRTS LID user string E enne nnne 108 Host application mailbox sess eee 108 HOStnode zi eiae eo ee M de ete 108 Host profile name
16. window size This option should not be chosen if you need to run in VIP7800 72 line scroll mode Fonts This screen allows you to define which fonts and font sizes should be used in the emulator window Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 215 Configuring the emulator GLINK Screen properties 7 Em amp Screen colors ga VIP attribute mapping ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Color adjustments Window attributes A Fonts FE Toolbar setup Options 9 Facelifting Default fonts Character set 40 column 80 column 132 column Auto 1x8 14x8 Juxs VllUse Windows font V Spread font to fit window V Show fixed fonts only Font name Font style TE BatangChe a TE DFKai SB E TE DotumChe ae FangSong TE GulimChe GungsuhChe _ hd N AaBbCc XxYyZz 0123 OK Cancel j Character set This option allows you to select the character set that Glink will use internally If you leave it set to Auto Glink will default to the same character set as you are using in Windows Glink has its own fonts for Latin 1 Latin 2 and Greek If you need another language Cyrillic Arabic Hebrew Chinese Japanese etc then you must first select Use Windows fonts This will change the list of character sets presented by this option This choice is closely tied to the transliteration that you will need between the Glink character set and the mainframe cha
17. Administrator s Guide 211 Configuring the emulator Title includes host name Normally Glink will include the name of the currently connected host as set either from the dial directory or using the script HOST command as part of the title bar in the emulation window If you would rather that this should not be done then remove the check from this checkbox Undockable bars Specifies whether the bars can be moved and undocked If this option is not set then the toolbars will not have a grabbing area and will look more like they did in previous versions of Glink Update threshold characters This option controls how often the screen should be updated in relation to the number of characters that have been received from the line since the last screen update If the number of characters specified here have been received without a screen update then the screen update will be forced unless overridden by the line update setting Careful setting of this parameter in combination with the line update setting can provide considerable increases in perceived performance If the screen has scrolled when the character update threshold is reached the scroll will be performed by updating the entire screen in contrast to the line update which will use internal Windows routines to scroll the screen We suggest that you experiment with a large value for example 2000 in the screen update threshold characters parameter and try different values for the
18. Dumb modem configuration If you have a dumb modem then you must dial the number of the host machine yourself However before you do this set up the dial directory with the correct host information and or login script With the dial directory positioned on the host in question dial the number manually When you get into contact with the host machine press the DATA switch on your modem and immediately after wards press the ENTER key on your terminal to set parameters and start the script if any If you are using a dumb modem it s important that you blank the strings if any that are configured in the modem strings setup menu this tells Glink that all modem operations will be performed manually In order to be able to hang up correctly using ALT Y from the keyboard it s important that your modem be configured to drop the line when the DTR CCITT 108 2 line is toggled by the Glink program This will most often be something that must be configured using internal modem straps check your modem manual for more information Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 203 Configuring the emulator Screen setup To perform screen setup tasks select Settings Screen from the Glink menu bar The submenu presents you with the following selections from which you choose Settings Screen Screen colors VIP attribute mapping ANSI VT attribute mapping Color adjustments Window attributes Fonts Toolbar setup Options F
19. GLWIN directory on the same disk as Windows is run from Uninstalling Glink If the SETUP or NETSETUP programs have been used to install Glink then it can be uninstalled by either using the GLUNINST program or by using the Add Remove Programs option in the Windows Control Panel which in turn runs the GLUNINST program The GLUNINST program deletes all the files and icons created by the Glink installation It will NOT delete any user created files such as configuration files or scripts 8 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Upgrading Glink To upgrade an existing installation of Glink follow exactly the same procedure as for first time installation see above Before running the SETUP program make sure that you are not running any copies of the software Otherwise SETUP will be unable to update the program files The installation procedure should detect that a previous version of Glink has been installed and will ask you whether it s OK for that version to be overwritten Note that only those files supplied with the software will be overwritten Files that belong to your previous version of Glink will be preserved this includes any configuration files keyboard layout files and script files that you may have created using the previous release Unless otherwise noted in the What s New section of the online help all versions of the software are backwards compatible so all such files w
20. Robertson Web modes You can customize the master application screen template that controls the basic appearance of the screens displayed by a given mainframe application You can choose wallpaper to enhance the cohesion of your core business applications or to emphasize the identity of a given application You can add custom headers with a company logo and custom footers with a URL to application information or perhaps for sending an e mail message GlinkWeb facelifting The GlinkWeb Forms Assistant tool gives full access to each mainframe screen in custom JSP or ASPX pages allowing the developer to retrieve screen elements in text or HTML formats for display in an enhanced mode or for automatic processing that transmits data directly back to the host eliminating display of the screen The GlinkWeb Forms Assistant assists you in identifying and customizing the individual screens that are delivered by the mainframe application Using the GlinkWeb Forms Assistant you can step through your core business application and identify screens that you would like to facelift On screen recognition customized JSP or ASPX pages are executed inheriting the current Glink page object allowing the custom pages to interact with the GlinkWeb server This allows you to give a custom view of the application quite divorced from the look and feel of the original screens Web enabling and facelifting of the core business applications on your mainframe syste
21. There are no requirements for the names used in this list other than that they be valid addresses that can be used both from the license server and from the clients to reach the backup machines For example remembering that all such parameters must be supplied in the line used to install the service and that the service must be reinstalled in order to change the default parameters being used gllservice stop uninstall gllservice install start alt backupl mydomain com backup2 mydomain com altint This is used to specify the polling interval in seconds for alternate backup license servers Only names of backup servers that are currently active will be supplied to clients and in the case of a crash on the main licensing server only names of servers that were active at the time of the crash will be used for backup licensing The default value for this parameter is 60 seconds backup This is used to install the licensing service on a backup machine When the service is installed with this parameter there are three absolute requirements the name parameter must be used to specify the name of the machine on which the main license server is running This must match the machine name being used by the clients specified in the LS command line parameter and the name being used by the main license server 34 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation the main license server must be available at the t
22. Use Function bar Displays the function bar The function bar is an emulation dependent bar which displays the emulation s function keys such as F1 F12 SF1 SF12 PF1 PF24 etc You may also turn the bar on and off dynamically using the option for this in the System menu Use Keyboard bar Displays the keyboard bar The keyboard bar is an emulation dependent bar which displays the most common emulation keys You may also turn the bar on and off dynamically using the option for this in the System menu Use Menu bar In certain cases it can be useful to suppress the main menu bar in the Glink window This could for example be because you have selected the smallest avail able font and wish to have the window occupy as little space as possible If you have turned off the menu bar using this option you may redisplay it using the option provided for this purpose in the system menu Use Status bar In certain cases it can be useful to suppress the status bar at the bottom of the Glink window This could for example be because you have selected the smallest available font and wish to have the window occupy as little space as possible If you have turned off the status bar using this option you may redisplay it using the option provided for this purpose in the system menu Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 213 Configuring the emulator Use Toolbar As an alternative to the normal menu items or as an adjunct
23. configuration of the host and or application the two attention signals SA1 attention type 1 A2 attention type 2 lower case support LC ON off and identification query SID from the communications product using the handler Additionally for the Ggate interface there is an extended disconnect command DI HOLD OFF Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 119 Configuring the emulator 120 You can type messages and transmit them The line handler will recognize messages starting with Unknown service messages messages beginning with S but where the 2 3 following characters are not recognized will cause an error message If you need to be able to transmit data messages that start with then you can fix Glink CFIX 2875 to send messages as data The DSA service messages can still be sent using the Local dialog menu which when you are already connected displays a menu of service messages SDIS force disconnection normally done by application SBRK sends attention type 1 against turn if necessary The host and or application session may be configured to purge undelivered data when a break is sent The default configuration for break is GCOS8 Attention and purge GCOS7 Attention only DNS Attention only For DSA300 applications CXI applications such as TP8 an option data attention may be negotiated For these applications a data attention 1s used instead of attention wh
24. directive 46 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation OptionChecked This specifies whether an optional icon is to be displayed with a pre checked checkbox in the dialog that is displayed to allow the user to select which icons should be installed Specify with OptionChecked TRUI GI or OptionChecked FALS Gl OptionName When a list of optional icons is displayed then the text specified with the IconTitle command will appear as the description for the option unless you wish something else to be used in which case you can specify the text using this directive For example OptionName Connect to IOV3 with Ggate Replacelcons This directive specifies that icons will replace icons with the same title The default is to add new icons to the group when the group already exists For example ReplaceIcons Y es ScriptDirectoryFrom This directive allows you to preinstall files in the user script directory see the UserScriptDirectory directive All files in the specified directory will be copied to the user script directory This may possibly be used as an alternative to a shared script directory on the network or possibly to provide the user with scripts that you expect to be modified on a user basis For example ScriptDirectoryFrom K GLWIN USERSCR See also the ScriptDirectoryOverWrite directive Unlike most other directives this directive will not carry over into the next
25. glink msi and runs MSIEXEC Microsoft Windows Installer runtime to install it using the following options msiexec i glink msi The Glink installation bootstrap will detect if Glink is already installed then prompt to re install Glink If accepted it will execute msiexec i glink msi REINSTALL ALL REINSTALLMODE vomus If you run the Glink installation bootstrap with X then it will uninstall Glink using msiexec x glink msi The Glink installation bootstrap program recognizes the following command line options LANGUAGE ul el fl d nls Sets default installation language international Glink package only EXTRACT Extracts glink msi package QN Per machine silent installation msiexec FASTOEM 1 ALLUSERS 1 All unrecognized options are passed on directly on to the MSIEXEC command line You can log the Glink Installation using the standard MSI L option glinkinstallpackage exe 1 mylog txt will execute msiexec i glink msi 1 mylog txt 244 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Installation Variables The Glink MSI Installation package supports a number of configurable internal MSI variables GLINKCMDLINE lt glink cmdline options gt Specifies the default Glink command line option to be added to the glink ini glinkdata file Default is picked up from previous Glink installation GLINKDESKTOPICON 1 0 Add a Glink desktop icon Default
26. or minimized window here if you wish Default means that the window will be displayed in the form that was specified when the program was started for example if you specify run minimized in the Program Manager then the program will start as an icon Normal means that the window will display as a normal window irrespective of how the program is started 214 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Icon will start the program as an icon Maximize will start the program in a maximized window Window resizing options This option allows you to select what action should be taken when the window is resized The default is to change the area of the screen window that is actually displayed retaining the same font and logical screen size and adding scroll bars when necessary The option may laso be set using the script SET RESIZE command If you choose to adjust the font size then the size of the display font will be adjusted so that the entire logical screen will fit inside the window If you are using an emulation that allows the host to switch the screen size for example IBM3278 4 which can switch between 24 and 43 lines then you may want to remove the Spread font to fit window option in Settings gt Screen Fonts If you choose to adjust rows columns instead then the current font will be retained but the logical screen size will be changed so as to fit the current display
27. the default use of tab backtab cursor up and down keys will wrap around from the end of the form to the beginning and vice versa If the option is not set then use of these keys at the start or end of the form will produce an error message and no cursor movement Wincom compatibility mode This option affects the way input in VIP numeric fields defined with GS4 rather than with DAQ is checked For compatibility with Wincom only the characters and 0 9 are allowed If the option is not checked then normal VIP numeric checking is applied and all characters in columns 2 and 3 of the ASCII table are allowed Entry of the euro and pound currency signs will also be allowed in both cases so long as the use extended character set option is checked Wrap on page overflow Handle host data overflow by wrapping around to the top of the screen rather than waiting for the user to press the ENTER key 146 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator IBM 3270 5250 setup To view the IBM 3270 5250 emulator options screen select IBM 3270 5250 setup fromthe Settings Emulation menu i i Mode 255 Initial setup ms VIP mode setup ox DKU mode setup Geil 18M 3270 5250 setup os Transliteration Language International X C Typeahead mode 7 Preserve insert mode on transmit 3270 options 5250 options Numeric checking V Wrap
28. will send the parameters that are already configured centrally for display in the dialog box Any parameters you set manually override those set in the CONAME assuming that you are allowed to do so in the CONAME configuration If no list is available you can type in the Ggate coname The coname list feacture requires G amp R HostLinks version 6 1 or above and if not desired can be disabled in Glink with CFIX 3524 1 See also the Printer connection name option Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 107 Configuring the emulator GRTS LID user string This parameter is used to define the user record for the host subsystem to which you are connecting The user record is required when the target GCOSS site has a Secure Workstation Environment or is using the ID CHECK package developed by Bull Norway for securing networks In some situations the LID is generated by combining the value of this parameter with the local mailbox name The method being used for generating the LID 1s determined by the GRID and NGRID parameters in the Datanet configuration When communicating with GCOS7 hosts the string NEW may be used which will force GCOS7 to start the dialogue by presenting the top level menu Normally it would have tried to reconnect at the level you aborted in the previous host session Host application mailbox Specifies the name of the application mailbox for the host subsystem to which you are connect
29. 1 0 The SET SSL PROTOCOL script command can also be used to set this option Key exchange This option determines which encryption algorithm is to be used to exchange the initial handshake of private encryption keys You should choose automatic in most cases Automatic RSA Rivest Shamir Adleman DH Diffie Hellman The SET SSL KEYEXCHANGE script command can also be used to set this option Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 127 Configuring the emulator Emulation setup To perform emulation setup tasks select Settings Emulation from the Glink menu bar The submenu presents you with the following selections from which you choose Settings Emulation Mode Initial setup VIP mode setup DKU mode setup IBM 3270 5250 setup a s pe Transliteration GLINK Emulator properties Mode Initial setup a VIP mode setup i DKU mode setup E IBM 3270 5250 setup 5 IBM5250 VIP7700 ANSI 3 64 DKU7107 VT102 340 2 DKU7102 Prestel BM3270 Minitel IBM3151 Set as initial mode 128 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator This selection allows you to select the operating mode of the emulator You can choose from the modes shown in the dialog box In the case where you also want the emulator to use the mode being set as the initial mode at startup check the option fo
30. 124 Secure Sockets Layer SSL options essssssesseeeee eene 125 Server yalidationi onec ws nete t re e t aeree 125 Validate server certificate 4 o aside eet netu ens 125 Validate server name sess 126 CTient validation a i awa tea etie om Ratis 126 Certificate nate dose hat t bei t aver 126 Protocols edt oot ento eR M o T nier sheds 126 Key exchange eot een der DE Ns Mer esent 127 Eraulationsset p deterius 128 MG shoe o tun de best ot ted Ss der D tr Ps dn e PANEL edocti 128 Initial setup eodd eet INS SM dnd ism IU INS 129 Allow lowercase to host sess 130 ANSI Answerback essere enne 130 ANSI BBS compatibility essere 130 ANSI use high intensity essen 130 App keys when NumLock off sss 130 Auto Lanefeed In 4 see oed ngu de 131 Auto Linefeed Out eee teet tui eene 131 Destructive Backspace sssssessseeseeeeeene eene 131 Echoplex eec e RR TERRE EDD ee da 131 Erase with default bkgd sse 131 Left click moves Cursors eee eere re deeds 132 No column 81 reete de Re edt 132 Rollmode ete eee eet ieede 132 VIP mode Setups eie eee ren e i E e eie es 133 7200 attributes ient e ede eie Ride 133 Add CRLF in non SSM eee ee eei ede totes 134 Answer to ENQ cisci ei de edet de decade 134 Automatic tabbing Recon aac d e Pri Ease 134 Bl ck Modes icici cles tee AE ER O
31. CAMYFILES Glink will first look for the file in the Glink directory then the Windows directory NOTE the GlinkApi server will also read the GLINK INI GLINKDATA file and may be necessary when started on demand because command line options will not be passed to the server The T option above can be used for non default options that may be set in a similar way GL T SUSERS And the entry in GLINK INI GLINKDATA would be options default U CAMYFILES OU TEMP userl C DSA Options specified on the command line will always override options set in the GLINK INI GLINKDATA file GLWINOPT environment variable The GLWINOPT environment variable may be used to preset any or all of the above command line options You could include the command Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 17 Installation SET GLWINOPT U C MYFILES in your User or System environment and configure the Glink icon properties no parameters at all Options specified on the command line or in the GLINK INLGLINKDATA file will always override options set in the GLWINOPT variable Command line file glink 18 Command line options can be put in a glink file and used as a shortcut to start Glink e g c glwin demo glink startup dku7107_to_tp8test glink If the command line file is put on a web server then you can also start Glink from a web page e g http myweb com glink startup web dku7107_to_tp8test glink This is the basis
32. Functions pane and dropping it onto the item where you would like the function Your changes are saved to your Glink configuration file or you can save them to a specific keyboard layout file The layouts can be saved to your Glink configuration folder CD defaults to the folder from which you loaded Glink or to your Glink user folder U if you have one Examples Drag and drop a function to a key This is an example only since a DEC style VT keyboard layout is provided as a Glink standard keyboard layout and you can load it from the Layouts pane Most asynchronous terminals transmit an ASCII Backspace 0x08 from the Backspace key to invoke the delete character function in the application but VT102 340 terminals transmit the ASCII Delete 0x7F for that purpose and that is what the applications expect If you are familiar with the VT terminal you might prefer to transmit ASCII DEL from the PC Backspace key You can make this configuration change quickly and easily by dragging the ASCII Delete from the Functions pane and dropping it on the Backspace key in the Keyboard pane Select the VT102 340 terminal type in the Layouts pane Make sure that you have not selected a modifier key Shift Alt Alt Gr Ctrl in the Keyboard pane selected keys are colored green If a modifier key is selected de select it by single clicking it until it is no longer selected The Shift and Ctrl keys cycle from generic both left and right being sele
33. G amp R Ggate is a transparent gateway to the Bull primary network It is used to connect workstations running the G amp R Glink emulator or any of the terminal emulators terminal concentrators network printer emulators and file transfer clients servers in the G amp R Host Links or G amp R Gweb product sets Ggate moves all terminal handling down to the local Glink workstation or Host Links platform giving the user full DSA functionality for all GCOS connection modes including DAC DACQ and CXI for GCOSS and the standard GCOS7 mode with all DSA parameter settings user password billing etc Ggate centralizes and simplifies configuration of Bull mainframes under the control of an administrator If the mainframe has RFC1006 support Ggate can use it for the DSA connection If the mainframe requires OSI transport connections the expensive and often hard to configure OSI stack is only needed on the Ggate system Communication from Ggate client to Ggate gateway is commodity TCP IP G amp R Ggate is a package from the G amp R Host Links product set available on all major UNIX Linux platforms and is also available for Windows servers Ggate is bundled in the AIX version of GNSP on newer GCOSS systems and is available as an option for the Windows personality of the newer Diane systems PuTTY SSHD Glink s PuTTY SSHD network interface is used for communication with a Secure Shell Daemon SSHD over a TCP IP network When you select the interfac
34. II IBMA201 3 Proprinter III IBM 4202 1 Proprinter XL IBM 4202 2 Propinter II XL IBM 4202 3 Proprinter III XL IBM 4207 1 Proprinter X24 IBM 4207 2 Proprinter X24E IBM 4208 1 Proprinter XL24 IBM 4208 2 Proprinter XL24E IBM 4212 Proprinter 24P IBM4216 10 Personal Pageprinter IBM 4226 302 Printer IBM 4230 483 Printer IBM Mode IBM 4230 413 Printer IBM Mode IBM 4232 302 Printer IBM Mode IBM 4712 1Transaction Printer IBM 4712 2 Transaction Printer Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson BM47221 BM47222 IBM4770 IBM 5152 IBM 5201 BM5202 BM5204 BM5216 BM6408 BM6412 NECP2 NECP2200 NECP5200 NECP5300 NECP6200 NECP6300 OKII84IBM OKI320IBM OKI321IBM OKI390IBM OKI391IBM OKI393IBM OKIS90IBM OKIS91IBM OKI400 OKI800 OKI810 OKI820 OKI3410 PANII23EP PANII24EP PANII24IEP PANIISOEP PANIISOIEP PANII91EP PAN1624EP PAN1654EP PANIG695EP PAN2123EP PAN2124EP PAN2180EP X X X X X X X Gallagher amp Robertson NECP2200XE Configuring the emulator IBM 4722 1 Document Printer IBM 4722 2 Document Printer IBM 4770 InkJet Transaction Printer IBM 5152 Graphics Printer IBM5201 2 Quietwriter IBM 5202 1 Quietwriter III IBM5204 1Quickwriter IBM 5216 Wheelprinter IBM 6408 A00 Printer IBM Mode IBM 6408 CTA Printer IBM Mode IBM 6412 A00 Printer IBM Mode IBM 6412 CTA Printer IBM Mode NEC P2Pinwriter NEC P22
35. IP address above you would specify 129 1 1 150 1311 SSHD User name Enter the user name by which you are known to the SSH Daemon 124 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Secure Sockets Layer SSL options Please refer to the Secure Sockets Layer SSL section for more general information about SSL and the Glink Script Reference Manual for details on the SET SSL script command GLINK Secure Socket Settings ZAX Server validation 7 Validate server certificate Validate server name Current server name gars Specific server name Client validation Authenticate with certificate Certificate name Protocols Automatic PCT Private Communication Technology 1 0 SSL Secure Socket Layer 2 0 SSL Secure Socket Layer 3 0 TLS Transport Layer Security 1 0 Key exchange Automatic RSA Rivest Shamir Adleman DH Diffie Hellman RE Server validation These options tell Glink to negotiate server authentication and request a server certificate from the host system Validate server certificate Glink verifies that the server certificate is from a Trusted root certificate authority Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 125 Configuring the emulator Validate server name If this option is used Glink will verify that the server name CN value contained in the received certificate corresponds to Current server nam Specific
36. If the option is not checked then the image will be displayed with its actual size and either truncated or tiled so as to cover the entire area Wallpaper This option allows you to specify the name of a file to be used as background wallpaper for the emulator screen The file must be either a bitmap BMP or JPEG JPG file if any other type is chosen then it will simply not be displayed The wallpaper file selection list is preinitialized with all installed images in the Glink directory If the image is smaller than the size of the emulation screen then it will be tiled so as to completely cover the screen area Wallpaper does not scroll If this option is checked then the wallpaper will always be displayed in the same place on the screen if not then the image will scroll along with the text 228 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Sound setup You can view the sound setup dialog box by selecting Settings Sound from the Glink menu bar GLINK Sound setup 9 m3 C Windows LL tracing m Emulator alarm twain 32 Web Toneanu WindowsMobile E Failed transfer alarm winsxs lt beep gt z Connect alarm Silent mode m ain The sound setup dialog box allows you to associate WAV sound files with various events in much the same way as the sound setup option of the Windows Control Panel Click on the event you wish to associate with a sound and
37. TN3270 RFC1576 or TN3270E RFC2355 to connect to any TN3270 SNA gateway or front end LU name selection and print are supported using the TN3270 extensions that give improved handling of screen and print sessions TN5250 TN5250E IBM AS400 systems or other host systems that supports the 5250 family of terminals can be accessed using TN5250 RFC1205 or TN5250E RFC2877 connecting directly to the AS400 or through a Telnet 5250 server Device name selection and print are supported using the TN5250 extensions that give improved handling of screen and print sessions TNVIP Bull systems can be accessed using TNVIP protocol RFC1921 The TNVIP servers in the MainWay the Bull DPX 20 GCOS8 GNSP the Open Systems personalities of GCOS7 Diane systems and G amp R Ggate are all qualified However RFC1006 DSA over TCP IP increases throughput as compared to using TNVIP It also gives a real fully functional DSA or DIWS session over the TCP IP network as compared to the limited terminal session offered by TNVIP myhost com 7323 The MainWay TNVIP server normally uses the default Telnet port number 23 but may need the TNVIP resource name to select a specific configuration Security Secure Shell SSH Glink uses the Secure Shell SSH protocol provided by the PuTTY plink module The PuTTY software is truly freeware and is distributed under the MIT license similar to BSD http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty download htm
38. X 25 TGX You will normally choose Windows as the interface to use for access to the serial port thus making use of the built in support provided by Windows If you use a TCP IP connection then you should use the Windows Sockets interface if it is available on the communications stack you are using Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 73 Configuring the emulator Many other interfaces are supported for use with different hardware or network environments Specific information about each of these will be found in the Communications Interfaces appendix to this guide on page 284 As an aid to help you find the particular interface you need they have been grouped into sets of similar interfaces so that you can restrict the choices available to those in which you are interested Unless you specify None as your communications interface which tells Glink not to start a communications interface at all Glink displays a screen of options specific to your interface selection The following describes all of the communi cations options for all interfaces any single interface offers only a subset of these options The options are presented here in alphabetical order for easy refe rence Communications options You choose your communications options when you select your interface You can later modify these selections from the communications options screen select Settings Communications Options from the Gli
39. a licence to use the software and to make those copies you deem necessary for your own security The package itself remains the property of Gallagher amp Robertson A S and we expect you to take all reasonable precautions to ensure that illegal copies are not made by a third party Support Support is available from your local supplier rather than from Gallagher amp Robertson A S For information about support numbers check the information screen in the program itself This screen can be displayed from the Glink menu bar Help About Glink 2 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Installation Before you install the software Installing and upgrading the Glink software is made easy for you with the SETUP program included on your release diskette The installation procedure will consist first of running SETUP which will copy and if necessary decom press the files you need from the release diskette s onto your hard disk If you are upgrading the software then your previous configuration will be preserved and you will be ready to run If this is your first installation then a preconfigured procedure will help you with your initial setup the first time you start the program Before you actually install the software we recommend that you make a backup copy of the release diskette and use that copy for the installation procedure Keep the original in a safe place in case you should have a prob
40. administrators and gives information on installing and configuring Glink A Network setup section describes how Glink can be setup in server and workstation environments Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 1 Introduction Warranty While Gallagher amp Robertson A S have made every effort to ensure that this software package should function as described no warranty of any kind express or implied is made by us Gallagher amp Robertson A S shall not be liable for any damages direct indirect special or consequential arising from a failure of this program to operate in the manner desired by the user Gallagher amp Robertson A S shall not be liable for any damage to data or property that may be caused directly or indirectly by the use of this program In no event will Gallagher amp Robertson A S be liable to you for any damages including lost profits savings or other incidental or consequential damages arising from your use or inability to use the program or for any claim by any other party Any dispute arising in connection with this warranty will be settled under Norwegian law Gallagher amp Robertson A S confirm their intention that the software should function as described and will make all reasonable efforts to ensure that errors in the software reported in writing to our office in Oslo be corrected in future releases of the software Gallagher amp Robertson A S grant you as a registered user of Glink
41. allows you to specify where the command line field is situated on the INDSFILE host transfer FORM when using the Transfers File transfer menu Normally the cursor is already positioned on the correct field so the default value of ZERO should be used Glink will always clear that field before entering the new file transfer command and transmitting to the host The possible values are from 127 to minus 128 These correspond to TABs or BACKTABs from the HOME position Save aborted downloads When this option is turned on the file resulting from a failed download is not erased but left on your disk there may be parts of the file that are usable With the option off files are only preserved if the file transfer is successful Small transfer window The default file transfer window occupies almost all the available vertical space on the screen and shows a great amount of detail about the transfer currently in progress If you prefer a minimum of information just enough to let you know how things are going then you can use a smaller window that only provides the most important items of information about the transfer by setting this option Upload directory This parameter specifies the name of a directory that will be checked if the name of a file to be sent to the host is not found in the current directory This also applies to the automatic transfers if a simple file name is specified by the host The upload directory is however not checked in
42. an Atlantis multiport card you may select the physical channel to be used A D using the option in the communications setup menu If you are using an Atlantis single port card leave this option at its default value of A Cirel FPX X 25 The Cirel FPX X 25 interface in Glink accesses Cirel s X 25 Communication software for X 25 PAD connections You need the X25 DLL and MIPWIN3 DLL to be accessible from Glink This can be done by putting them in the Glink directory or in the Windows or Windows system directory or add their directory to the PATH This interface can be used to connect via the Cirel Gateway over a NetBIOS LAN or directly to the Cirel communications card in the PC Different Cirel cards are supported amongst them are the FPM card which connects to a TCS TCU instead of a terminal and the FPX card which may be used for a standalone or LAN multistation connection over TGX25 294 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces Cirel VTI3 The Cirel FPX VTI3 interface in Glink accesses Cirel s VTI3 Communication software for Bull synchronous connections You need the VTI3 DLL and MIPWIN3 DLL to be accessible from Glink This can be done by putting them in the Glink directory or in the Windows or Windows system directory or add their directory to the PATH This interface can be used to connect via the Cirel Gateway over a NetBIOS LAN or directly to the Cirel communications card in the PC Di
43. any necessary translation for you while sending data directly to the printer In this mode Glink will try to convert control characters that are used internally to represent graphics into their nearest PC equivalent if you don t want this then select the PC OEM x option If your print setup is such that you don t want this translation to be done for example if you are printing to a file then you can choose Windows Additionally if you are using a printer which uses the HP Roman character set then a separate choice is provided for this which will give you correct output of national characters in the extended character set Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 171 Configuring the emulator Keyboard Layout setup Overview os amp Glink keyboard layou Ax File Edit Help Keyboard Esc F F2 F3 Fa s F6 F7 FB F9 F10 F11 F12 Pt Sv pase nk ck sk Scn Lock 5 a la ls i e Ins Home Page Nik 1 2 3 4 s 5 6 7 48 7 9 YO y w Up fo oQ w tE R TrT v u o e A Del End Page 7 DE BOBR PPPPEPEM a Dadak Cpstok A s p F G n fa K ejeje 4 s qe 1 z x ce v 8 N M 1 1 eme lt uj End l PgDn Ctrl Alt AltGr Ctrl D l T Ins Del L Selected key Ej Mapped key Ej Reserved key J Unmapped key Layouts Functions
44. applications BC Stub link library for UVTI applications VC Header file for use with C applications Help file for UVTI Debugging front end for UVTI32 DLL Pascal definitions for UVTI Sample INI file for UVTI Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson jbAPI32 DLL 32VC I m jSCREXO C jbAPI32 LIB 3 IB HHLLAPI INI jbAPI H jbDB32 DLL iSCREXO QG QOO ud zx Gusmu mu RI R jSCREXO jSCREXO D PA D H mM j Installation HLLAPI dynamic link library Stub link library for HLLAPI applications BC Stub link library for HLLAPI applications VC Example Windows configuration file for HLLAPI Header file for use with C applications Debugging front end for HLLAPI32 DLL Script extension example in C DEF file for the above Script extension example in Borland Pascal Compiled script extension DLL example The files on the release diskette will not necessarily have the above names in that they will usually be delivered in a compressed format The list refers to the names of the files as they will appear on your hard disk after installation Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 55 Installation Multiple language versions Glink is delivered and may be installed with support for more than one operating language A multiple language installation will contain files called GLLx DLL where x is a
45. are filled with trailing spaces and sent as a continuous stream with no delimiters This option should normally be turned on Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Suppress status line This option tells Glink not to display data in the status line other than when instructed to do so by the host machine This option may be found useful in situations where you wish to make hard copies of the screen using the PRTSCR key note however that the built in hard copy with ALt P suppresses the status line in any case Terminator This determines whether messages should be delimited with an ETX or EOT character this applies to all messages in Forms or Text mode and to status messages in Character mode TSM8 enable This option specifies whether TSM8 should be enabled If this option is OFF then all forms will be sent from the host with it ON a TSMS application will use your hard disk to store forms TSMG forms directory This option specifies the root directory on which TSM8 forms will be placed subdirectories will be created at the request of the host This directory must be specified in order to enable TSMS it will be created if necessary The secondary directory is only available for TSMS and if specified then this directory will also be searched when a form is not present on the main forms directory and the form cop
46. as documented in the Host Links Ggate and Gline documentation The parameters corresponding with the fields in the configuration menu are 118 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator I iw D Host application mailbox Host node User ID Password Project Billing Host type Terminal mode GRTS LID user string ailbox extension Local mailbox name O Printer connection session name Printer connect to host L IBM log mode Description W v G agora Bo ee QQ Z amp iu z Parameters not in this list may be used as needed and are displayed in the additional parameters field If you have chosen interactive entry for a parameter this is marked in GLHOST INI GLINKDATA with a single asterisk as the first character for that parameter remaining characters if any will be used to form the default value that s presented in the user login dialog The description field 1s not sent to DSA and has only local significance It must be the last parameter on the line this is because it may contain embedded spaces and hyphens A typical line in the GLHOST INI GLINKDATA file might therefore look like this DPS8TSS da TSS dn PH13 du mdrobertson d dp gar hm DPS8 tm VIP7804 Phoenix Forum Service messages The DSA handlers accept DSA service messages for disconnect DIS break S SBRK attention and possibly purge undelivered data depending on
47. be inactive enabled or disabled If this option is inactive or disabled then all forms will be sent from the host When enabled TCS applications will use your hard disk to store forms When disabled the emulator will completely ignore TCS sequences If inactive it will reply a TCS NAK to any host TCS sequences If DKU7107D DKU7007D or DKU7211D has been selected as the terminal type in either TNVIP or Ggate connections then this option will automatically be turned on unless this option is set to Disable TCS forms directory This option specifies the root directory on which TCS forms will be placed subdirectories will be created at the request of the host This directory must be specified in order to enable TCS it will be created 1f necessary 144 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator If only a directory name is supplied without the preceding full path then the directory will be created under the Glink User directory This is the case of the default tcs value which will be created in the Glink User directory TCS logical NAK This option allows you to configure the logical NAK returned to the host TCS application if a FORM does not exist locally or if an error occurs Normally this will be b however some old TCS application require the NAK to be single quote character The logical NAK may also be referred to as PGOF Terminator This determines whether messages shou
48. can make your connection to a service on the same system as the SSH server or another system via the SSH server system In the latter case your connection is only secured by Glink as far as the SSH server the path from there to the target service should be secured by other means your internal systems firewall When you use this option the first Glink you start automatically opens a command line SSH channel to the SSHD server system using the PuTTY plink module The first Glink and all new instances of Glink using the same SSHD server will multiplex on this channel regardless of the target service protocol or system The last Glink to close will close the SSH channel Typically you will run the first time without checking the plink hide option so as to make sure you can connect without needing to interact with the plink console window You must answer yes to the question about whether to store the server key in the registry Once you have reached the situation where plink starts up by itself you can check the option for hiding it so that use of the SSH channel is transparent Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 103 Configuring the emulator Use secure sockets SSL If this option is enabled you will be able to configure your host connection to be a secure connection To configure secure sockets click the Configure button If no port number is specified in the IP address then the following values will be s
49. cases it could be an option to use both Note also that the transmit saves in scrollback is only applied for block emulations like 3270 Questar and VIP7800 operating in text or forms modes Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 223 Configuring the emulator Facelifting This selection allows you to set options that enable a number of features that control the outward appearance of the emulator window GLINK Screen properties Screen colors VIP attribute mapping ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Color adjustments Window attributes Fonts Toolbar setup g Options Facelifting WIBD effects Pushbuttons 3D variable field options V Fnn Custom Vwi Der ef ee Wl windows look and feel Pron Restrict search area V Windows cursor E PAnn Left 0 Right 0 7 Strip underline V S Fnn Top 0 Bottom 0 V Fix DKU attributes Wallpaper file bkwebjpg Browse Frame wallpaper file none E Browse E Wallpaper does not scroll E Stretch to fit screen Margins E Keep aspect ratio wallpaper Left 0 Right 0 Pixels E Keep aspect ratio frame Top 9 Bottom 0 Percent E Center wallpaper E Center frame Ce i The facelifting dialog also supports preview browsing by immediately displaying the selected background and display options in the Glink window 3D effects This option enables use of 3D effects for variable fields for those emulations that support th
50. choosing the User Password option from the dialing directory menu bar Passwords stored for the Ggate interface in the glhost ini glinkdata file are encrypted as a matter of course in that this file is a text file the dialing directory is stored in an internal format and as such already is protected from casual inspection to some extent You can disable the possibility of the user saving DIWS DSA login user ID and password lists by setting the corresponding configuration security option Recovering from unwanted configuration changes If you are dealing with inexperienced users or are an inexperienced user yourself then a prime concern is that you may inadvertently modify a vital configuration parameter and find yourself in a situation where the emulator no longer functions as it should One way of dealing with this is to prevent modification of either selected or indeed of any configuration changes More often you will be more concerned with being able to modify your configuration as needed but being able to recover from accidental changes that you are not able to identify specifically One simple way of dealing with this is of course to keep backups of your configuration files as you change them enabling you to step backwards through several generations of your setup until you ve localized which change is causing the problem Glink does not provide for automatic backup of configuration changes but you can use the script language to pro
51. defaults should be used Setting the option to a non zero value will also enable the Fill page line spacing option Line spacing Allows you to specify the space between the printed lines Auto specifies printer defaults for the configured font Fill page will tell Glink to spread the configured number of lines so as to fill the page completely Exactly will enable the Exact spacing options Exact spacing If these options are enabled they allow you to specify the line spacing exactly with one of the following units dots printer dots per line whole number inch inches per line decimal number cm centimeters per line decimal number Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 167 Configuring the emulator Ipi lines per inch decimal number Ipc lines per centimeter decimal number Margins These fields allow you define extra margins around the printed page only when using Windows printing Note that the bottom and right margins will only have an effect if you have selected automatic font sizing to fit the page The actual margins on the printed page will be larger depending upon the size of the font selected as most suitable Note also that this margin will be applied in addition to any non printable area of the page The margins may be defined in units of dots this is printer specific but allows the greatest accuracy inches specified to the nearest 1 100 of an inch or centimeters again to the nearest
52. does the Windows serial port interface Glink provides two levels of Telephony support Which of these is selected is determined by the setting of the Telephony controls modem option in the communications setup menu for the Telephony interface When the option is not selected then the interface is almost exactly equivalent to the Windows serial port interface except that rather than select a communications port you will be selecting one of the modems that you have configured for Windows This has the advantage that it s more compatible with other Windows programs that use the Telephony interface to access the modem and may also find communications resources that would not otherwise be available This method of accessing a modem also has the advantage that a previous setup that was working with your particular modem should continue to work well All you need to change is the communications interface and then select the appropriate modem from the supplied list The second level of support is enabled when the telephony controls modem option is set In this case Glink will leave all control of the modem to the Tele phony drivers including dial functionality when making calls This obviously requires that the modem has been set up correctly in Windows prior to using it in Glink The big advantage to doing business this way is that when Glink is not actively using the modem to make a call then the modem will be available for any other applicatio
53. emulator Configuring the emulator Select the Settings option from the main menu bar If you are operating in administrator mode then you will be able to choose from the following Toggles S Communications 3l Emulation El General gt Printer amp Keyboard amp Modem Screen Sound File transfer Id Save y Save As 99 Recall Load Defaults TIN fx Options Interface Q Mode 55 Initial setup GA VIP mode setup E DKU mode setup i IBM 3270 5250 setup 4 Lransiiteration sors gt Options i Windows GUI printing S Text printing Options 5 Strings Screen colours Uli VIP attribute mapping amp 3i ANSI VT DKU mono attribute mapping Colour adjustments ff window attributes A Fonts Ff Toolbar setup EF Options amp Facelfting 3l General idi Text 4 Kermit Otherwise the top level menu is replaced with a separate settings window Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 69 Configuring the emulator 70 GUNK File Help ld A r IN LJ Sa Communication Interface Emulation General Printer e gt B Keyboard Modem Screen Sound File transfer This window provides access to exactly the same options as does the menu bar but simplifies their use This is especially true when you are setting several options at th
54. emulator If this option is set then you will also be required to set the following additional options to inform the AS 400 of which printer driver to use when converting the printer session output These options should correspond with the physical PC or network printer configured in Glink Printer model Paper source 1 Paper source 2 Envelope source TN5250 Printer device model 96 When using print transform this option tells the AS 400 which type of printer you have configured in Glink for pass thru printing The AS 400 will then convert any printer output directly to the print format used by that printer model allowing the AS 400 to send binary print formats such as PCL to print bar codes images or other preformatted print The specified printer model must be defined on the AS 400 If your printer name does not appear in the list ask your AS 400 system administrator for the name identifying your printer and type it in Glink supplies the following list of predefined AS 400 printer model names CPQPMIS COMPAQ PageMark 15 HP Mode CPQPM20 COMPAQ PageMark 20 HP Mode EPAP2250 Epson ActionPrinter 2250 EPAP3250 Epson ActionPrinter 3250 EPAP5000 Epson ActionPrinter 5000 EPAP5500 Epson ActionPrinter 5500 EPDFX5000 Epson DFX 5000 EPDFX8000 Epson DFX 8000 EPFX850 Epson FX 850 EPFX870 Epson FX 870 EPFX1170 Epson FX 1170 EPLQ570 Epson LQ 570 EPLQ860 Epson LQ 860 EPLQ870 Epson LQ 870 EPLQI070 Epson L
55. esee aere eet etin Maile 87 Physical channel 5545 uae esee trem det eee dederint 87 Polladdtess 2 e ete A E e 88 Port channel number sse eene 88 Printer LU device name sss nennen ener 88 Profiles Direct GCOS access button sse 88 ProtOCOL ees 204 RE ses aces ac et tute tetti utet e 89 PVC number oot eee itti dee ates 89 Quality of Service QoS eee enne 89 Random Connect EE E 89 Rlogin user nE a n E R 89 SerVer Target sessed ahs onde ve t utes AO E A 90 SOCKS Server nicieni iein ite eed te ee E e dee en e e ede 90 Strip parity scettr tee ee e rt etie eee 90 TAPI controls modem esee eee dee e fe eed 90 Terminal flow control nce ttt te edet 91 Terminal type response nisnin nnen nen i e 92 Timeout ee 92 TN3270 Alternate screen size sss 92 TN3270 Associated LU etse tee petite e ded 93 TN3270 Extended telnet eene deci 93 TN3270 Modgl eerte reiten ee erret ere eas 93 TN3270 5250 LU Device name seseseeeeeerene nenne nennen eene enne 94 TN5250 Device informations sisine en en erre tae e UR 94 TN5250 Printer device message queue name ssssssseeeee 95 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide v Contents TN5250 Printer device message queue library sss 95 TN5250 Prnter device font ID ccce teet i D ette 95 TN5250 Printer device form feed type
56. for the distributor This information is displayed in the Glink Help About box The first 6 characters are fixed and are an abbreviation of the Glink distributor s name The following 12 characters are a reference number identifying the delivery Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 7 Installation An empty Expiry date field or a zero value signifies no expiry date otherwise the format YYMMDD must be respected Entering 021130 would indicate an expiry date on November 30 2002 Entering 040331 would indicate expiry on March 31 in year 2004 The Type field allows you to specify whether this is a commercial or demonstration version NOTE the Serial number field is case sensitive Optional command line parameters The SETUP program will usually be run with no parameters but in some cases it will be useful to be able to specify information in the command line both to provide additional options and to avoid the need for user interaction The following parameters are available C specifies that the software should be installed in a common group rather than a user group D specifies that an icon should be installed on the desktop in silent mode the default is not to add a desktop icon S run in silent mode do not prompt for any infor mation but use defaults where not overridden in the command line T directory specifies the target directory for the installation in silent mode the default is the
57. idt ie niei t feti eite hostels 45 IconiIndex 254 s t ode bee oc tet peer ferte s 45 Icontditle inae rettet tee pets 46 NetGlinkDirectory essere nennen enne 46 Aeae DITA a E 46 Optional 44555 A EE ent ti A E EE 46 Option E atete aE e E ee eee E 47 OpticniNaimme E EE ts 47 Replacel cons enti ee te dd A tides lass 47 ScriptDirectoryFrom ssessesseseeeeeeeee eene nennen nnne 47 ScriptDirectoryOverwrite esses 48 UninstallICOn i31 esce eMe ena teet 48 UserDirectoty ecce diede e etie ie erede etta 48 UserDirectoryFrom 2 ecce iacente rie eet ies 48 UserDirectoryOverwrite ve cc eie eere tee erre eie dnes 49 UserScriptDir ctoty recette e Rete eene it 49 WindowsDirectoryFrom seeeeseeseeeeeeeenn eren 49 WorkingDirectoty trente teer E e as 50 Examples eH ene ede ene 50 Release Contents tices nete aye epe WE etes 54 Multiple language versions sess 56 Last minute ch nges 5 escis ede ee Ei 57 Web TOES ous door etude es epo resa eene ee een treu eve aec eve ransas riesis enes D gt Web controlled Glink in a window eese 59 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide iii Contents Requirements 3t RO UE RR ER Hee eS 60 Web server considerations eese eene enne een nnns 60 Web controlled demo ettet ee A cte eee ove ete Oder NUS 62 Setting up the web controlled demo sse 62 How the web co
58. illustrate this the below script menulock scrgl could be executed at startup by using the S command line option or by configuring it in the Glink configuration file in the Settings General options MBar SYSTEM 1 DISABLE disable system menu Alt SP MBar SYSTEM 2 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 3 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 4 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 5 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 6 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 7 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 8 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 9 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 10 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 11 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 12 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 13 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 14 DISABLE MBar SYSTEM 15 DISABLE Set CAPTION OFF Set MENUBAR OFF Set TOOLBAR OFF 274 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Layout nul load nul glinklayout layout with Altt F4 Alt S and other undesirable functions removed Set RESIZE FONT Window MAXI When executed at startup this script will display the Glink emulation window over the whole screen similar to a real terminal no title no menu no system menu no toolbar just the status bar and the emulation windows The user will not be able to exit resize or configure Glink Configuration security options Some features of Glink can be inhibited in the Glink configuration file itself These options can only be set by using the CFIX script command Below is a list of the available values and their correspon
59. install UserDirectoryFrom This directive allows you to preinstall files in the Glink user directory see the UserDirectory directive All files in the specified directory will be copied to the user directory This will usually be things like canned user configuration files preloaded dial directories and so on For example UserDirectoryFrom K GLWIN USI Gl R See also the UserDirectoryOverwrite directive Unlike most other directives this directive will not carry over into the next section 48 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation UserDirectoryOverwrite This specifies whether the files that are copied to the user directory as a result of the UserDirectoryFrom directive should overwrite existing files of the same name in the user directory The default is not to overwrite such files The directive applies to all icons until a new UserDirectoryOverwrite directive is used So if you for example did want to overwrite existing files you could use UserDirectoryOverwrite Yes UserScriptDirectory This specifies the user script directory where user specific scripts are stored This will usually be on the user s local hard disk The default value for this parameter is sMyDocuments Glink scripts in other words UserScriptDirectory sMyDocuments Glink scripts If the directory does not exist then it will be created as part of the setup procedure See the ScriptDirectoryFrom directi
60. is 1 GLINKFOLDER lt targetdir gt Specifies the full target Glink installation path GLINKLANGUAGE US UK FR DE NO SU Glink language to install international package only GLINKLICENSEFILE lt source license gt Specifies the Glink license to install default is lt glinkmsidir gt glicence txt GLINKPROGRAMMENU 1 0 Add a Glink program menu icon Default is 1 GLINKPROGRAMMENUNAME lt name gt Specifies the Glink icon folder name under s ProgramMenu To silently install a per machine Glink to c glink using a Glink license file from f users glicense txt and setting the Glink start up command line options to start Glink with a dialog box to select a configuration from the c glwinc directory you could use the following command line glinkinstallpackage exe qn GLINKCMDLINE c e glwinc u c glwinc GLINKFOLDER c glink GLINKLICENSEFILE f users glicense txt Quoting variables is optional unless there are spaces in their values File Extraction and Customization If you need to use the Glink MSI file directly you can extract it from the bootstrap EXE using the EXTRACT command line option glinkinstallpackage exe EXTRACT The following files will be extracted to the current directory Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 245 Administrator notes glink msi Glink MSI installation package glicense txt Glink
61. keys that transmit a sequence when they are pressed You can redefine the Function keys of any terminal type in Glink but the method used varies depending on terminal type For some terminal types DKU IBM3151 the Function keys are defined as being programmable and for these types the Function key functions in the Glink function tree can be modified redefining the key to which the function is assigned For other terminal types the sequence that is transmitted from a Function key is fixed and as such is a fixed value function in the Glink function tree To change the sequence that is transmitted by a Function key for one of these other terminals you must define a macro and assign it to the key DKU7107 DKU7102 IBM3151 In this example we will modify the DKU7107 Function key F1 to transmit Function code 1 as a Function code 2 as space no escape sequence and followed by transmission of the transmittable area of the current screen Select the DKU7107 emulation in the Terminal type drop down list in the Layouts pane In the Functions pane expand the function tree category Terminal keys sub category Function keys In the case of the DKU7107 you will find three sub functions Action Function codes and Contents Expand Action to display three possibilities Send transmits the contents of the function the content can be null Send page transmits the contents of the function followed by transmission of the current screen Display
62. license file packing set Installation options When installing the glink msi file using MSIEXEC Microsoft Windows Installer runtime the packing set file must reside in the same directory as the source glink msi file otherwise default values will be used To install the correct Glink license file you can either update glicense txt in which case it reside in the same directory as the source glink msi file or use the GLINKLICENSEFILE MSI variable The packing set file sets Glink or standard MSI variables and accepts the following option common 1 0 Sets the standard MSI ALLUSER variable default is 1 desktop 1 0 Sets the GLINKDESKTOPICON variable default is 1 group lt name gt Sets the GLINKPROGRAMMENUNAME variable install lt targetpath gt Sets the GLINKFO language ule f dinis Sets the GLINKLANGUAGE variable international package only params lt cmdline gt Sets the GLINKCMDLINE variable DER variable To install a per machine Glink to c glink and setting the Glink start up command line options to start Glink with a dialog box to select a configuration from the c glwinc directory you could use the following options in packing set install c glink params c c glwinc u c glwinc Installation would be done by copying glink msi and the updated glicense txt and packing set to the target PC and double clicking it or executing msiexec i glink msi NOTE
63. mode eee tee rete vers 78 Don t wait for TURN nerui I Insee I DT IIR ss 79 Facilities i a UENIT 80 Gateway NAE 3 noter tse sette eee er UE ats 80 GDNET gateWay etse tere en sete ee Ue E I ge eed 80 Hardware address eret ene eder e CIE 80 Hold DTR on local oce teer heee tette te eee eie RR ee REUS 81 Host flow conttol teet eerte bs tae ao ERE Hee EE 81 CIS fow control host 3 i rette ree Ret ete 81 HOSUXON XOFE 5 tercero tttth teet tte teet EE ete eet eive reed 81 ISI 81 iv Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents lenis M B 82 Host profile name Ggate DGA sse 82 Hosts button Ggate gateway sse nennen 82 Tonore Carri OES E 82 liicunj M O a 82 IP addtess oe rhe RR RR ERR ERI DURER 83 lp 84 Keepaliveriterval Re th ne Rhee 84 TAME ANOMS au et etemetsai e niet tee edes cust vanes 85 Long Q frame ent prati edel eese ae eed 85 Map break to IP eet rate tede ede a ied 85 Modems ascen eati Asal alle teil eels hoe desi 85 Modem profile 52 fei edet eee tede epe reed 86 INCU address eati it tie eu 86 Net n me ID a stie poe a dee e d us 86 Network Number she eee ie t eee em e le e peres 86 OSLinterrupt number 5 ales hela pee t ee ei Rees 86 Pacingiiti seque E A lated ches E A 87 P tity nonni ent dare ottiene oy 87 Parity check
64. modem may also require two separate steps for initialization for example some modems discard commands entered after the amp F and Z commands The extra initialization string may also be used to solve this kind of problem Dial and Hook commands The next three options on this screen concern commands that must be sent to the modem at various times The actual data you need to enter here will vary from modem to modem especially the setup string However on most Hayes compatible modems the settings for these will be 200 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Dial String ATDT ATDP for pulse dial On hook string ATHO Off hook string ATH1 Alternate options The Alternate connect and Alternate OK options are provided for modems that do not have Hayes compatible CONNECT and OK strings typically foreign language modems may have this problem The extra connect string will be checked for when the modem returns the status for a call and if found will be interpreted as a valid connect to the host In the same way when answers to standard commands sent to the modem are checked the program normally expects an answer of OK If an extra OK string is provided here that answer will also be interpreted as a valid answer from the modem Abbreviations The Abbreviations options provide you with an opportunity to define abbreviations that you can use inside telephone numbers in the dial d
65. of web controlled Glink The glink file extension is registered in the workstation s registry when the Glink downloadable package is installed It is registered in a similar way to say a doc file When you click on it Windows opens the associated program and passes the file as a command line parameter The glink file is registered as being a valid file type that can be received from a web server The web server is configured to tell the browser that the MIME file type of the glink file is application x glink When executed it will start Glink with the following command line gl exe COMMAND dku7107 to tp8test glink Typically the command line file will contain references to directories or files on the web server LS myweb com VER 723 http myweb com glink download glinksetup exe CD http myweb com glink config O http myweb com glink script C dku7107 to tp8test glinkconfig Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation When Glink starts up and recognizes a file located on the web server it connects to the web server downloads it to the users temp directory and loads the file locally The download of a remote file will only be done the first time thereafter it will be read directly from the temp directory When the user exits Glink all the temporary files are removed The whole operation is done completely transparently to the user Configuration file C The Glink configuration f
66. on a front end machine DPS7 Host type GCOS7 This mode is always used when communicating with GCOS7 systems DPS6 Host type GCOS6 This mode is always used when communicating with GCOS6 systems through SNM ROUTER Host type GCOS6 NTM May also be used to connect to Datanet applications UNIX Host type UNIX This mode is always used when communicating with another UNIX system Gmailer and GUFT can make such connections IBM Host type IBM via Datanet SNA gateway This mode is always used when communicating with IBM hosts through the Janus OSF gateway in the Datanet IBM log mode Defines log mode used for IBM connections only Local mailbox name This parameter specifies the local mailbox name to be used for the connection and is equivalent to the LMB parameter you would specify if you were connecting using the Datanet Terminal Manager This can be used as an additional user identification for host security On GCOSS systems it may also be used to generate a LID while for IBM OSF Janus connections it can be used to select a specific LU or LU pool 110 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Mailbox extension Specifies the mailbox extension of the application to which you are connecting This parameter corresponds with the EXT parameter used when connecting using the Datanet Terminal manager The mailbox extension is only used when connecting to CXI GCOS8 subsystems and will
67. one character code for the language supported Starting the software with no parameters will run with the default language defined in GLL DLL while using the command line parameter L x will give the language corresponding to the code used German Language texts English UK Language texts French Language texts Norwegian Language texts English US Language texts QAaQaQN DN EJ 92 do Je G Zn For example if you have received a copy of the software in your own language but would prefer to run an English US version then start the emulator with the command GL L U The default language will have been setup by your local Glink distributor To override the default language copy the required DLL to GLL DLL in the Glink directory or to select a specific language use the command line parameter mentioned above National language versions of the Setup and Netsetup programs may also be delivered by your local distributor as well as the on line help if available 56 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Last minute changes While every effort is made to keep this guide up to date there are inevitably a number of things that will have been changed in the actual software since the guide was last revised Such changes are documented in the Glink help file and you may look through these notes by choosing the Help What s New item from the Glink menu bar once you have
68. options can cause problems if you are running on a VPN This feature will be extended and documented as we gain experience with networks offering QoS Random Connect Used in connection with the alternate IP address this option may be checked to force a random choice of either the primary IP address or the alternate address as the first address to try for when connecting to the Ggate server This may be found useful in spreading the total load between multiple Ggate servers Rlogin user name This field is used to specify the user name for the rlogin session Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 89 Configuring the emulator Server target This field must be filled out if you are connecting to an IBM EBIOS or LAN ACS service that has been defined with a target name in the server configuration If the target was defined with no name 1 e target in the configuration file then this field may be left blank If you define the target name with as the first character this will be interpreted as a telephone number If you define it with a first character of amp it will be used as an ASCII string Normal usage is just to use the name as it appears in the server however Socks server If you are connecting to the target system via a system running a socks server as a firewall then you should enter the name of the host running the socks server in this field Connects will then be made via the specified host
69. outweighed by the many advantages for typical users however Terminal flow control This option decides whether flow control should be used by the PC if it should not be able to handle data coming from the communications line fast enough If flow control is to be used then either hardware RTS or software Xon Xoff flow control or both may be chosen RTS flow control is preferred where possible as it does not disturb the data flow between the PC and the host When flow control is enabled then the PC will tell the modem or host machine to stop sending data when the receive buffer starts to become full When the buffer has nearly been emptied again the PC will allow the modem or host to start sending again Flow control is almost always necessary when you are using a high speed modem if you don t have it set then you risk losing large chunks of incoming data However before you set the option you should make sure that it s been enabled in your modem or host machine and also in the case of hardware flow control that you are using a suitable cable Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 91 Configuring the emulator Terminal type response This option specifies the string that should be returned by Glink when a Telnet terminal type enquiry is made by the host or provided to an rlogin host at connect time On UNIX systems the response is important because it is used to set the TERM environment variable Unless thi
70. presented in the status line will be left there but removed on the first keypress you use after the message 1s shown 134 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Don t show 7700 spaces Normally spaces inside VIP7700 variable fields are marked with a small dot to show their presence If you prefer such spaces not to be shown then you may check this option in which case spaces will not be visible Edit buffer size This option specifies the size of the edit buffer used for command recall in VIP7800 and VIP7700 text modes A size of zero disables the functionality Enter key XMT If you are using the VIP emulation in text or forms mode you may wish to have the transmit function placed permanently on the ENTER key the TX RET option does not apply in forms mode and also may be reset by the host This option allows you to always use the ENTER key as a transmit key ESC sends F7 As many of the Server6 modules use the F7 key as an exit key you may wish to configure the Esc key to send this code to the host so that you may use the key in something approaching the PC way Extended status This option enables extended status mode where the emulator will send additional bytes when a remote enquiry is received This option should NOT be enabled if you are using Server6 Function keys send CR If this option is enabled then Glink will send a carriage return after sending function key
71. s Guide 205 Configuring the emulator GLINK Screen properties Color adjustments Window attributes Al Fonts FE Toolbar setup Options 9 Facelifting D colors i p VIP attribute mapping E ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping j VIP attribute 9 User input Hide Protected X Blue Alphabetic Inverse Q unused Yellow Blink Justify right Restore Z unused Cyan K unused S Red unused Digit 2 Low intensity 5 Transmit 5 unused D Entry required 2 Modify xmt Unprotected 5 _ Underline Eill required Numeric Violet Green Omit print White Attributes for currently selected VIP attribute Sample text Red l Inverse means leave asis Green Hide V means turn ON Blue Underline lll means turn OFF E Low intensity H Blink For each of the attributes that may be set by the host you have the opportunity to specify exactly which of the visual attributes should be associated with it Each of the visual attributes may be left as is turned on or turned off As an example you wish all unprotected fields to be presented in red inverse video You would first select the U unprotect attribute in the top half of the screen enter the second VIP attribute screen and next to the letter U unprotect enter inverse ON red ON green OFF and blue OFF Note that colors are mixed so to produce yellow for example you would turn red and green ON while turning blue OFF One additional at
72. selected key combination and under it all relevant mapping information for the key Thus if you select the Page Down key this area of the Keyboard mappings plane will display Selected key Pgdn Mapped to Receive a file This information is followed by keyboard mapping buttons and assuming you have not selected a function in the function tree these will be disabled except for the Remove mapping button Map key to disabled Map to shared disabled Map to default disabled Remove mapping Receive a file Expand the function tree category Terminal commands sub category Movement and select Next segment The display changes so that the first mapping button is enabled and the buttons now show Remap key to Next segment Map to shared disabled Map to default disabled Remove mapping Receive a file Pressing the Remap key to button assigns the Next segment function to the Page Down key instead of the Receive file function The display area changes and now shows Selected key Pgdn Mapped to Next segment 176 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Remap key to disabled Map to shared disabled Map to default Receive a file Remove mapping Next segment You can assign the Prior segment function to the Page Up key in the same way Changing the sequence transmitted by a Function key All terminals have Function
73. server name If the current server name is used then the current host s IP address will be converted to a full domain path for comparison otherwise the configured name will be used The full domain path of the current host s IP address is displayed next to the option The SET SSL SERVER script commands can also be used to set these options Client validation This option tells Glink to negotiate client authentication and send a client certificate to the host system Certificate name This option tells Glink to use the selected client certificate Only installed certificates will be displayed in the certificates list If the host system is validating client certificates you will need to specify the correct client certificate to use otherwise the host will reject the certificate and disconnect the session If no certificate is selected in the list box then the first one in the list will be used otherwise if none are configured then a default certificate will be created The SET SSL CLIENT script commands can also be used to set these options Protocols This option determines which protocol will be used to secure and encrypt the Glink session You should choose automatic in most cases 126 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Automatic PCT Private Communication Technology 1 0 SSL Secure Socket Layer 2 0 SSL Secure Socket Layer 3 0 TLS Transport Layer Security
74. simply by closing the debug window Administrator mode K The K parameter allows you to set and reset locked configuration items and is for use by the system administrator only More information about configuration locks is available in the Administrator s Guide Language key L The language key specifies an alternate set of files to use for support of a diffe rent operating language The following files must be available for such support to function correctly x here is the language code specified after the L parameter GL1x DLL For more information about the L parameter refer to the Administrator s Guide License backup server list LB The LB dns1 dns2 parameter can optionally specifies a DNS name list of the Glink license backup servers required for the Glink Enterprise Edition for Issuing a session license License server LS The LS parameter is required for a web controlled Glink environment It specifies the DNS name of the Glink license server required for the Glink Enterprise Edition for issuing a session license 22 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Monochrome mode M If the M parameter is specified then the emulator will run in monochrome mode irrespective of what has been configured in the color setup menus Name for status line N This parameter allows you to insert an identifying text into the status line This may be useful if you are running more than one
75. specified as the second parameter in a script GWCONNECT command The profiles are stored in a file GLHOST INI GLINKDATA residing in your Glink user directory If you are using G amp R Ggate the Host profile name may correspond to a Ggate coname in the DSA configuration file on the gateway system If so the CoName entry may define some or all of the configuration parameters that otherwise would have to be entered in the profile including your terminal device type and associate a printer session with your terminal device In which case parameters in the profile are used to complete or override the parameters in the Coname entry If the profile name does not correspond to a CoName you must supply enough DSA parameters to make the connection The host application mailbox and the host node will always be needed Host type This parameter is used to select the target host type Through the selection of host type a set of internal parameters that control the connection with the remote host application is chosen The following host types are available Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 109 Configuring the emulator DPS8 Host type GCOS8 with Gateway This mode is used when communicating with TSS and DMIV TP applications CXI Host type GCOS8 with CXI This mode is used when communicating with TP8 and other applications that use CXI DN Host type datanet This mode is used when communicating with the NOI
76. start it with the DEBUG command line parameter then a separate window will be opened showing a detailed trace of server activity Some of this information is fairly cryptic but will be useful as additional material to supply to your distributor as an aid to isolating any problems you may be experiencing with the licensing service 38 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Advanced Running in the foreground For testing purposes it may be useful to run the licensing service as a foreground application This may be done using the gllserve program Normally when you run this program it will simply act as a monitor for the installed service however if it discovers that the service has not been installed then it will administer licenses directly To run in this mode simply stop and uninstall the service and then start the monitor program with any parameters that are needed Any of the supplementary parameters that can be used for the gllservice installation command may be used For example gllservice stop uninstall gllserve alt backup mydomain com port 30875 When you need to run as a service again simply terminate the monitor and reinstall using the gllservice command for this On Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows ME where there is no Session Control Manager then the license server must run in this mode Manually stopping starting The license service is normally stopped and started using the button pr
77. suitable for those who connect to applications such as bulletin boards that may be using OEM Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 267 Administrator notes Cables If you are using a modem then you should use a standard modem connector as provided with your communications port If it is not long enough then the extension cable should be a straight cable where pins 2 8 and 20 are connected If you are using software that needs to accept dialing into the PC then you should also connect pin 22 If you are directly connecting to a host that has a modem type connection e g the Bull DPS6000 then you will need a null modem cable This is constructed by connecting the following pins together the cable is symmetrical so it doesn t matter which piece of equipment is at which end This kind of cable may also be used to connect two PCs together for doing file transfers and the like if they are both using Glink then it s enough to connect pins 2 3 and 7 PIN PIN 2 3 3 2 4 4 C 5 Null modem cable 7 7 8 L 6 2 8 If you wish to have flow control capability between your PC and the host machine or modem i e Glink will tell the other end to stop sending if the data is coming too fast to handle you should change the PC flow control option in the communications setup menu to CTS and use the following cable instead This one is also symmetrical so it still doesn t matter which way you connect it PIN PIN
78. supports RFC1647 This protocol allows for more flexible configuration selection and use of the TN3270 session TN3270 Model This option is provided so that you may select the appropriate 3270 model This will be used to set the screen size and to provide terminal identification to the host machine where appropriate You may need to select an extended type one of those with an E extension to enable use of extended attributes from the host The base model number determines the alternate screen size the host may use where 327x 1 is 16 rows of 80 columns 327x 2 is 24 rows of 80 columns 327x 3 is 32 rows of 80 columns 327x 4 is 43 rows of 80 columns requires R43 command line option 327x 5 is 27 rows of 132 columns DYNAMIC is user specified 3287 1 is printer Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 93 Configuring the emulator If you select a printer type you will probably also need to specify an LU name and select extended telnet mode Alternatively you may select a screen model but also specify either a printer LU or check the associated LU option extended TN3270 only to specify that an additional session should be started for the printer as well as the normal screen session TN3270 5250 LU Device name For TN3270 connections this option allows you to choose a specific LU It 1s only functional when you connect to a TN3270 server that has support for the option and should otherwise be left blank For TN52
79. sure you need to too low a window size will reduce the speed of the transfer Non standard FTRAN Users who are communicating with Bull mainframes will usually be using the FTRAN file transfer package which uses a different technique for long packets than does standard Kermit When the FTRAN package itself is used this is dealt with automatically by the built in Kermit Some other packages on Bull host machines notably KERM on GCOS8 use the same long packet technique but do not implement it in the same automatic way as FTRAN In these cases you will find that enabling the long packets option does not actually give you long packets in the file transfer In such cases enabling this option may solve the problem If you are using a standard Kermit for example on a VAX or UNIX system then you must not enable this option or you will find that you will lose the long packet capability Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 241 Configuring the emulator Override host packet size This option is only effective for FTRAN style transfers and tells Glink to ignore the maximum packet size specified by the host and use the defined maximum in Glink instead Use this option with care if you specify too large a value for the packet size when this option is enabled then your transfer will fail This option is mostly designed for GCOSS usage where a value of 1000 is recommended for older FTRAN versions and up to 1980 for new
80. that silent installation must be set through the MSIEXEC QN or QB command line options 246 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Repacking the installation bootstrap program The GLPACK tool can be used to repack the original Glink MSI Installation bootstrap program with the new glicense txt and optionally installation settings The GLPACK tool is installed with the administrative tools in the lt glink gt Demo admin directory First copy the original Glink MSI Installation bootstrap program to a new directory copying the file to a new name Then extract the installation files from the original Glink MSI Installation bootstrap program to that directory and update glicense txt copy glinkinstallpackage exe myglink exe glinkinstallpackage exe EXTRACT copy lt glink gt glicence txt glicence txt You can now repack the new bootstrap program To create a Glink MSI Installation bootstrap program to install a per machine Glink to c Nglink and set the Glink start up command line options to start Glink with a dialog box to select a configuration from the c glwinc directory you could use the following options with the GLPACK tool glpack REPACK glinkinstallpackage exe myglink exe MSI glink msi LIC glicense txt L c c glwinc u c Nglwinc I c glink When installing the new bootstrap program will install the language of the current PC If you require a specific language and are
81. the session starts Don t wait for TURN This option specifies the transmit lock mode that Glink will use for the application dialog When using TNVIP Glink should set the line busy when you transmit locking the keyboard and keep it busy until it receives the TURN This is a signal that the application is ready to accept input Due to known errors in some versions of the TNVIP server the TURN from the application may not reach Glink and leave Glink in a busy state with the keyboard locked This option is a work around if you are communicating with such a TNVIP server It causes Glink to unlock when it receives any reply from the application This allows you to continue even if the TNVIP server error has suppressed the TURN Note that if this option is set then you will often be in a situation where you will be allowed to transmit data even if the application is not yet ready to receive it In these cases the result is unpredictable Your application may give errors or scripts that rely on this kind of synchronization may fail Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 79 Configuring the emulator Facilities If additional X 25 facility fields are required to make the outgoing X 25 call they may be entered here Facility values should be entered as hexadecimal constants separated with commas or semicolons If no separator is supplied then the hexadecimal values must be entered using exactly two ch
82. the case where a pathname is already specified or where the name contains wildcard characters or Wait after transfer Normally when a file transfer is complete it will leave the status window on the screen and wait for you to press a key before you continue This is to let you inspect the status of the completed transfer If you don t wish to do this either because you are monitoring the transfer yourself or because the transfer is part of an automatic setup you may choose one of the other two options that are avail able here to either never wait at all or to wait only in the case of aborted trans fers Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 233 Configuring the emulator Zmodem compression This option governs the use of compression on internal Zmodem transfers It will in general cause slower transfers if the file is already compressed but will give faster transfers for files containing repetitive data Zmodem crash recovery This option governs the use of recovery in internal Zmodem transfers If the option is set then the Zmodem procedure will attempt to restart from a previous failed transfer if any Zmodem transparent data This option informs the internal Zmodem procedure that you are using a totally transparent transfer path over which any control character may be sent Setting this option will increase throughput by a marginal amount and may cause the transfer to fail if the path actually was n
83. the cursor locally Glink functions Here you find every single function of Glink There are functions such as 132 cols swap that you might want to put on a hot key in an emulation that supports both 80 and 132 column screens You will find functions such as About Glink that you might want to assign elsewhere in your custom Menu setup You find functions for starting ASCII capture or the FTP client for displaying the scroll back buffer and many many others In general you are able to choose any function of Glink then drag and drop it on a key keyboard bar button or your menu setup Macros Here you find 1 000 macros that you can define and then assign to a key keyboard bar button or the menu setup in your Glink configuration Expand the Macros tree choose a macro and then open the field so you can enter the content from the keyboard To open the field for keyboard entry you can double click the field or you can select the field single click or using the keyboard and then hit the Enter key on the keyboard You use the normal Glink macro script syntax Remember that a macro can include script verbs in line or even start a script but there is a separate function category for configuring scripts so starting scripts from a macro is not really necessary When you have defined the macro content you can drag and drop the macro function into your Layout 188 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configurin
84. the emulator See below for descriptions of the different options Windows Printer These options will only be enabled if the Windows GUI or Windows text options have been selected in the Printer usage section Printer selection This option selects the way in which your choice of printer will be used and whether it will affect future terminal sessions If you select current here then Glink will follow the Windows default printer starting with that printer when the emulator is started and switching printers if another application is used to change the default printer You may nonetheless select a printer other than the default printer this selection will apply until the end of the session or until the default printer is changed If you select session here then Glink will start with the Windows default printer at the beginning of the terminal session and will not change this selection even if the default printer should change during the session You may nonetheless select a printer other than the default printer this selection will apply until the end of the session or another printer is selected with the Glink setup menus If you select permanent here then Glink will use the printer you select irrespective of which printer has been chosen as the Windows default printer both in the current session and in future sessions If you select choose here then the first time you print in any given session you will be given a ch
85. the general setup options screen select Settings General from the Glink menu bar GLINK General setup options nx Warnings Short screen dump Start in dial directory Continuous reminders Disable remote commands V Suppress welcome menu V Message based mode Confirm exit program Compress context saves Always f Fi y Appointments directory Only if connected Never Glink title bar text Disconnect action GLINK None Terminate Startup script Reconnect Browse mm Appointments directory Appointments GLINK APP by default are normally stored in the user direc tory For special purposes most often when sharing appointment books on a LAN file server you may want to store appointment books elsewhere This may be specified with this option See the User s Guide for a description of the appointment book Compress context saves Use of this option will cause context saves to be made in a compressed run length encoded format This will typically result in files that are between 5 and 1096 of the size of a normal context save file Context saves are usually made by your host system with an internal escape sequence Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 155 Configuring the emulator Confirm exit program This option allows you to select the way you wish the program to react when you exit from the program either when you use the keyboard ALT F4 ALT X or ArTtQ funct
86. the initialization string and for the dial string If both these entries are present then the program will interpret this as being a request for normal dial usage of the modem connected to the server 284 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces The following interfaces are available TCP IP Windows Socket G amp R DGA Direct GCOS Access G amp R Ggate DIWS G amp R Ggate DSA PuTTY SSHD Raw TCP IP Rlogin Telnet TN3270 TN3270E TN5250 TN5250E TNVIP Security Secure Shell SSH Secure Socket Layer SSL Async Windows serial port Windows Telephony X 25 TGX Atlantis Bull TSA V8 Atlantis X 25 V8 Cirel FPX X 25 Cirel VTI3 Eicon Bull TGX Eicon ECLAN Others G amp R NetBIOS modem server G amp R SPX modem server NetBIOS raw In what follows details that are specific to each of the interfaces are provided Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 285 Communications interfaces TCP IP Windows Sockets This group of interfaces is used for generic TCP IP communications using several different protocols and communicates with the socket layer using the standard Windows Socket interface G amp R DGA Direct GCOS Access The G amp R DGA Direct GCOS Access DSA network interface allows you to connect directly over TCP IP transport to Bull mainframes without going through a front end or gateway DGA moves all terminal handling down to the local Glink w
87. the service itself these last two buttons are not available when the monitor is being used to provide licensing as a standalone program Remote monitoring The monitor program may be used from a different machine than that on which the service is running assuming appropriate privileges To do this start the gllserve program with the command line parameter REM followed by the name of the remote machine Note that the name you specify here is the name by which the machine is known in the network rather than the DNS host address of that machine For example you could start gllserve using gllserve REM myserver Only one monitor may be run at any one time License updating The monitor program allows interactive entry of a new or upgraded license To do this click the upgrade license button in the monitor screen The license information may then be entered in the same way as you would in Glink itself either as separate fields in the detail tab or more usually by pasting the license information directly into the text box supplied for this purpose Here you are also allowed to enter support information that will be shown in the about box on client machines You can also use the gllserve program to update the license without performing the monitoring function just start it using gllserve licens Tracing logging requests The monitor program may also be used to troubleshoot problems with the licensing service If you
88. the web server as JSP or ASPX pages and uses the GlinkAPI to access the mainframe screen The GlinkAPI view of the mainframe screens is by default mapped directly to HTML on the fly but can be facelifted using the GlinkWeb Forms Assistant tool to build custom JSP or APSX pages for display or automatic processing of individual screens HTML on the fly When the mainframe screens are mapped directly to HTML on the fly the users see automatically facelifted screens in their browser window giving them terminal like access to the mainframe applications A set of client side Java scripts activates the HTML forms to provide user field input control and to give terminal like keyboard functionality No changes are needed in the core business applications on the mainframe GlinkWeb web enables the applications immediately and at no cost other than that of the Glink license You can customize the logon page that is displayed when offering the users the choice of connections available to them Of course you can also bypass the logon page completely by making custom web pages that include URLs to start specific mainframe sessions with a single click You can also customize the disconnect page that is displayed whenever a mainframe session is terminated You can offer your users the option of reconnecting or you can use any HTML technique to pass them to another area of your web server 66 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp
89. the wizard from the Glink Enterprise Administation Setup web demo entry from the start menu 4 NOTE if the wizard displays IIS info with an IP address as Host address you can exit the wizard and configure a domain name in the Microsoft IIS configuration Start the IIS admin and go to your Default web site and right mouse Properties There you should see IP Address All assigned click Advanced Double click Default to configure your All unassigned then add www myhost com to the Host Header Name Apply restart IIS go back to 3 5 Open the 2 web pages and check that the demos work correctly Uninstall notes Currently the Glink uninstall routine does not uninstall the web demos so before you uninstall Glink you should 1 Manually delete the virtual directory by starting IIS admin double click Default Web Site see virtual directory mappings in right window Select glink in the left window virtdir name and press DEL 2 After Glink uninstall you may need to delete remaining web demo files from SGLINKS Demo glink startup web Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 65 Web modes GlinkWeb Glink in a browser The Glink Enterprise Edition license includes GlinkWeb and GlinkAPI for NET and Java platforms GlinkWeb provides basic facelifting of the mainframe screen suitable for presentation in a browser rather than in a purpose built terminal emulator GlinkWeb executes on
90. then click on the name of the WAV file you wish to be played This function requires that you have a WAV driver installed to be functional you are allowed to configure WAV files even when the driver is not installed so as to allow preparation of configuration files on machines with no driver The WAV files referred to must reside in the Windows directory if you are using versions of Windows before Windows 95 To suppress all sound check the silent mode option in this dialog box Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 229 Configuring the emulator File transfer setup Select Settings File transfer from the Glink menu bar to view the available file transfer options Settings File transfer General Text Kermit General file transfer options The General File Transfer dialog box provides the following options e General il Text amp Kermit Wait after transfer Allow file overwrite local Never V Save aborted downloads Q Always Small transfer window D Only when failed Zmodem compression Default protocol V Zmodem crash recovery Ascii M Zmodem transparent data IND FILE command input field TABs 7 Alarm after transfer 5 times Download directory Upload directory Host command x Default FTP host 230 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Alarm af
91. to the Windows Control Panel choose Regional and Language Options and in the Languages section check the boxes for Supplemental language support You will need to enable the language you will use as an input language for your PC and this is done by clicking Details in the Languages section described above and then adding the language to the Installed services list Some languages are extremely difficult to use for input unless you have the appropriate keyboard If you are using a nationalized version of Windows the above will already be done for your normal language but you might need to use Glink with other languages than your national standard Glink support for all languages is engaged in Settings gt Screen gt Fonts The choice of language is made using the option Character set If you leave this set to Auto then the internal Glink character set is the same as the character set you use elsewhere in Windows Glink has its own fonts for Latin 1 Latin 2 and Greek NOTE If you use Cyrillic Arabic Hebrew Chinese Japanese etc then you MUST first select Use Windows fonts This will change the list of character sets presented by the Character set option After choosing your character set you must then choose a font that has support for your character set If you are using Windows fonts then all the fonts installed on your system will be displayed in the list Once you have chosen your internal character set
92. to them Glink allows you to use a pictorial toolbar at the top of the communications window You may turn the toolbar on and off interactively using the item provided for this purpose in the system menu Use toolbar tips Normally if the mouse is left in position over one of the buttons in the toolbar for a few moments then a small help window will be displayed reminding you of the function assigned to that particular button If you don t wish the program to do this then remove the check mark for this particular option This option will also enable or disable the popup help windows over the button bar if help texts have been provided for these using the script SET BUTTON HELP command Vertical position This option tells Glink where you would like the initial screen display to appear on the screen in the vertical direction If the horizontal position is set to either default or current then the vertical position is not selectable but is decided by the selection in that option Top places the upper edge of the Glink window at the upper edge of the screen Bottom places the lower edge of the Glink window at the lower edge of the screen Center places the Glink window in a position with upper and lower edges at the same distance from the edges of the screen Window Appearance This controls how the Glink window should initially be displayed Using the default option here is the normal selection you can force an initially maximized
93. using the international version of glink msi then use the GLPACK M option If the g1ink msi is the international version the extracted packing set file will contain the following LANGUAGE The tells the bootstrap program to display the language choice dialog box You can force a specific language by setting the langauge to u e f d n or s US UK FR DE NO SU glpack REPACK M f NOTE that the new bootstrap program will no longer have a valid Gallagher amp Robertson digital signature and may give a warning when downloading or installing Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 247 Administrator notes Glink packaging Overview Glink 8 1 versions and above are delivered as digitally signed Microsoft Windows Installer MSI installation packages Installation customization is limited to a few command line options for specifying e g the installation directory or the Glink license file to be installed For more details please refer to the Glink MSI Installation section Full customization of a Glink installation is still possible using the Glink packaging tool GLPACK Please note that GLPACK does not create MSI packages and therefore the custom packages will not be Vista Certified However the resulting Glink installation will remain identical A simple example of a customized Glink package would be to include a Glink configuration file a company wallpaper file a Glink desktop icon and addin
94. utility window select all of the text in the Public key for pasting into authorized_keys file box and copy it to the clipboard Then switch back to the Glink window and insert the data into the open file making sure it ends up all on one line Save the file Refer to the PuTTY User manual for a detailed explanation of PuTTY Public key authentication support Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 123 Configuring the emulator SSH version This allows you to select the SSH offered by the server auto or to force use of SSH protocol version or version 2 If you select SSH1 or SSH here Glink will only connect if the server offers the SSH protocol version you have specified SSHD Password Enter the password corresponding to the user name by which you are known to the SSH Daemon If you are using Public key authentication and have given a passphrase to your private key file then the passphrase must be entered here SSHD Server address Enter the Internet address of the SSH server system In some cases you must enter the name in numeric format for example 129 1 1 150 but usually you will be able to enter a symbolic name The default port for the SSH Daemon is 22 If you need to connect to a port other than the default this may be specified after the symbolic name or numeric IP address using a colon to separate it from the rest of the address For example to connect to port 1311 on the
95. will print on one line The default value of zero specifies that the printer defaults should be used Setting the option to a non zero value will also enable the Fill page character spacing option Character spacing Allows you to specify the space between the printed characters Auto specifies printer defaults for the configured font Fillpage will tell Glink to spread the configured number of characters so as to fill the page completely 166 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Exactly will enable the Exact spacing options Exact spacing If these options are enabled they allow you to specify the line spacing exactly with one of the following units dots printer dots per character whole number inch inches per character decimal number cm centimeters per character decimal number cpi characters per inch decimal number cpe characters per centimeter decimal number Formatting Vertical The vertical formatting options allow you to modify the way the printed text output will appear on paper See also the section describing horizontal formatting options The default values of zero lines per page and automatic line spacing tell Glink to leave the default printer settings for the fonts used and the paper size setting Lines per page This option can be used to specify the maximum number of lines that Glink will print on one page The default value of zero specifies that the printer
96. you are using the Server6 software you should configure this option to 730G so that additional functio nality may be enabled in the Server software otherwise it should be left set at 7301 or 7801 Note that the equivalent option for ANSI mode is in the Emulation Initial setup menu If you are using TSM8 mode then the actual string sent to the host will be modified dynamically with R in the fourth character of the string as required by the TSMS system Automatic tabbing If this option is selected then an automatic tab to the next field of a form will be performed as soon as the last character of the field has been typed If it is not selected then no action will be performed until either the Tas key or the next character is entered Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Block mode This option determines whether the terminal should use block mode when transmitting messages to the host or not It only has an effect 1f the emulator 1s started in text mode and will normally be set by the host at connect time DO NOT turn on this option unless you are absolutely sure you need it you will otherwise experience apparent hangs when transmitting large blocks of data to the host in text or forms mode Disallow status line lock This option stops the application you are using from locking the status line Messages
97. 00 Pinwriter NEC P2200XE Pinwriter NEC P5200 Pinwriter NEC P5300 Pinwriter NWC P6200 Pinwriter NEC P6300 Pinwriter Okidata Microline 184 Turbo IBM Mode Okidata Microline 320 IBM Mode Okidata Microline 321 IBM Mode Okidata Microline 390 Plus IBM Mode Okidata Microline 391Plus IBM Mode Okidata Microline393 Plus IBM Mode Okidata Microline 590 IBM Mode Okidata Microline591 IBM Mode Okidata OL400 LED Page Printer Okidata OL800 LED Page Printer Okidata OL810 LED Page Printer Okidata OL820 LED Page Printer Okidata Pacemark 3410 Panasonic KX P1123 Epson Mode Panasone KX P1124 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P11241 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P1180 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P1180i Epson Mode Panasonic KX P1191 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P1624 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P1654 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P1695 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P2123 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P2124 Epson Mode Panasonic KX P2180 Epson Mode Glink Administrator s Guide 99 Configuring the emulator PAN2624EP Panasonic K X P2624 Epson Mode PAN4410HP Panasonic KX P4410 HP Mode PAN4420HP Panasonic KX P4420 HP Mode PANA430HP Panasonic KX P4430 HP Mode PAN4450IHP Panasonic KX P4450i HP Mode PAN4451HP Panasonic KX P4451 HP Mode XRX4215MRP Xerox 4215 MRP HP Mode XRX4219MRP Xerox 4219 MRP HP Mode XRX4220MRP Xerox 4220 MRP HP Mode XRX4235 Xerox 4235 LaserPrinter HP Mode XXATOOII Xerox 4700II Color Document P
98. 1 100 of a centi meter Orientation Normally Glink will print in landscape or portrait format on your printer according to the current settings for the printer If auto is chosen for this option and if your printer supports dynamic switching of print orientation then Glink will force portrait mode whenever the column width is 80 characters or less and landscape mode otherwise If portrait or landscape is chosen then the specified orientation will be used for all output irrespective of screen width and or current printer settings Print in color Normally Glink will make all print outputs in standard black and white text This option tells Glink to print a color image for all local print operations such as print screen If your printer is not a color printer then depending on the printer the colors will be mapped to shades of gray Print quality This option allows you to select the quality of output that will be produced when GLINK sends print output to the print manager The effect of this option will depend partially upon how your Windows print driver selects fonts when asked to provide a draft proof or standard font In addition if you select draft mode then GLINK will not attempt to use graphics to represent line graphics but replace them with equivalent characters For the best output your printer driver can produce select proof mode 168 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emula
99. 14 Vertical positio Sucve harte te m eee ne Meatless 214 Window Appearance cccceecceesceseceeeeseceecaeecseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaees 214 Window resizing options nennen 215 ONES CILE 215 Characterisel 5e es ede hee M ensi PRU Us rns 216 Font names 5 iere Og a e dee Pre er Tert e ee beaten secovens 217 Bont Style ie eto enter eet rt ead edit os 217 Show fixed fonts only sssssssssseeeeeeeen nennen 217 Spread font to fit window sese 217 Startup font 5 5 o t E eie Pt c et ete 217 Use middle dot for zero ssssssssssssseseeeeeeeene 218 Use short underline character sse 218 Use slash for zero E ene enn enne nns 218 Use Windows font esesssssssssseseseeeeeee eene eene enne nens 218 Display fonts ege erue eee erre tete ed 218 Toolbar setup eek hee ie tee e E RS 219 Options oi iicet e eet e e e ele E e edad 221 CLR Savesiin scrollb ck eie tte nene reins 221 Cursot Type de Deere eerte hr etie gebe e nee es 222 Disable clock display 2 netter tied 222 Include spaces in rectangles sse 222 Inverted screen cete eei etude 222 Keep screemon setup ncc ee hee ee eere n ener ives 222 No high intensity ise ee dee tede edere 222 Ruler Type veces cec eee eee PU Eiern 223 Scrollback pages 4 eet tee eie tie Hs 223 Use Rectang lat marks ete Re etie digits 223 Word delimiters ac RR RI RE 223 xii Gli
100. 50 connections this option allows you to choose a specific device name DEVNAME when you connect to a TN5250 server or AS 400 It will only normally be used for 3812 1 printer sessions to define the AS 400 printer device name the session will connect to TN5250 device name support was added to AS 400 in release V4R2 TN5250 Device information This button is only available when a 5250 printer model is selected For TN5250 printer connections you will probably need to inform the AS 400 of the printer capabilities of your printer session by setting the printer device information options TN5250 device name and information support was added to AS 400 in release V4R2 The AS 400 will require the following device information when connecting a 5250 printer sessions Message queue name Message queue library Font ID Form feed type Host print transform information Request print transform These options are only required when host print transform is requested and are used to tell the AS 400 which printer driver to use when converting the printer session output These options should correspond with the physical PC or network printer configured in Glink 94 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Printer model Paper source 1 Paper source 2 Envelope source TN5250 Printer device message queue name This option tells the AS 400 the name of the message queue to use when sending operational messag
101. 845 by default You can change this using the port command line parameter when installing the licensing service Note however that if you override the standard port number manually then this will require corresponding modification of the LS parameter used on the client side Requirements The Glink license server monitor can execute on any supported Win32 platform However running the license server as a service is not supported on Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows ME as they do not provide the Services Control Manager If the license server is not installed as a service then the monitoring program will provide the license server functionality running as a desktop application DNS name considerations When you obtain a Glink license you will need to supply a server name that will be specifically licensed to run the licensing service This name must resolve to the IP address of the machine running the service both on the server and on the clients that will use the server The service will enumerate IP addresses allocated to the symbolic name localhost and check that at least one of these is the same as one of the IP addresses that are returned by the symbolic name you are using for the service If this requirement is not met then the service will not start From the client side this address is used as the name to which the clients will connect over TCP IP when requesting licenses from the server If you are unsure of which name you shoul
102. 999 which will be in a single group marked empty the first time you define a macro Functions E E Terminal functions functions H Glink functions B Macros FE 0 999 empty EE Scripts E Menu shortcuts EA Settings EA Characters 178 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator We will put the Function key macros at the end of the table well away from macros that we might use for other purposes Select Macro 900 and open it for entry by pressing the Enter key Enter the sequence that you would like to transmit The SCO ANSI F1 key is defined as Esc M and you enter this using the Glink script syntax M Press the Enter key to end keyboard input The entry for Macro 900 in the Macro tree now displays 900 M Functions E Terminal functions Glink functions 9 Macros E 0 899 empty RE 901 999 empty FE Scripts Menu shortcuts HA Settings 4 Characters Now select Macro 900 drag it to the Keyboard pane and drop it on key F1 as described in earlier examples of dragging and dropping functions on to keys in the Keyboard pane Changing the sequence transmitted by a command key Asynchronous terminals VT102 340 ANSI IBM3151 DKU7102 and the VIP7800 when used in asynchronous mode transmit a sequence when you press a command key Home Cursor up Backspace etc The sequences are all fixed and as such are defined as fixed func
103. DKU7107 7211 text and forms modes Note that if you are already running using the Atlantis emulator and wish to use Glink in VIP7800 mode then reconfiguration in the front end will possibly be necessary as the Atlantis program emulates the Questar series of terminals VIP7760 mode When configuring the front end it is desirable but not necessary to turn off the enquiry logic that will otherwise slow down the interface Ask your front end person to use a MODEL with NOSTAT Also remember to turn off case conver sion allow lower case if you are intending to do file transfers Atlantis X 25 V8 Users of the Atlantis communication base may use this interface to access hosts using raw X 25 provided that at least once card in one of the available commu nications servers in the case of a LAN environment is configured to use the X 25 protocol Glink has built in PAD facilities Please refer to the Atlantis documentation for installation and configuration of the Atlantis communication base There are a couple of conventions that may be used in the X 25 number to call If you append an R to the number reverse charging will be invoked If you append an asterisk followed by some other data then this additional data will be used as user data in the call packet this can be added as a permanent option using a field in the comms setup menu Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 293 Communications interface
104. Glink Administrator s Guide 163 Configuring the emulator Remove printed DEL NULs Some hosts when sending print output will include a number of DEL or NUL characters usually seen as small triangles when you view these on the PC These are normally included for timing purposes on older printers and will not usually be necessary on a PC printer Also if you are capturing a file to disk they can make the file fairly unreadable Use this option to remove them from the input stream being logged by the program Report printer busy Because of the differences between the way printing is handled on a 7800 termi nal and on the PC it may not always be a good idea to report the true status of the printer Normally Glink will always report the printer as not being busy as the emulator is always capable of receiving more printer output to the limits of its internal buffering capacity This will give you faster and smoother print output as a rule If your host software requires real printer busy status however then you should enable this option This is an option for direct PC printer port configuration which is only available with the 16 bit version of Glink Suppress blank pages On some host connections you may find that the host sends unnecessary blank pages when you connect or when you start a new print job Some printer drivers are intelligent enough to suppress printing of blank pages but if yours is not then you can set this optio
105. I VT attribute mapping dialog boxes GLINK Screen properties 9 3 ug VIP attribute mapping cx ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Color adjustments Window attributes a Fonts ic Toolbar setup Options Facelifting amp Screen colors Foreground Background low Inverse High Black Black Black Blue Blue Blue Green Green Green Cyan Cyan Cyan Red Red Red Magenta Magenta Magenta Yellow Yellow Yellow ECHO ROLL Color scheme defaults Example with default background Show all colors Two tone background colour V Enabled click to modify The settings in this dialog box can help you achieve the most pleasing color balance for your own tastes Some example color schemes are provided for easy selection To fine tune any of the colors click on the appropriate color box on the left hand side of the dialog box 208 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator The original color s names are displayed in the Example with default background box on the right hand side of the dialog box The Show all colors option displays all possible color combinations the foreground colors change in the horizontal direction and the background colors in the vertical direction If you click the Save button then you will be asked to enter a symbolic name for the current color settings The settings will be saved in the Defaults section in
106. IBM 3270 5250 setup doo Transliteration V Allow cursor out of field Blink blank with IV Use SS2 for 8bit chars WM Show in blink blank V New line after XMT Enter key XMT Use SISO for printing E Suppress status line T SDP attributes E Roll mode at startup _ Wrap on page overflow Typeahead mode v Wrap around tabbing _ Cursor straight up down E Wincom compatibility mode Right justify with Space OZero O Asterisk Dollar Euro Pound Model Terminator 9 DKU7107 DKU7211 EOT 9 ETX Printer attributes ID 24 Lines page 126 E Columns 80 I Cps 80 7 TCS 9 Inactive Enable Disable Logical NAK b Forms directory tcs Allow cursor out of field Setting this option will allow you to move the cursor forwards and backwards out of variable fields when typing into a form 140 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Automatic tabbing If this option is set to Yes then an automatic tab to the next field of a form will be performed as soon as the last character of the field has been typed If set at No then no action will be performed until either the Tas key or the next character is entered Blink blank with This option tells the emulator that the blink and blank attributes are to be set on reception of the caret and tilde characters respectively Color mode The Questar DKU7211 is a color terminal that generates color
107. If this option is checked then when the frame wallpaper is resized it will be resized equally in both directions If it s not checked then the frame wallpaper will be resized just enough in each direction so as to cover the screen Keep aspect ratio wallpaper If this option is checked then when the wallpaper is resized it will be resized equally in both directions It s only relevant when the stretch to fit screen option is also checked Margins This option allows you to specify that an area around the edges of the screen should not be used by the emulation The extra space can be defined either in pixels or as a percentage of the current window size For best results you should combine this option with the adjust font size option for window resizing in the Settings gt Screen gt Windows Attributes menu Pushbuttons These options are used to specify that certain texts on the screen typically names of function keys should be enhanced by conversion into buttons when the form is displayed You may facelift ordinary function keys Fnn program function keys PFnn program attention keys Pann shifted function keys S Fnn or straight numeric function key designations nn These buttons are active and will send the appropriate command to the host machine when clicked 226 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator You can restrict the area where the buttons will be displayed by speci
108. If typeahead mode is active but there is no response from the host you may clear it by pressing the break key This option only affects the initial setting for typeahead mode to change the setting interactively use the equivalent option in the toggles menu Wrap around tabbing When this option is set the default use of tab and backtab keys will wrap around from the end of the form to the beginning and vice versa If the option is not set then use of these keys at the start or end of the form will produce an error message and no cursor movement 150 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Transliteration The following options are available when you select Settings Emulation Transliteration from the Glink menu bar jiator properties o iE vip mode setup 9l DKU mode setup is IBM 3270 5250 setup 4 amp Mode E Initial setup PC lt gt Host transliteration tables P Eghtbithosd E UTF 8 host encoding E Full Unicode UTF8 support Eight bit DEF Windows default no transliteration hd Configure Seven bit DEF Windows default no transliteration M Configure File transfer DEF Windows default no transliteration M Configure p Transliteration Eight bit host This option specifies whether the seven bit or the eight bit transliteration fil
109. If you expand the tree and select a function the keys or key combinations on which this function is already assigned are listed in the Keyboard mappings pane Further if you are unsure of where the key or key combination is to be found on the keyboard you can click the entry in the list and the keys involved will be selected in the Keyboard pane A green checkmark indicates if the function is currently assigned to the keyboard for the selected emulation Terminal functions These functions are the functions available to the terminal type you have selected in the Terminal type pane They are divided into categories as follows Commands There are two types of command functions Terminal functions of the type set clear tab set clear attribute set clear forms mode They are normally sent from the application to the terminal and cannot meaningfully be assigned to control keys on an asynchronous terminal where they are transmitted to the application which would not understand them Some of the functions are useful on a synchronous terminal where they are delivered to the emulation and act locally Terminal functions of the type Find Insert Here Remove for VT These can be assigned to control keys because they are defined as sequences that are meaningful to the application 186 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Editing These are terminal keys used to edit the data displayed o
110. KDATA file esee 17 GLWINOPT environment variable sss 17 Command line file g1ink cee cecececeesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeesereneeneeneenaees 18 Configuration file JG eee RR Fee EE ENS eS 19 Configuration directory CD sss nennen 19 License server CS Aa coi en e ot mereri tia E EE seeded 19 License server over SSL CSSL essere 20 Don t connect D intere roma rd AN ERAK a 20 DDE topic name DDE ete Er E HRS RASIE ERES TEE UER 20 Line data debug 7DEBUQG rte ee tee HEURE RENE IR 20 Edit in file display ZEE iere rr esters acces UR UTR 20 Lastin file display FE 5 crt D EUREN TETIR 20 Print in filedisplay EP netter RSEN ETE 21 Input script parameter Liu ccrtc tse WE e TEST 21 Debug mode T eater at e ba t dug e ee rts 21 Administrator mode K sssssssseseeeeeeeenen eee 22 Language key JL uisi tede rv ERO UE EO URN es 22 License backup server list LB cccescessecesecseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeereeseeneeneeeeens 22 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide i Contents License server ES 2 oed c ERE GU we ee a ERES 22 Moriochrome mode IM ranen o eI ERES ART SU RIS EEEE 23 Name for status line N 2 ee EORR ees anaes 23 Seriptdir ctory 704 RR RR NR cs 23 User script ditectory OU aeter ee ee 23 Dial directory tame P i prete ERE O EEE 24 Rows on screen Rn p Tt ERES ERES US TRE URESER 24 Tine scroll mo
111. L parameter is identical to the CS parameter except Glink will request licenses using a secured SSL connection Don t connect D This option tells Glink not to connect at start up This option is useful when a S start up script is being used to control the initial connection DDE topic name DDE This option allows you to preset the DDE topic name from the configured com mand line This is provided mostly for use by those applications wishing to start a copy of Glink to which they will be able to connect specifically irrespective of whether or not there are other copies running Line data debug DEBUG This option enables line debug mode where Glink will log all data received and send them to the file GLINK S DB See the description of the script DEBUG command in the Script Reference Manual for more information about debug mode Edit in file display FE This option specifies the name of the editor that will be invoked when the edit function is used in the file display and is described later in this chapter in the section describing the file display List in file display FL This option specifies the name of the list program that will be invoked when the list function is used in the file display and is described later in this chapter in the section describing the file display 20 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Print in file display FP This option specifies the name of th
112. Map Remap key to Displays the currently selected function in the Functions Map to shared Gallagher amp Robertson pane if any If you have not expanded the function tree or selected a category rather than a function then nothing is displayed If a function is selected and displayed here then you can assign that function to the current key by clicking the button The button is disabled if the key is already mapped to the current function The text on the button is Map if the key is not currently mapped and changes to Remap if the key is currently mapped to another function Displays the function that is assigned to the selected key in the Shared keyboard configuration If the key is not mapped in the shared configuration the button is disabled Pressing the button assigns the function used in the shared configuration to the current key in the specific emulation you are configuring You modify the shared configuration by selecting Shared as the terminal type in the Layouts pane and the mappings you make there apply to all emulations After defining keys in the shared configuration you can override them in the individual emulation keyboards Glink Administrator s Guide 191 Configuring the emulator Remove mapping Displays the function to which the current key is mapped Pressing the button removes all mapping The key will no longer have any function in the selected emulation or in the shared configura
113. PC using the terminal flow control option discussed previously CTS flow control host This option enables CTS handshaking on output from Glink When the option is on Glink will not send output to the communications line unless the CTS line is enabled The option may be useful in situations where the actual speed of the line is less than the nominal speed at which Glink is running For example when you use a modem that runs faster on the Glink side than it does on the host side Host XON XOFF Some host machines use XON XOFF as a mechanism to control the flow of data towards the host especially in the situation where you are uploading data conti nuously as an ASCII transfer Turning on this option enables the use of XON XOFF by the host Host INSID This option is used on the DNTD interfaces to select the host to which you wish to connect The INSID is the name specified in the CLM USER file of the DPS6000 to which you are connecting Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 81 Configuring the emulator Host name Here you should enter the name of the host to which you are connecting by default BAPI users may leave this field blank if they wish to connect using the command line interface DEC LAT users may also choose to leave the field open and select a host using the CtRL F 6 menu If you are using InfoConnect leaving the field open will give you the standard InfoConnect host name dialog Host profile name Ggat
114. Q 1070 EPLQI1170 Epson LQ 1170 EPLX810 Epson LX 810 EPLQSIO Epson LQ 510 EPLQ2550 Epson LQ 2550 EPSQ870 Epson SQ 870 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson EPSQ1170 EPEPL7000 EPEPL8000 HPII HPIID HPIIP HPIII HPIIID HPIIIP HPIIISI HP310 HP4 HP4000 HP5 HP500 HP5000 HP520 HP550C HP560C HP6 HP8000 HPPAINT IBM2380 BM2381 BM2390 BM2391 BM3812 BM3816 BM3912HP BM3916HP BM39302 IBM39303 IBM4019 IBM4019HP Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Epson SQ 1170 EpsonEPL 7000 Epson EPL 8000 HP LaserJet Series II HP LaserJet IID HP LaserJet IIP HP LaserJet III HP LaserJet IIID HP LaserJet IIIP HP LaserJet IIISi HP DeskJet 310 Black print only HP LaserJet 4 HP 4000 Printer Series HP LaserJet 5 HP DeskJet 500 HP 5000 Printer Series HPDeskJet 520 HP DeskJet 550C HP DeskJet 560C HP LaserJet 6 HP 8000 Printer Series HPPaintJet HPPaintJet XL HP PaintJet XL300 IBM 2380 Personal Printer Series II IBM 2380 Plus Printer IBM 2381 Personal Printer Series II IBM 2381 Plus Printer IBM 2390 Personal Printer Series II IBM 2390 Plus Printer IBM 2391 Personal Printer Series II IBM 2391 Plus Printer IBM 3812 Pageprinter IBM 3816 Pageprinter IBM 3912 Page Printer HP Mode IBM 3916 Page Printer HP Mode IBM 39302 IBM 3930 02S Page Printer IBM 39302 IBM 3930 02D Page Printer IBM 39303 IBM 3930 03S Pa
115. RI res 134 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide vii Contents viii Disallow status line lock eeees Don t show 7700 spaces Edit buffer Size eet tete edens Enter key XM Torie o o a Uere dne ESG sends Epner tte deter cente Extended status racon e E Function keys send CR Host autotabbing sssesseeeeee Init mode enr Deve Limit 7700 cursor movement see Min edit lengths tiere Non linear forms eee Preserve roll mode eee Space suppression sse Suppress status line Terttnator eem tee et ets TSMS enable dieat ets TSMS forms directory sss EXON REUIM ic ch neither attis Typeahead mode ssssssssseee Use SISO for 7 8 bit sss VIP compatibility eeseeere DKU mode setup Allow cursor out of field sess Automatic tabbing sse Blink blank with V ceeeeeeee Color mode essseeeeeeene een Printer Cps cete Hee et Printet ID eee ede ee Printer lines page sss Right justify with Roll mode oed ek aad SDP attributes nasrni eiiie Show in blink blank sess Suppress status line TCS enables iced atlas TCS forms directory coena TES logical NAK eee tede Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents
116. Terminato pe E 145 Typeahead mode x d Ree Re Wee 145 Use SISO for printing uerb a 145 Use SS2 for 8 bit Chars niiina iaa 145 Wrap around tabbing nenoro r E A E 146 Wincom compatibility mode sese 146 Wrap on page overflow essere 146 IBM 3270 5250 setup ierit eterne a E eter deett eet eec 147 Any Cmd key resets error state 147 Display errors in status bar sse 148 Enter key tr nsmit uisa eee HR ERE ISI 148 Graphics CUFSOE tus eee de et e vae elects 148 Host may not move CUFSOF sssessseseseeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen nnne enn 148 Languapgezosescm ane meiste ibt been ns 148 Mouse click local only inei teer 149 Norwegian ASCH 2 sie det testet esteem de ed e das 149 Numetic checking bots 5 enr ied ers 149 Preserve insert mode on transmit sss 150 Suppress status Time 3t e e ei canon se nd 150 Tipa ead mode dudes dr t entere vem t bae 150 Wrap around tabbing sesessssseseeeeneeeennee nennen nennen 150 Tir nslttefation ehe ne scit de ie tres 151 Eiglit bit host oe ee eode 151 Eight bit transliteration table seen 152 File transfer transliteration table seen 153 Full Unicode UTF 8 support sssssseeeeeeneneenne 153 Seven bit transliteration table essere 153 UTF 8 host encoding 154 General Set p i este ieatntue ise it oie tec us 155 Appointments directory ene
117. U mode setup en IBM 3270 5250 setup doo Transliteration F Block mode Extended status Use SISO for 7 8 bit E Non linear forms E Function keys send CR Don t show 7700 spaces E Limit 7700 cursor move E Host autotabbing E Preserve roll mode a Edit buffer size 2048 a Min edit length 3 x 7200 attributes Terminator Init mode ONo Yes Extend EOT ETX CHAR TEXT TSM8 El Enable Forms directory tsm8 Secondary forms directory VIP compatibility OTT Courier Thomas box 9 Normal 7200 attributes This option specifies whether the emulator should accept the 7200 set high intensity and set low intensity commands This should not be necessary unless you are using an application written specifically for the 7200 terminal Note that you may not mix 7200 type and 7800 type attributes on the same screen under any circumstances An additional setting Extend allows use of two extra com mands for invisible and blinking fields that were supplied with some 7200 hardware emulations Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 133 Configuring the emulator Add CRLF in non SSM This determines whether messages sent when Space Suppression is not active should have CRLF delimiters sent between each line of the message or not Answer to ENQ This specifies the character string that the emulator will use to identify itself when answering an enquiry from the host If
118. a dumb modem one that does not accept commands then any configuration will have to be done by using modem straps It s difficult to give general advice about the correct setting for the initialization string For this you will probably have to check the documentation that came with your modem However a typical string might be AT amp F S0 0 S7 40 S11 60 V1 X4 amp C1 amp D2 The meaning of these particular commands is amp F set factory configuration S020 disables auto answer 87 40 wait 40 seconds for carrier 511 260 use fast touch tone dial V1 use text responses X4 extended reporting amp C1 report real carrier status amp D2 hang up when DTR is taken down The very last parameter here is important to set correctly if you want to have full control over your modem The program expects to be able to get back into contact with the modem by toggling the status of the DTR line You may find yourself having to hang up manually if the parameter is set wrong on some older modems you may find the equivalent function on a dipswitch The initialization string is sent to the modem every time you start the emulator If the modem is not responding or the string is not suitable for your modem then this initialization will fail and you will receive an error message informing you of this at startup time If you find that you don t have room for the complete string you wish to use then an additional initialization string is provided for Your
119. acelifting Screen colors The screen colors setup option allows you to choose default foreground and background colors for the emulator screen and emulator status line 204 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator BLINK Screen propertins 9 al E Color adjustments E window attributes A Fonts EF Toolbar setup options C Facelifting Screen colors d VIP attribute mapping eg ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Main screen Status line Foreground Background Foreground Background Black 5 Black Black 5 Black D Blue Blue Blue D Blue D Green D Green D Green Green D Cyan D Cyan Cyan Cyan D Red Red D Red D Red D Magenta Magenta D Magenta D Magenta D Yellow Yellow D Yellow Yellow D White White White White Sample of NORMAL text ECHO ROLL Sample of BOLD text Note that the actual colors displayed here may be adjusted using the Color adjustments dialog box For example if you would prefer to reverse the colors used for bold and normal intensity then this would be the way to do it VIP attribute mapping This menu allows you to select exactly which visual attributes are to be associ ated with every type of field setting from the host Each attribute defined by the host has a specific letter associated with it Refer to the User s Guide for a full list of these attributes Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator
120. acility permits menu driven access to local PC applications from a host menu subsystem On the Bull DPS6000 a command is provided with the G amp R PC package that allows you to execute a PC command This command PC has the following format PC DOS command line new DOS command line Note the use of apostrophes to include embedded spaces in each command You may also use the PC facility to include software on your PC into the Server6 menus For example if you wished your main menu to include not only VIPSIM and TED but also the Windows calculator you could include gt Fn e PC CALC in your menu 260 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Script control from the host A host machine can start a script on the PC in the same way as for DOS commands The control sequences used for this are documented in the Command Extensions appendix to the User s Guide This gives an additional layer of flexi bility to the host s ability to control the PC environment Glink s script language provides not only an interface to DOS commands but also many other things notably a local menu system that will execute much faster than would be possible if everything was handled directly by the host machine On the Bull DPS6000 an extra command is provided in the G amp R PC package that makes it easy to use this facility with no extra programming The command is called PCS and has the simple syntax PCS
121. active logon dialog or it can set event handlers for patterns in the mainframe data and or keyboard key sequences and then wait in the background ready to handle the events increasing the functionality of Glink in the application context Web controlled copies of Glink can be initiated by URLs in web pages by URLs embedded in desktop icons or by URLs executed from within other applications Requirements Glink web controlled mode requires an Glink Enterprise Edition license Any web server may be used as this mode only requires links to html pages and the capability for download of files to the browser Web server considerations 60 The Glink set up program registers the following file associations and MIME types on the workstation or server glink GlinkCommand application x glink Scrgl GlinkScript text plain glinkconfig GlinkConfig application octet stream glinklayout GlinkLayout text plain Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Web modes When installing Glink on the web server for the first time you may need to restart the web server for the new Content Type registry entries to take effect To start a web controlled Glink the user simply clicks a glink file link The browser then downloads the glink file and starts Glink on the workstation using the GlinkCommand association Glink will read the glink file and download the Glink configuration files and other required files such as Glink layou
122. ad font to fit window When Glink is configured to Adjust font size in Settings Screen Window attributes and the window is resized this option tells Glink to either spread the font to fit the window exactly or to keep the font at its actual size and center it in the window This option is of particular interest when you are using an emulation that allows the host to switch the screen size for example IBM3278 4 which can switch between 24 and 43 lines Startup font This option decides which display font should be used when Glink is started The size of the initial display window will be adjusted so as to present a complete emulator screen unless the size of the chosen font would result in an emulator screen larger than can be shown on the display A separate default font size may be set for each of 40 column 80 column and 132 column modes Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 217 Configuring the emulator Use middle dot for zero This option is only available if you use the Glink supplied fonts and specifies that the zero character should be displayed with a dot in the middle to help distinguish it from the letter O Use short underline character This option is only available if you use the Glink supplied fonts and specifies that the underline character should be displayed using a width less than the size of the font so that there will always be free space between consecutive underline characters Us
123. addressed in Glink without a specific transliteration table The DEF transliteration is also used when the mainframe is using the double byte encoded versions of Chinese GB2312 and Japanese shift JIS In these languages Glink uses the same double byte encoded character set internally and it needs no transliteration to Windows If you are using Glink in DKU mode to access GCOS7 and your GCOS7 system uses Chinese internally then you need DEF even though the character set is in EBCDIC on the GCOS7 side and is transmitted using a seven bit encoding system The DKU emulation handles the decoding to give the correct double byte eight bit character set internally in Glink with no further transliteration necessary When configuring for the Arabic character set Glink uses ANSI Arabic code page 1256 internally as do other Windows applications Mainframes normally use ASMO code page 708 for transmission over the line and Glink includes a transliteration file ara glinkxlit that implements this The transliteration file in addition to being used as a transliteration table when exchanging data is also used as a keyboard filter to prevent you entering characters that cannot be transliterated using the table you have chosen You can make a custom transliteration file by using the Configure button to reach the user interface for defining new transliteration files Save the file with a name in the form glinkxlit in order that it be liste
124. ages presented in the left hand box 220 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Options This selection allows you to set miscellaneous screen and scrollback options GLINK Screen properties v am Screen colors E vip attribute mapping Bg ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Color adjustments f window attributes Fonts E Toolbar setup a Options Facelifting V Keep screen on setup No high intensity V CLR saves in scrollback Inverted screen XMT saves in scrollback Disable clock display Cursor type Scrollback Line Blink Block Pages 10 Ruler type 9 None Horizontal Vertical Crosshair Marking options Word delimiters E Include spaces in rectangles V Use rectangular marks CLR saves in scrollback Normally the data on a page that is cleared entirely with a clear command by the host is NOT saved in the scrollback buffer This option tells the emulator that whenever a clear command is received then the entire current page should also be saved Whether this option should be turned on depends a little on the host system you are using and the way in which you intend to use the scrollback buffer Some people prefer to take manual saves of such screens using the Edit Dump to Scrollback function when the host is using the clear command allowing them to decide exactly which data to keep there In certain cases where the host
125. al field for this If you do this a new session will be started for the printer initially minimized as an icon to the tray Profiles Direct GCOS access button 88 Use this button to enter the configuration menu for DGA host profiles This menu will allow you to view modify and create new host profiles Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Protocol This option specifies which protocol you wish to use over the TCP IP interface you have selected For normal asynchronous terminal access you will choose Telnet for this option or alternatively rlogin if this is more appropriate for your system Users of the TCP IP to G amp R Ggate DIWS or DSA gateways will choose the corresponding option If you are connecting through a TNVIP gateway then you will choose the TNVIP protocol or to IBM systems the TN3270 or TN5250 protocols may be used and for special purpose use raw TCP IP may be chosen PVC number This option may be used to select a specific permanent virtual circuit if you are using the Eicon ECLAN interface Quality of Service QoS The Quality of Service QoS option can be used to select an administrator defined mechanism for guaranteeing a certain level of performance for the communication link Note that the standard values for QoS supplied by windows are designed for use with audio and or video links and as such not suitable for use with Glink Also selection of one of these
126. al ports are to be shared Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 297 Communications interfaces The C option specifies that CTS flow control should be used when accessing the serial port this has to be handled by the GLNET32 program rather than by Glink Do not specify this option unless you are sure you need it and also sure that you are using the correct cable Otherwise you may freeze the port perma nently On the other hand using a high speed modem where the line speed is different from the speed at which you are communicating with the modem usually means flow control is a requirement for correct operation The R option provides RTS flow control and will normally be needed in the same situations as require use of C Once GLNET32 is running normally this would set up in the Windows startup group then the port being shared is accessed simply by running Glink with the G amp R SPX modem server interface and selecting the appropriate network name in the server name field of the communications setup menu NOTE if you are going to use the shared port from Glink on the server machine you should also use SPX IPX to access the port if you want the sharing to be done in an orderly fashion Accessing the port directly will work but will give unpredictable results if the network software also should wish to use the port NetBIOS raw This interface uses no frills NetBIOS to talk to the host The NetBIOS
127. and a font that can display it you must consider the character set being used by the mainframe to which you will be connecting In the case of Latin 1 countries most of Western Europe the mainframes using an eight bit character set use ISO8859 1 which corresponds closely to the Windows Latin 1 character set but in general the mainframe character set must be mapped to and from your Windows character set This is configured in Settings2 Keyboardo Options For a full list of transliteration tables supplied with Glink refer to the Keyboard and Screen transliteration section Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 265 Administrator notes You must first determine if your mainframe is using a complete 256 character eight bit character set or if it is using a seven bit national set Check the Eight bit host setting as appropriate Depending on this setting you must then choose a transliteration table that matches your mainframe character set The list of files presented here will depend upon the contents of your GLINK directory all files in the form glinkxlit or the old form GLWINK are assumed to be transliteration files The default transliteration file is DEF default and does no transliteration at all This is suitable for Latin 1 mainframes using the eight bit ISO8859 1 character set and Latin 1 Windows using the standard Code Page 1252 where the two character sets are very closely related The small differences are
128. and contains a previous version of the software you will also be asked to confirm whether or not it s OK to overwrite the software with a new version see the section below on upgrading Glink Once the directory for installation has been identified and if necessary created then the installation procedure will proceed to copy the software to that directory If the software was delivered on more than one diskette then you will be asked to mount new diskettes as needed When all files have been copied the installation procedure will install a Glink icon or icons for you You will be given a choice of whether to install a separate program group for Glink or install Glink in one of the program groups you are using already In either case remem ber that you can put the Glink icon into any program group of your choice by simply dragging the Glink icon to the appropriate group and dropping it there If you are running on a Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 or later PC then you will also be asked whether you would like a Glink icon created on your desktop You are now ready to start the program in the normal way by double clicking the Glink icon What will happen at this point will depend upon how the software was packaged by your supplier The normal first time setup takes you through the basic configuration menus needed to set up the communications facilities needed for contacting the host machine you will be using This includes e Choice of communic
129. and when you expand the tree you find entries for amp Print logging P amp rint screen and Print amp variables The function currently assigned to the entry is displayed to the right of the entry Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 193 Configuring the emulator Any entry in the tree is a possible target for drag and drop of a function from the function tree but we strongly recommend that you do not change the assignments of functions to the standard menu entries In fact it is strongly recommended that you limit your Menu setup configuration changes to adding your own menus and items at the end of the menu line You can assign any function to a menu entry but some functions would not be meaningful as a menu entry Selecting an entry makes it the target for the Remove item function see below A second click on a selected entry opens the entry text for modification You can choose any text for any entry Each branch of the tree and the tree itself terminates with functions add menu add item and add separator These can be double clicked to invoke those functions If there is a function pre selected in the function tree it is assigned to the new entry otherwise the entry is empty and you must drag and drop a function on it afterwards Add menu This button adds an entry that acts as a menu and indicates it in the list as a branch in the tree If another entry is selected when the button is used the new men
130. ap key to l gment Scroll down Alt End Map ared Terminal type Scroll up aa VIP7800 v Tab B E rz j Glink functions E Remove mapping Receive a file EO Macros EE Scripts das Rather than using Drag and drop you can assign functions to keys or key combinations using the buttons in the Keyboard mappings tabbed pane The Keyboard mappings pane is divided into two areas the first is the Selected function area which shows to which keys the currently selected function in the Functions pane is assigned The second is the Selected key area which contains information about the currently selected key in the Keyboard pane and buttons for configuration This example uses the buttons in the Selected key area to assign a function to a key When using the VIP7800 terminal in 72 line mode the terminal buffer is divided into three segments of 24 lines whereof one segment of 24 lines is on screen There are terminal commands for next prior segment and you might like to have these on the Page Up Down keys of your keyboard instead of the default Send Receive file transfer commands Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 175 Configuring the emulator Select the VIP7800 keyboard layout Make sure that the function tree in the Functions pane is unexpanded or select a category rather than a function Select any key combination in the Keyboard pane This area will then display the currently
131. aracters for each of them c6 c 1c 2c 3c 4c c60clc2c3c4c No checking is made for valid data in these fields Note that the two most commonly used facilities closed user group and reverse charging are supported directly and need not be entered in this way Gateway name Enter the name of the network gateway you are using for host access in most cases this field may be left blank in which case the default gateway name will be used GLNET gateway Enter the GLNET gateway name This is the name specified in the first parameter of the GLNET command that was entered on the gateway PC Hardware address This option allows you to enter the port address and IRQ that s set up on your synchronous card it must of course match the actual physical settings on the card itself 80 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Hold DTR on local If this option is set to NO then entering local mode click on Local mode in the Settings Toggles screen will also take down the DTR control line on your comms port If you are using a standard cable this will normally DISCONNECT you from the host so the option should only be used together with the DTR cable described in the chapter Additional information on page 243 In this case local mode may be used to pause output from the host machine Host flow control Note In many cases you will wish to set an equivalent flow control option for the
132. around tabbing None El Any Cmd key resets error state Norwegian ASCII E Display errors in status bar Suppress status line a 3270 graphic options Host may not move cursor E Mouse click local only Graphics cursor 9 BW target 5 BW diagonal BW cross XOR target XOR diagonal XOR cross Any Cmd key resets error state Normally the RESET key is required to reset an error sent by the AS 400 This option allows any command key to be used including Enter Xmit arrow keys function or AID keys Note that the actual function key used will not be executed it will instead execute the RESET function Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 147 Configuring the emulator Display errors in status bar This option allows AS 400 error messages to be displayed in the status bar rather than the status line When displayed in the status bar the text will be preceded with 5250 Enter key transmit When this option is enabled the Enter key will function as a Send key rather than give the new line function The new line function will still be available on the minus key on the numeric keypad Graphics cursor Three different graphics cursor images are available a target a diagonal cross and a normal cross Each of these is available as a black and white image and as an XOR image where the graphics cursor is presented by inverting the screen pixels underneath it Use thes
133. as for the primary address multiple host names may be specified separated by commas A more extensive backup and load leveling capability may be achieved by connecting via the G amp R Host Links network management product Gproxy In this case the primary IP address would be the address of Gproxy and the alter nate if used would be the address of a backup copy of Gproxy Gproxy returns the address of the Ggate gateway with the least load of those currently operatio nal and Glink connects to that address ASCII session line delimiter Normally in ASCII sessions input lines are delimited with CR LF Some hosts may have an incorrect implementation of the Telnet standard and demand that you use CR NUL this option allows you to talk to such hosts Async server If you are using the Bull Micralnet asynchronous server then you may wish to access a server name specifically rather than use the default In this case you should fill out the name of that server in this field otherwise leave it blank In the case of the IBM EBIOS or LAN ACS interfaces you must include the name that has been configured in the server configuration If you are using the NetBIOS server you should include the name that was used when the GLNET command was entered on the server Baud rate This must be set to the speed at which your modem or host system is running the line If you are using a modem this will most likely be between 2400 and 38400 If you are usi
134. ase you must pre select the specific modifier key In the Keyboard pane cycle the modifier key to its specific state by single clicking or if the Keyboard pane has the focus by pressing the key With the modifier pre selected in the specific state drag and drop the function in the normal way 174 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Assign a function to a key using the Keyboard mappings buttons S Glink keyboard es em es File Edit Help Keyboard Esc F F2 F3 Fa FS 6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Pt Scr pase NK ck sk Scen Lock s j j ja jz c ra Ins Home Page L 3 EF s 1 2 3 4 s 5 6 748 79 Fo y TV Up lt w e n r v uj rjoj e aA Del End p SEMI m 5 d d Home t Pgup Capslok A s flo F G H seje Jeje 4 qc 1 gt z Ix c v e N M 1 1 B dece lt uj End Pgbn Ctrl Alt AltGr Ctr ys l ind Ins Del m Selected key By Mapped key gl Reserved key Unmapped key Layouts Functions Keyboard mappings E Function bar 4 Keyboard bar E Menu setup Layout name Fi Next segment A 4 l Padi Bee Selected function Selected key v Previous segment Ue ues Mapped to iGGsSi7SeniG Save v Previous word 4 Next segment v Reem Configured on Rem
135. asynchronous port server with NetBIOS and SPX interfaces for those who have such networks without a built in asynchronous port server capability The network interfaces provide access to all communications resources available to your machine both communications resources that are supplied in the network you are using as well as the communications interfaces on your own machine We will here give a brief summary of the usages of each of the network interfaces supplied with GLINK and the information necessary for correct configuration of each of these Full details of the configuration of the server and workstation components supplied with third party commercial interfaces are not supplied here For these you should consult the documentation supplied with the product Some things apply to several of the interfaces in particular for those interfaces that require a server name to be supplied you may use a special feature of the dial directory Given that you have chosen one of these interfaces a dial to an entry in the dial directory will be interpreted as a request for connection to the server that is specified in the telephone number field of that particular entry This feature allows easy connection to one of a number of servers in a complex network environment If there is a modem on the server asynchronous port servers and you need the modem facilities to operate in the normal way simply specify modem strings in the setup menu both for
136. ated between the two character sets There are two transliteration files you can configure Which of the two files is used depends on the setting of the Eight bit host parameter in the keyboard setup menu The mode can be changed from the host using a set mode command during a session so you may need one transliteration file for each mode The selected transliteration file is used for ASCII text transfers There is a third file that is used for Kermit and Zmodem transfers in text mode if this is not set Kermit and Zmodem use the Eight bit host transliteration file The transliteration file selected is also used as a keyboard filter to stop you entering characters that cannot be transliterated to the mainframe character set using the file you have selected The Keyboard Setup menu includes a Configure button that leads you to the user interface for configuring your own tables or modifying the supplied tables The Configuration dialog box also has a Generate button that allows you to generate your own table automatically from any mainframe Code page known to your Windows PC to the Windows character set you are using In all cases you should save your own tables with a name in the form GLINK so that they are listed as transliteration files when configuring Glink A set of transliteration files are delivered with the emulator These are by no means exhaustive and you will need the Generate feature to produce tables for many sit
137. ations interface if you are using the serial port on your PC then choose Windows for this otherwise choose the interface that matches the communications software installed on your PC e Setup of options appropriate for the communications interface you have chosen see the Configuring the emulator chapter on page 59 for more details e Setup of which emulation type you wish to use by default If you are unsure of the correct settings for any of these items don t worry too much They may all be changed later using the normal setup menus inside the emulator Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 5 Installation Customer validation of generic versions If the installation diskettes or CD contain a generic version of Glink then Glink will display a dialog box allowing entry of the serial number information This box will be displayed every time you execute Glink until valid serial number information is entered The information may be pre initialized and if so can be simply validated by entering the key supplied with the generic version or obtained from the distributor Glink will only display the serial number information dialog box if it is a generic version or if the version has expired This box can also be displayed from Help About GLINK Update License from the Glink menu bar If the information is not pre initialized or if it is to be changed the following information must be obtained from the distributo
138. ax application When you are not using your modem actively in Glink you will in other words be able to use the modem for other purposes Glink provides two levels of Telephony support If this check box is left unchecked then although Glink will access the modem via the Telephony drivers it will still talk to the modem itself using the initialization and other strings you ve specified in your setup In particular all dials will be made by Glink rather than by the telephony drivers This setting is useful for configurations that are already working correctly with earlier versions of the program However to use the modem while Glink is running you will need to disconnect the line inter face before starting the other program in that Glink will otherwise be connected to the modem even when a call is not active If this box is checked then Glink will leave control of the modem entirely in the hands of the Telephony drivers This has several advantages compared with the alternatives setup of the modem is done entirely using the supplied Windows configuration and calls are made using the same Telephony parameters that you use from other Telephony enabled applications In addition any other appli cation will be able to use the modem so long as Glink is not actively using the line at the time One minor disadvantage to this setup for the power user is that you have somewhat less control over the actual modem setup this disadvantage will be
139. baddressing or private X 25 then you may need to configure this field in order for the host to correctly identify the caller Card number This specifies the number of the communications card to use for the Atlantis and Cirel FPX VTI interfaces Channel For Atlantis interfaces this defines the channel which is used by the emulator to communicate with the Atlantis software and is only relevant if you are using either the Bull TSA or X 25 interface Normally you will not need to change this value from the default value of 120 However if you are running more than one copy of the emulator you will need to define a different value for each copy to avoid conflicts Any of the other valid channels 121 127 may be configured 76 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Cluster number This option specifies the VIP cluster number to be used for the Cirel FPX VTI interface Comms Port This specifies which comms port on your PC you are using to communicate with the host machine Normally this will be COMI but the emulator will also allow you to use any other ports that are defined Note that on several machines that are delivered with built in modems as well as a direct serial port the direct serial port is usually COMI and the internal modem COM2 Delay Used in connection with the alternate IP address for providing a backup capability This option specifies in units of 1 10 second how lon
140. by specifying the K option in the command line used to start the emulator Note that this option is only available if you have administrator privileges on the machine you are configuring Admin locks F8 toggles F7 tests EEX Warnings Short screen dump Suppress error messages Start in dial directory Continuous reminders V Disable remote commands a v Suppress welcome menu carmen nome Message based mode amp Confirm exit program _ Compress context saves Always 4 x y Appointments directory Only if connected Never Glink title bar text Disconnect action GLINK Q9 None Terminate Startup script Reconnect Once Glink has started you will see that the title caption in every setup window has changed to read Admin locks F8 toggles F7 tests Each separate item in the setup menu may be locked or unlocked by pressing F8 Locked items are displayed with an overlaid lock on the screen For example in the dialog box shown above the options for disabling remote commands and enabling message based mode have been locked in the on position While you are in administrator mode you may change any of the actual data items of course but at any time you may press F7 to see how the dialog box will appear when used in normal mode Each of the items you have chosen to lock will be displayed in grayed mode and will be disabled Once the configuration has been set up with the desired locks and the set
141. byte checksum 8 bit quoting data compression attribute packets sliding win dows 15 packets long packets up to 8000 bytes auto transliterate for text files server mode talk to server 270 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Security Securing Glink Starting Glink from a hyperlink A simple way of starting Glink without the need for a Glink icon on the desktop or Start menu is to create a hyperlink to a glink startup command line file Once Glink has been installed the glink file extension is registered in the workstation s registry in a similar way to say a doc file When you click on it Windows opens the associated program and passes the file as a command line parameter The glink file is also registered as being a valid file type that can be received from a web server The web server is configured to tell the browser that the MIME file type of the glink file is application x glink The glink file is a text file and could contain the following CD http myweb com glink config C dku7107 to tp8test glinkconfig RL RG 1 RG 2 RM M44 When executed it will start Glink with the following command line gl exe COMMAND dku7107 to tp8test glink In the above example the config file is also downloaded from the web server and Is therefore protected from direct modification for more details see the section on web controlled Glink Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Admi
142. c private key pair essere 279 Installing your public key 280 Scripti SSH hune RR I Ite 280 Secure Sockets Layer SSL sss enne 280 Prerequisites os Rei UNO A T 281 Cereb Cates a te IRA DIR DR RED M IRI Fence ee ESPERE wisest 281 Client certificates tes ee n RET ARM E A Te ERE RERO 282 Server Certificates sot tolg S e MER e DAR prep AEE 282 Trusted root certificate authorities esses 282 Certificate requirements nee eee ide der edens 282 Installing certificates asiste ete tertie iet et neve 283 Configuration options eene etes eret dde he ie ree reds 283 Scripting SSL esie etre eee e e ERG TRUE i 283 Communications inter faces ccccccccsssscsccccccccsssssssscccccsccscesescecs DOF TCP IP Windows Sockets 286 G amp R DGA Direct GCOS Access 286 G amp R Geate DIWS 5 easiest eee eh ee ee Leste e TERR ee ve Le ee 286 G amp R Geate DSA ud iie ede ote eee e as ce 287 PULTE YAS SMD 255 5 eher ietet eee hu ree e He ee ERE d re ee tists de 287 Raw TCP IP se cx etetecuee ee ree See t e ie aee e e E ree rein 288 RIG GUI 5 dsesseo cee Siti ewok eet sho cee tae a ore aoe doa sce ak ewe tee ieee 288 Ku curiae act duh otha aad 288 TN3270 TN393270E 5 ccs etie dre te aere costes Hore ee Weare chose staves 289 IN5250 TN5250E cists ies ses etie eese te tee re oe e te See re ee ea 289 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide Xv Contents EN MAP reete terr
143. ch physical channel of an Atlantis multiport card should be used for the Atlantis X 25 interface The option should be left at the default setting of A for all Atlantis single port cards Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 87 Configuring the emulator Poll address This option is provided both for those interfaces using polled VIP communi cations and those using TGX25 to Bull front end processors It specifies the station address for the terminal and must both be unique in the workgroup being configured and defined in the front end processor Port channel number This option specifies a port or channel number to use when connecting to an Eicon server Normally this may be left at its default value of one unless you are using multiple cards and or channels On TCP IP interfaces that use an external program to connect to the PC software interface for example PC NFS using the GLNFS program this defines which of the four available channels supplied by the external program should be used If you are using more than one copy of Glink on such an interface then you should specify a different channel number for each copy Printer LU device name This allows you to specify the name of the printer to use if you wish to run an additional printer session in association with the screen session if you wish to run a print session as a standalone session then you should just select a printer model and its device name in the norm
144. ck on the left Shift key will pre select both Shift keys and the key combination will be selectable using either shift key The next click selects the specific key e g a second click on the left Shift key will pre select the left Shift key and the key combination will be selectable using only the left Shift key The same applies to the Ctrl keys and if you have a US keyboard the Alt keys On other keyboards the right Alt key is the Alt Gr key and 1s a separate modifier key unrelated to the Alt key A final click on any modifier key de selects it The pre selected keys remain selected while you drag a function over the keyboard and drop it on the final key in the combination or you can click the final key too to select the complete combination and then use the mapping buttons to do the mapping Glink defaults for Alt Gr Because of the US keyboard treatment of the Alt Gr right Alt key Glink default key assignments are always the same for the Alt and Alt Gr modifiers when used with cursor keys or the keys in the function pad for standard terminal functions Thus the default function in VIP7800 for both Alt Cursor up and Alt Gr Cursor up is Scroll up If someone with a US keyboard might use your custom keyboard layout you should observe the same convention 182 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Num Lock The assignment of functions to the keyboard numeric pad is sensitive as to wheth
145. codepage 865 Norwegian Danish from ISO host uk glinkxlit United Kingdom when using ISO 7bit on host us glinkxlit United States swi glinkxli t32 glinkxli t95 glinkxli t86 glinkxli FE et WT GE ee A The default setting is DEF and selects DEF glinkxlit which does no transliteration This is suitable for a mainframe using eight bit Latin 1 and a PC using the Windows Latin 1 character set DEF may have been changed to something more appropriate to your needs in some countries If you are communicating with a mainframe that uses a national version of seven bit ASCII then you should use the appropriate national file for the seven bit transliteration file The Txx glinkxlit files are provided specifically for using as Kermit keyboard files when running text mode transfers from an ISO host where you would like the resulting file to be stored using a DOS character set However note that using the OEM charset or choosing the DOS text transfer option 1s normally a better way of achieving this these files are provided for use in situations where the codepage you need for the DOS file is not the same as the one configured in your Windows setup 264 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Language support Glink supports all the languages installed on your Windows PC Most languages are installed by default but if you need complex right to left languages or East Asian languages then you must go
146. col Setting a default download protocol with this option tells the emulator rather to place it in one of the other protocol choices Download directory This option enables you to decide where files received from the host will be placed on your disk when a full pathname has not been specified This will for example always be the case when receiving a file totally under host control as in a normal Kermit transfer for example When a directory is not specified in the pathname downloaded files will always be placed in the download directory if you have configured one If you have not then they will be placed in your current directory Host command This option provides you with the possibility of entering a fixed command that may be used to start a host controlled file transfer on Bull hosts If this command is filled out then pressing CTRL SHIFT T or selecting Transfers File transfer menu from the menu bar will result in the configured command being sent to the host machine rather than presentation of the normal file transfer menu The command should therefore be of the type that causes the host to automatically bring up a generic file transfer menu for example FTRAN PC7800 FTRAN MICROSYS or GKRM KM83 The command will only be used when the emulator is configured in one of the VIP emulation modes 232 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator IND FILE command input field This option
147. configuration under another name for example C1 glinkconfidg It s best to keep to the convention xxx glinkconfig to remind yourself what the file is for although Glink doesn t require that you do so Now using Windows Program Manager define a new icon for starting Glink and include the following parameter in the command line you specify C C1 To start Glink with the alternative configuration you will then be able to click on the new icon you just defined The format of the configuration file is compatible between all versions of the emulator So if you are moving from one version of Glink to another and have a configuration file that already is correctly set up then you can simply copy your old DEF glinkconfig and use it directly Configuration locking The configuration menus provide great flexibility and make it easy for you to change your configuration on the fly as and when needed This very flexibility can however be a problem Some of the parameters in the configuration setup can cause problems if they are changed either unintentionally or because the user is unaware of the consequences of changing the option Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 71 Configuring the emulator Glink provides you with a method for locking options in the configuration menus that should seldom or never be changed To lock options in the configuration menus you need to start Glink in administrator mode this is done
148. copy of the emulator and need some way of seeing which one you are using easily To use this option start the emulator with for example GL N VAX host This is the same option as is set with the script NAME command Script directory O The O parameter specifies the script directory which will be searched when ever a script cannot be found in the current directory For example GL O F SCRIPTS See the Script Reference Manual for a complete description of the script language User script directory OU The OU parameter specifies the user script directory which will be searched before the normal script directory set with O above whenever a script cannot be found in the current directory For example GL OU C MYSCRIPTS Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 23 Installation Dial directory name P The Glink dial directory has a default name of GLINK PHO If you wish to use an alternate dial directory then you can use the P parameter You can specify either just a file extension in which case it will automatically be prefixed with GLINK or the full name P PH2 Dial directory is GLINK PH2 P GLPHONE DIR Dial directory is GLPHONE DIR The dial directory 1s stored on the Glink user directory see the U command line option Rows on screen Rnn This parameter allows you to specify the maximum number of rows you wish to be able to emulate on screen A minimum o
149. ct a function The selected function is displayed in this area of the Keyboard mappings pane and under it is listed each of the keys or key combinations that currently map to this function Thus if you are using an unmodified VIP7800 keyboard and select the Help menu function in the function tree under Glink functions this area of the Keyboard mappings pane will display Selected function Help menu Configured on Shift Ctrl H You can use this area in this way to quickly find the current keyboard mapping of any function in the function tree If you select one of the key combinations in the list the key combination will be selected in the Keyboard pane showing you the location of the keys on your keyboard Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator The Selected key area This area provides information about the key combination currently selected in the Keyboard pane It also provides keyboard mapping buttons that can be used as an alternative to dragging and dropping when assigning functions from the Function pane to key combinations Key information Selected key Mapped to Displays the name of the key that is currently selected in the Keyboard pane The name is obtained from the keyboard driver and will be in the language configured in Windows for the keyboard Displays the function that is currently assigned to the key Configuration buttons and texts
150. cted to specific only left or only right being selected to neither being selected On a US keyboard the Alt keys behave the same way On other keyboards the right Alt key is Alt Gr and is a completely separate modifier with no relationship to the Alt key On these keyboards the Alt and the Alt Gr toggle on and off independently as they are clicked Note that if the focus is in the Keyboard pane Alt k shortcut then you can cycle the modifiers by pressing the modifier keys on the keyboard rather than clicking them in the Keyboard pane with the mouse Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 173 Configuring the emulator Open the function tree in the Functions pane category Characters sub category Additional Select DEL 0x7F Select the Keyboard mappings pane and you will see that the function is currently not mapped to the keyboard Select the function again in the Functions pane and holding the left mouse button down drag the function into the keyboard pane Note that as you pass over each key it is automatically selected When you reach the Backspace key release the mouse button to drop the function onto the key Your configuration change is finished and can be tested immediately in the Glink emulation window Your change is not permanent until you use the Settings Save option in the Glink emulation window If you do not save your change before exiting Glink you will be asked if you want to save the change when you exit
151. d Windows 2000 ProgramFiles C Program Files MyDocuments C Documents and SCommonDocuments C Documents LocalAppData C Documents and Settings Application Data SCommonAppData C Documents and Windows 98 ProgramFiles C Program Files MyDocuments C My Documents SCommonDocuments LocalAppData Settings MApplication Data Settings lt user gt My Documents and Settings All Users Documents Settings lt user gt Local Settings All Users Application Data Settings lt user gt My Documents and Settings All Users Documents Settings lt user gt Local Settings All Users Application Data Settings lt user gt My Documents and Settings All Users Documents Settings lt user gt Local Settings All Users Application Data C Windows Profiles All Users Documents C Windows Profiles lt user gt Local SCommonAppData C Windows Profiles All Users Application Data Files used by the emulator The following executable programs are provided and should be in the GLWIN directory Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 257 Administrator notes GL EXE Main Glink program GLCONF DLL User ID DLL NETSETUP EXE Network setup utility GLNET32 EXE Async modem server NetBIOS and SPX GLUNINST EXE Uninstall utility The following files are usually also present in the GLWIN directory SSINIT SCR First time setup script pr
152. d as a transliteration file 266 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes In addition to creating custom transliteration files you can also automatically generate a transliteration file from the mainframe character set to your Windows character set Use the Generate button to enter the Generation dialog box The mainframe character sets that are available for generation are displayed in the Select host character set drop down list box Select the one you need and use the OK button to generate a table for transliteration between it and your Windows character set At this point you might modify the generated table to suit particular needs When you are satisfied save the transliteration file with a name in the form of glinkxlit so that it is listed as a transliteration file when configuring Glink The Select host character set box displays all the code pages installed on your Windows PC If the code page for your target mainframe is not listed in the box you must install it first You do this in the Windows Control Panel Regional and Language Options on the Advanced page There you will find a list of code page conversion tables and you simply check each one that you need to have available for Glink The code pages available for installation in Windows cover the complete ISO8859 series as well as Macintosh character sets ANSI character sets IBM character sets and even OEM DOS character sets
153. d be using then experiment with the ping command ping servername should locate exactly the same machine both when run locally on the server and when executed from a client machine If there are problems with using a symbolic name then a license may be issued for a specific IP address which must then be used in the client LS parameter Firewall considerations If your client systems and the license server are separated by a firewall then you must ensure that the firewall is opened for traffic on the port number being used by the licensing service default 30845 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 31 Installation Glink LS parameter The name used by the server must obviously be known to the clients in order to send license requests In Glink the server name is supplied in the command name LS parameter This must match exactly with the name used at the server end If you wish to use a non default port for the licensing service then this must also be provided with the LS parameter for example LS main mydomain com 30875 Note that names of backup servers are not specified on the client side these addresses are provided by the license service itself and are retained between client sessions to provide for the situation where Glink is started at a time where the main server is unavailable As an alternative to the LS parameter license server information may also be set up in the glink ini glinkdata file
154. dditional parameter 1p 103 would create a print task waiting for an RFC1006 connection to port 103 In order to connect to such a non standard port the mainframe making the connection must be configured to use the same port On a GCOS7 system this is simply a case of configuring the second Glink DGA remote node using the PORT parameter in the definition of the NTRS to specify the port Project Specifies the project identification to be supplied to the host subsystem to which you are connecting and is equivalent to the PJ parameter you would specify if you were connecting using the Datanet Terminal Manager This parameter is sometimes specified when you connect to GCOS7 and GCOS8 systems but is not used for connections to GCOS6 and IBM systems Rename Rename this profile in the copy of GLHOST INI GLINKDATA on your user directory Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 113 Configuring the emulator Save Save this profile into the copy of GLHOST INI GLINKDATA on your user directory Save As Save this profile into the copy of GLHOST INI GLINKDATA on your user directory providing a new name for the host Script after connect Here you may specify the name of a script file that should be executed once the connection to the host has been established Terminal mode This parameter specifies the terminal type to be used for the connection and is supplied to the host application so as to indicate what type
155. de JR72 4 rea b E Re I CRAS URS 24 Disable predefined groups of menus RG sse 25 Lock all configuration options RL seen 26 Disable specific menus RM sse nennen 26 Remove Windows system menu RW sse 27 Start p ScripEz 9 isis siet dei gib eem de e ied 27 Glink INLGLINKDATA options T esessssseseeeeneenenn ene 27 User directory JU z Son tetas tede e etede te etii ied 27 Password for dial directory V sse 28 Version pdatez VER tiere ettet t ede e ei ied 28 No modem initialize X sess eee 29 S ppress reminders Zoa hase eos es no iare e tec o t ders 29 Glink license Server see se edet ates EO s rt 30 General informatii eeens erei i aas anrai aan nnne 30 OVertview oe A E EEE EEE 30 License server name E E E 30 License server port sse nnne enne enne nns 31 Requirements st rut lupe eee edit deseri E 31 DNS name considerations ccceccesseesceesceesceeeceeceseeseeeseenseensecnecaeeenes 31 Firewall considerations sse 31 Glink LS parameter ssssssssseeeeeeneenen eene nennen 32 Glink LB parameter nennen 32 Installations 55e te dee eese E e dta 32 Command line options sss enne nennen nennen 33 Dur pe 33 rnm HM 33 nn m 34 uninstall ee epe RH E RE ea 34 Il
156. de full emulation for VIP 7300 word processing mode and for the DEC special graphics character set Glink will take care of any necessary conversion of such extra characters if you copy data between Glink and other Windows applications Toolbar setup The toolbar setup dialog box allows you to control the appearance and contents of the toolbar The toolbar is enabled and disabled by using the option in the system menu and its initial presence or absence by the option in the window setup menu GLINK Screen properties 9 Screen colors VIP attribute mapping ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Color adjustments Window attributes z Fonts a Toolbar setup E Options C Facelifting Position on bar PO ZSBHRESEFTEUASC SHOE Icon Function Number of buttons 20 m Execute a script file al Invoke the capture function E j Call the print screen function Dump the screen to file Toggle debugging mode En Copy to the clipboard Paste from the clipboard ds Invoke the scrollback function e Call the dial directory Connect or reconnect the line interface Send a break to the host machine i Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 219 Configuring the emulator Select which of the icons you wish to configure by clicking on it The icon and function list boxes will automatically scroll to what is curren
157. dels will force the emulation into text mode selecting normal text mode or TX RET mode depending on the current configuration VIP8800 VIP9800 The VIP8800 is a text forms mode synchronous 7800 terminal running in eight bit ASCII mode The VIP9800 model is the equivalent using native eight bit PLW Pluri Lingual West EBCDIC encoding for GCOS7 Diane systems VIP7700 VIP7760 These are the original Bull synchronous terminals which were replaced by the VIP7800 and Questar series of terminals IBM3270 IBM3278 IBM3287 IBM3270A IBM3278A If you need to use some other model and know its hexadecimal identification see the DNS V4 Terminal Management Manual 39 A2 24 then you may configure this using TM HXnnmm as an additional parameter Use check mark for interactive prompting Check the checkbox next to an item if the parameter is required for the system but you want the program to ask for the value at connect time You will be presented with a dialog box each time you connect to the host system which will allow you to enter any such interactive parameters the data you enter in each such field will be used as the default value for the field This option will probably be most useful in connection with the password field User ID Specifies the user ID to be supplied to the host subsystem to which you are connecting and is equivalent to the PID or USR parameter you would specify if you were connecting using the Datanet Terminal ma
158. ding configuration file offsets Offset 3207 1 Inhibits changing any of these security options 2 Inhibits saving DIWS DSA login user ID and password lists 4 Inhibits all configuration file changes by script except these security options The above values can only be set in one CFIX command so you must added the values together to make combinations of the options you require e g if you require inhibiting changing the security options and all other configuration file option by script you would use CFIX 3207 5 You must then save the configuration file to make the change permanent Remember that once the bit has been set then you will no longer be able to modify any of the security options so it s recommended that you keep a copy of the configuration file before you set these options and reset them all each time Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 275 Administrator notes Passwords There are two places in the emulator users may store passwords Storing of passwords in an easily accessible format is always a security risk of course so the emulator provides facilties for at least disguising these We do however recommend that passwords that have a high security rating not be stored even in encrypted form but rather entered interactively when needed Passwords in the dialing directory are protected if and only if you supply a password for the directory as a whole Do this by
159. ding quiescent ACKs on the line The setting of this option will depend upon your host Map break to IP The break signal was available on most hardware terminals and had various interpretations by the operating systems and applications to which they were connected Break is defined in the Telnet protocol to allow simulation of the functionality but it has no specific interpretation and is optional for Telnet servers Support for the Interrupt Process signal is required in Telnet servers and UNIX Linux operating systems and applications support the Interrupt Process command which aborts the currently running process and reverts to the parent process Most users thus prefer that the break key be mapped to send IP and so Glink does this by default Note that the Bull MainWay front ends map Telnet break to a secondary dialog break giving break functionality in GCOS applications and map IP to the secondary dialog Log out command causing immediate disconnection of the terminal session so this option must be OFF for MainWay Telnet sessions Modem Allows you to select which modem should be used The modem must previously have been set up using the modems icon in the control panel Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 85 Configuring the emulator Modem profile Allows you to select a particular setup and with the help of the additional buttons provided modify and create such setups for the modem A modem control
160. dows service and as such will be invisible from the desktop An additional monitoring program is supplied which will enable you to track licensing activity and also control aspects of the service interactively Although licensing is done by default from a central machine you may also set up backup licensing services on additional machines in your network to provide temporary licensing in the case where the main licensing machine is unavailable for some reason or has crashed Two programs are supplied for license serving gllservice exe provides the service itself gllserve exe monitors the service and optionally provides an alternative to gllservice as a foreground task The software as supplied is licensed to localhost This will allow you to run the service on a single machine with local clients addressing localhost as the license server To enable the evaluation license for usage in a real network see the examples provided License server name The name used by the license server is the link between the server and the clients The name must be exactly the same on both sides and must also be a symbolic name that clients can use to connect to the server Your Glink license will be issued specifically for your server name so it s important that this is registered correctly by your distributor 30 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation License server port The license server will use port number 30
161. e PRODUCT name and the user will be prompted To suggest a name to be used when propmting the user prefixe the name with a e g GROUP My Glink group INSTALL installdir The Glink setup program will use this as the installation directory glwin The user will not be prompted Environment variables may be used in the normal way e g ProgramFiles Glink will install to the users Program Files directory or SystemDrive Glink will normally install to c Glink To suggest a name to be used when prompting the user prefix the name with a eg INSTALL c glwin PARAMS parameters These command line options will be added to the GL EXE icons properties GLPACK tool To repackage the software you will need the G amp R GLPACK tool This is delivered as a standard part of Glink and installed as c glwin demo admin glpack exe Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 253 Administrator notes The GLPACK tool performs all the necessary tasks for unpacking and repacking a delivery package GLPACK can be used as a CONSOLE program for batch processing or as a GUI program with interactive dialog boxes if the Q command line option is used Typing the command with no arguments displays the following help Usage GLPACK PACK input folder output exe file pack list s GLPACK UNPACK input exe file output folder GLPACK REPACK input exe file output exefile filename filename GLPACK COMPRESS file descriptor outpu
162. e DGA This field 1s used to select the name of the host profile to which you are connect ing To view details of the available profiles add new profiles or modify existing profiles use the button marked Hosts in the same dialog box Note that this only appears when you have selected a TCP IP interface and enabled G amp R DSA gateway or G amp R DIWS gateway as the protocol or alternatively G amp R DGA as the communications interface If you specify a name in this field then you will automatically be connected to that host at startup time If you would prefer to be presented with a list of available hosts then select use connection menu Hosts button Ggate gateway This button is used to enter the configuration menu for Ggate host profiles Ignore carrier This option tells Glink to ignore the carrier status as reported by the hardware and assume that a good signal is being received This is only important when using UVTI applications that check line status Interrupt 82 Specifies the software interrupt number being used by the communications interface Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator For Atlantis interfaces this should match whatever is set in your configuration of the Atlantis software which has a default of 68h However under Windows do not use the default of 68h but reconfigure both Glink and the Atlantis software to use another value for example 7A The Atlan
163. e available Insert new line after This must be set for line wrapping to be enabled Chars Indicates the maximum amount of characters before inserting a new line The default of ZERO means that the current emulation screen width will be used Wrap after last word This forces a line wrap at the last space character before the max width is reached The space after the last word in the line is removed Text files in OEM charset This option tells the emulator that text files you are sending or receiving using ASCII upload ASCII capture or text mode Kermit are in the native PC charac ter set rather than the Windows character set Wait for character This provides a means of controlling the rate at which data is uploaded from your text file If the handshake character option is turned on by selecting a character then whenever the emulator sends a CR character to the host it will stop and wait for the specified character to be returned from the host before continuing with its output If you were for example working with an editor that sent a gt prompt for more input after each line you could set the handshake character to gt Then every time the emulator sends a line of input to the host it will wait to receive the gt character before continuing Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 237 Configuring the emulator Kermit file transfer options The Kermit file transfer dialog box provides the f
164. e config menus Disable Setting menu Disable Script menus Disable Dial directory Disable Transfer menu Disable Toggles options Lock all configuration options RM p1 p2 p3 Disable specific menus params use a syntax menu index1 index2 index3 lt menu gt can be dial display file display main menu scrollback menu windows system menu settings panel menu Has same effect as script SECURE ALL ON command Remove Windows system menu Specify name of startup script T name Specify name in GLINK INI GLINKDATA op tions Specify name of user file directory Specify password for dial directory VER update Specify options for automatic Glink upgrades Enter prise edition only We will here deal with some of the more important of these in detail By default each user configuration file is located in the MyDocuments NGlink directory You may change this by specifying the U command line option Starting GLINK with the command GL U CAGLUSE Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 13 Installation 14 for example would tell GLINK that your user files should be kept in the C GLUSE directory This may be useful either simply because it allows you to keep your user files separate from the standard software or because more than one person is sharing the same copy of the program and you wish to use multiple user directories The files affected by this parameter are the following DEF glinkcon
165. e default value is taken from the NETSETUP EXE program and may be modified using a resource editor if necessary As deli vered the title is Glinks in other words CreateGroup Glink The special name None may be used to suppress creation of a group at all CreateGroup Non Executable Normally you will be using N ETS ETUP to install icons for the Glink program itself but you may possibly want to add icons for other related programs or help files etc You can do this by providing the name of the program in this directive or the name of the document if it s one with a predefined file manager asso ciation for the extension For example you could define a separate icon for the help file using something like Executable K GLWIN GLHLP HLP 44 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Unlike the other directives the Executable directive applies to the current icon definition only and does not carry over into the next And of course the command line options that would have been added for Glink as a result of the UserDirectory ScriptDirectory and NetScriptDirectory directives will not be added neither will parameters defined with CommandParameters in earlier sections be carried over Group This specifies the name s of the groups defined in the Groups section of which this icon is a member This means that it will only be considered for
166. e options to select the cursor style you wish to use Note that the actual cursor shape will not chanmge until the next time you enter graphics mode Host may not move cursor When the 3270 emulation runs in graphics mode the host will often position the graphics mouse cursor in a specific position This can often be annoying for Windows users in that they are used to having full control over the mouse cursor locally If you set this option then all commands from the host that would reposition the graphics cursor will be ignored Language This option is provided in order to enable correct national language translite ration for your host applications Some languages may have more than one implementation so you may need to experiment with these to find the correct version for the applications you are running 148 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Mouse click local only When the 3270 emulation runs in graphics mode the host will often send commands that result in mouse clicks being sent as messages to the host rather than have a local effect only This gives access to a number of useful host functions for example host dropdown menus can be used and you can click on buttons displayed by the host When you run in this mode you can still use the mouse locally simply by holding down the shift key on the keyboard before pressing the mouse button Note that when you do this if you have a
167. e print program which will be invoked when the print function is used in the file display and is described later in this chapter in the section describing the file display Input script parameter I This parameter is used to specify an initial script parameter which will be avail able to the first script file to be run after the emulator is started More details are available in the Script Reference Manual Debug mode J The J option enables debugging mode where both line data and various other information useful in debugging problems with the emulator are displayed in a separate window The following additional options can be added to this command debug to file don t debug full GlinkApi debugging debug input packets only debug output packets only debug both directions truncate hex debugging to first line only full hex debugging debug startup start new debug file rather than append NW HWOH DB So to get a new debug file including startup debugging you could use J ZS d traces mytrace txt or to get a separate file for each session J ZS d traces mytraceSINSTANCES txt Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 21 Installation If the J option is used without specifying a filename then the default glinkdebug txt or glinkapidebug txt files will be created in the Glink User directory Debugging can be turned off either by using the option in the file menu the icon in the toolbar or
168. e printer Schemes in the other two will only be made available for the appropriate device If the same scheme exists in more than one section then the default section will take priority Schemes that you save using the color adjustment menu will always be saved in the default section of the copy in the Glink user directory It s up to you or the system administrator to move shared color schemes into the shared copy on the Glink directory Default Screen Printer Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 259 Administrator notes Windows interface The user may minimize the emulator at any time by clicking on the Minimize button or by using the ALT D key Double clicking on the Glink icon restores the emulator screen The current screen image is always saved and the line inter face will continue to accept data Any data received while Glink was minimized will be presented on your screen when you restore the screen up to a limit of the size of your communications buffer This means that you may start a process that requires some time to execute on your host machine minimize the Glink screen and perform other tasks on your Windows desktop and return from time to time to see how things are going You must of course have enough memory available to run the applications you wish to run A command sequence is provided in Glink by which a host machine can start a local command or program directly Using this f
169. e program is started If the initial length option has been set to a non default value then the initial size will be recalculated at startup time Initial screen length This option decides what length of window to use at startup time The default value is 24 rows 25 for ANSI emulation If the default value is used and the window resizing option is set to Adjust screen rows columns then the current rows columns will be used This option is only relevant for VIP7800 VT and ANSI emulation modes Initial screen width This option decides what width of window to use at startup time This is specific to each emulation mode supported by the emulator and what you set here will be specific to the actual mode you are in at the time If you wish to set this for more than one emulation mode then you must use the emulator mode menu to switch modes before returning to the menu to set the width Minimize to tray Setting this option tells Glink to minimize to the taskbar tray status area as a small icon instead of as a button to the task bar Popup dials Checking the popup dials checkbox tells Glink that if the dial window is left running in a minimized state then a successful dial should not only result in an audible warning but that Glink should pop up in front of whichever application happens to be running at the time Save bar positions Specifies whether to save the bar positions when you exit Glink Gallagher amp Robertson Glink
170. e run on the same PC if both serial ports are to be shared The C option specifies that CTS flow control should be used when accessing the serial port this has to be handled by the GLNET32 program rather than by Glink Do not specify this option unless you are sure you need it and also sure that you are using the correct cable Otherwise you may freeze the port perma nently On the other hand using a high speed modem where the line speed is different from the speed at which you are communicating with the modem usually means flow control is a requirement for correct operation The R option provides RTS flow control and will normally be needed in the same situations as require use of C 296 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces The G option must be specified for any copies of GLNET32 that are to share a name with another copy Not all NetBIOS implementations support this functio nality The B option needs to be specified in those cases where the NetBIOS stack to be used for communication with Glink is not set up as the default stack For example if you have configured NetBIOS both over SPX IPX and NETBEUI and wish to use the alternate stack Once GLNET32 is running normally this would set up in the Windows startup group then the port being shared is accessed simply by running Glink with the G amp R NetBIOS modem server interface and selecting the appropriate network na
171. e same time in that the submenus used in the menu version are replaced with tabbed property dialog boxes The images shown in this chapter use tabbed dialogs where appropriate but the fields are the same as those used for standalone dialog boxes The last group of options from the menu bar is available from the File menu of this window We will describe this group of options here while the others will be described later in this document New Starts the configuration wizard that leads you through a set of basic configuration dialog boxes allowing you to create a new configuration file Open Load the configuration from a file of your own choosing Save Save the current configuration settings on the current configuration file usually DEF glinkconfig Save As Save the current configuration settings on a file of your own choosing The configuration file is saved in the Glink user directory as determined when Glink was started This will be the directory from which Glink was started unless the U command line option overrides it When you have made changes to any of the configuration menus these changes will be in effect for the current session but not saved To save changes for use in subsequent sessions you must use either the Save or Save As option from the Settings menu or from the file menu in the settings window However if you have made changes then you will be reminded of this when you exit from Glink and be given the oppor
172. e slash for zero This option is only available if you use the Glink supplied fonts and specifies that the zero character should be displayed with a diagonal slash to help distinguish it from the letter O Use Windows font Normally Glink will use the fonts that are delivered with the emulator these are designed to be as clear as possible in the sizes you will normally need If you d prefer to use another of the fonts that you ve installed then you may check this option If the Glink fonts are missing then Windows fonts will be selected and the choice disabled Glink fonts are only available for Latin 1 Latin 2 and Greek If you need other character sets Cyrillic Arabic Hebrew Chinese Japanese etc then you must choose a Windows font Note that when choosing a Windows font only non proportional fonts are generally suitable and not all characters will be shown on the screen in the same way as they are when you use the native Glink fonts Display fonts Glink is delivered with a set of display fonts in different sizes You may select which font is to be used initially using the Settings Screen Window Attributes menu and change fonts on the fly using the Settings Toggles menu option 218 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator The font used by Glink is a superset of the standard Windows ANSI character set with a number of additional characters that are needed in order to provi
173. e use of forms By default the background of variable fields will be white and non field backgrounds will be shaded giving a dialog box effect This option may also be set with the SET 3D script command 224 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator 3D variable field options These options are only used if the 3D effects option has been set They only take effect when the emulation is set in FORMS mode and when the host has defined unprotected variable fields These options may also be set with SET 3D script commands Windows look and feel When checked this option forces the standard Windows background and text colors If the host specifically sends foreground colors other than white or black then they will be used instead This option is most effective when you reconfigure the default Glink background color from white to something else This makes the variable fields stand out against the rest of the background To get a Windows dialogue box effect use the Color Adjustments to reconfigure the background white to a gray color Windows cursor If checked then the standard Windows vertical bar cursor will be used in variable fields Strip underline For a better 3D look this option strips the underline visual attribute from variable fields Center frame If this option is checked then the frame wallpaper image will be displayed centered in relation to the emulator screen Center
174. e will be used If your mainframe has the capability of handling the entire 256 characters in the extended ASCH character set then you should set this option and choose an 8 bit transliteration table that matches the mainframe character set Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 151 Configuring the emulator If your mainframe uses a seven bit character set such as the ASCII national character sets uncheck this option and choose a seven bit transliteration table that matches the mainframe character set Note that use of an eight bit character set does not necessarily require an eight bit no parity connection on a seven bit physical connection the characters can be encoded by some emulations DKU for example Eight bit transliteration table This specifies the transliteration file to be used when communicating with an eight bit mainframe the Eight bit host option enabled The list of files presented here will depend upon the contents of your GLINK directory all files in the form of glinkxlit or the old format GLWINK are assumed to be transliteration files The transliteration file in addition to being used as a transliteration table when exchanging data is also used as a keyboard filter to prevent you entering characters that cannot be transliterated using the table you have chosen The default transliteration file is DEF default and does no transliteration at all This is suitable for eight bit La
175. e you open a secure channel to the SSHD server system and are presented with a command line shell This might be what you want for example if you intend configuring your SSHD system by supplying your public key The SSH command line interface is however limited in the terminal characteristics it can negotiate and some applications cannot be run at all using the SSH channel To access TCP IP gateways Ggate TNVIP TN3270 TN5250 Telnet Rlogin use the SSHD system to provide SSH tunneling for your other TCP IP line interfaces for example Telnet connections to the SSH system or via the SSH system to other systems Glink allows you to do this by providing a PuTTY interface for all of the TCP IP protocols To use SSH with one of these you select the interface you want and check the radio button for SSH in the security group of the chosen interface s configuration dialog box Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 287 Communications interfaces If it is the PuTTY SSH command line interface you need then select PuTTY SSHD as your network interface It is listed in the TCP IP group The PuTTY software is truly freeware and is distributed under the MIT license similar to BSD http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty download html The plink exe module delivered with Glink has been enhanced to allow sending a break to the host or do dynamic terminal resizing when using the PuTTY SSHD interface Glink automatica
176. ective of this in that it is up to the host as to when the alternate size should be used The TN3270 specification also allows for use of the IBM DYNAMIC model and in this case the alternate size may be specified dynamically in the alternate screen size option These parameters will be sent to the host as a response when querying for screen size and the host will then be at liberty to use this screen size Normally use of this option will be for specific applications requiring a screen size not covered by the normal 3270 models 92 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator TN3270 Associated LU This option should be enabled when the specified LU name is name of a screen device which has been defined with an associated printer on the TN3270 server The option is only available when you use extended TN3270 to talk to the server and when an associated printer has been defined for the screen in question You can either choose a printer model checking associated LU and selecting the screen device name to run a standalone print session or choose a screen model in which case the screen session will be started in the normal way and the associated print session as an additional session initially minimized to the system tray TN3270 Extended telnet When this option is enabled the program will use the extended RFC1647 telnet protocol to talk to the TN3270 server This will obviously only work if the server
177. ed to set up multiple Glink icons sharing the same configuration but connecting to different host profiles then the simplest way to do this is to leave the host name blank in the configuration file to be used include the gateway address however unless you are also using multiple gateways For each icon that is to connect to a specific host include the following on the command line D S GWCONNECT hostname The D prevents Glink from attempting to connect immediately otherwise the gateway menu would appear before the script command had started to execute In this kind of situation you would probably also want to add an icon that referenced the same configuration but without the above parameters in the command line This icon would be used when you want to choose a host that doesn t have its own icon or when you need to modify one or more host parameters before connecting GLHOST INI GLINKDATA file format The GLHOST INI GLINKDATA file follows the normal INI file format with a section header contaning a title in square brackets followed by separate lines for each host that is configured In other words dsa HostNamel Parameters for HostNamel HostName2 Parameters for HostName2 etc If you are using the DIWS protocol hosts for DIWS will be in an equivalent diws section HostName1 and so on are the connection names that are used to access the host from the configuration menus The parameters are standard DSA parameters
178. ee e E Re EET E UT spduveseueesestortiuea ss 289 sd d 289 Secure Shell SSH esee Ai tre ERR RENE ee 289 Secure Socket Layer SSE dtr ERAI ee 290 uuu 290 Windows serial port ertt hanes hacen IN Ee Ie Lee P dcs 290 Windows Telephony eire PER eitis 292 XOS TGX votes tstesessecteetessoteri endete te rip ter tease te PER 293 Atlantis Bull TSA V8 ies etaient trt ert ertet iens 293 Atlantis X23 V8 tiefe et n n Re Re ut 293 Cirel FP Xe NX 2T 15 ee dtu editus e ete at eee i prs 294 Cirel VTS 45 iain dide bee er Ee e E pts 295 Eicon Bull TGX eeina tee i ituri dg 295 FOr ECLA N 4 neenon duae nbn t er eee tes 295 Otliets dieta deir rte eb ide ed tbe s 296 G amp R NetBIOS modem server essen 296 G amp R SPX modem Server eee eerie ar tee d 297 NetBIOS T W siete ttr e et e i re Pe e s 298 xvi Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Introduction Introduction Glink is a terminal emulator designed for general purpose communications work Glink Professional edition and Glink Enterprise edition are Window 32 bit versions supporting all the current versions of Windows and Windows NT Windows 16 bit DOS MAC and Java versions of Glink are also available as separate packages For more details on Glink functionality refer to the User Guide This Glink Administrators guide is intended for system and network
179. elected if the configured TCP protocol is secured telnet or ggate telnets 992 ggates 30851 User data This option is only relevant when using the Atlantis X 25 or Eicon interface for direct X 25 connection using Glink as an integrated PAD In this case you may specify user data that should be entered into the call packet in this field User group This option may be used to specify that the outgoing X 25 call should be made with the closed user group facility in which case the numeric identifier for the closed user group may be entered here If you are not using the closed user group facility then leave this field blank X 25 address This option applies to the Atlantis Bull TSA X 25 and Eicon interfaces only This field is used to specify the X 25 address of the host or front end machine you wish to log into Atlantis interface users communicating with the polled VIP interface must leave this field blank Atlantis X 25 and Eicon interface users may also choose to leave this field blank and use the CrRL F6 menu to log into a host X 25 raw mode This option may be turned on to disable use of the normal PAD functionality when logging into a remote host For most purposes the option should be left unchecked 104 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Your location Allows you to select a location from those that have been set up for use by TAPI enabled applications A location defi
180. en transmitting a break A1 sends attention type 1 as for break but never purges undelivered data A2 sends attention type 2 no purge LC ON off Gline defaults to sending lower case characters to the host unchanged Turning LC off will tell the line handler to send upper case only Note that there is an equivalent option in the Glink emulation initial setup configuration allow lowercase to host Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator ID asks for your terminal identification from the line module DI HOLD OFF HOLD leaves any associated printer session connected when you disconnect the screen session This allows you to disconnect from the application but leave the printer session connected or listening for connects and able to accept print for example during the night The default is to disconnect the printer session but this can be overridden using the Gline LO ON off parameter in dsa cfg or as an additional Gline parameter in the Glink Ggate connection dialog box For the DGA interface DI is not supported but the associated printer session is never disconnected as a result of a SDIS It remains connected until the user presses the Glink disconnect button Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 121 Configuring the emulator PuTTY SSHD options Please refer to the PuTTY SSHD section for more general information about SSH and the Glink Sc
181. enters the contents of the function as keyboard input at the current cursor position Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 177 Configuring the emulator In this example we check Send page Now expand Function codes to display two single character fields In this example we enter a in the first Select the first field and then press the Enter key to open it for entry or double click the field Enter the a and press the Enter key to terminate keyboard input Now expand Contents to display the default character sequence 1u for F1 Open the field for entry and delete the content Press the Enter key to terminate keyboard input Finally we check to be sure that the F1 function is assigned to the F1 key Select the F1 key in the Keyboard pane Select the tabbed Keyboard mapping pane and in the Current key area check that the display is Selected key Fl Mapped to F1 If not you must restore the default mapping to the key Other emulations In this example we will redefine the ANSI F1 Function key 1 to transmit the sequence defined by SCO for their UNIX implementation This is only an example because the complete SCO ANSI keyboard layout is provided as a Glink standard keyboard layout and you can load it from the Layouts pane We begin by defining a macro for the sequence that we want to transmit from Fl Expand the function tree in the Functions pane category Macros sub category Macros 0
182. er 182 x 257 mm Continuous 8 inch CONTS80 continuous paper 8 inches wide Continuous 13 2 inch CONTI32 continuous form paper 13 2 inches wide A3 A3 A3 sized paper 297 x 420 mm B4 B4 B4 sized paper 257 x 364 mm Ledger LEDGER ledger sized paper 17 x 11 inches None NONE no paper source TN5250 Printer device envelope source When using print transform this option tells the AS 400 the size of envelope loaded in your printer s envelope hopper Default MFRTYPMODEL the AS 400 uses the most usual envelope source for your printer B5 B5 B5 sized envelopes 176 x 250 mm Monarch MONARCH monarch sized envelopes 3 875 x 7 5 inches Number 9 NUMBER9 number 9 sized envelopes 3 875 x 8 875 inches Number 10 NUMBER10number 10 sized envelopes 4 125 x 9 5 inches C5 SS C5 sized envelopes 162 x 229 mm DL DL DL sized envelopes 110 x 220 mm None NONE no envelope source TN5250 Model This option is provided so that you may select the appropriate 5250 model This will be used to set the screen size adjust the screen attribute handling and to provide terminal identification to the host machine where appropriate All of the models have screens with 24 rows of 80 columns except the 3477 x models which have 27 rows of 132 columns 5555 C01 is 24x80 DBCS Double Byte Character Set display 5555 BO0l is 24x80 DBCS monochrome display 3477 FC is 27x 132 display 3477 FG is 27x 132 monochrome display 3180 2 is 27
183. er ones assuming line quality good enough that running with large packets is reasonable Packet timeout This option specifies how long the built in Kermit should wait for data from the host machine before timing out and retransmitting the data The default value of 20 seconds should not be changed unless you have special reasons for doing so Packet header character 242 Almost all Kermits use the SOH character Ctrl A as the packet header In certain cases it may be necessary or desirable to use another character and this option allows you to do just that the host machine must be aware of this change for it to work correctly If you are not absolutely sure you need to change the option then leave it set at Ctrl A Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Administrator notes Information in the following sections is in general not necessary for a typical user of the emulator but will be needed by those setting up useful configu rations for their users and for advanced usage in some circumstances Glink MSI Installation Overview Glink 8 1 versions and above are delivered as digitally signed EXE bootstrapped Microsoft Windows Installer MSI installation packages To install Glink simply execute the Glink installation bootstrap program NOTE under Windows Vista the installation procedure will always prompt the user for administrator privileges regardless of the type of installa
184. er the Num Lock state is on or off If you turn on Num Lock the numeric keys on the numeric keyboard are interpreted as numerals but if you turn off Num Lock the keys are assigned functions such as Home End PgUp PgDn and cursor movement keys Make sure that you have selected your intended mode before you assign functions to the numeric keyboard You can toggle the Num Lock state from the keyboard key or by clicking the check button in the Keyboard pane Note that the Num Lock key itself can be mapped to another function than toggling the state of Num Lock Caps Lock The Caps Lock state changes only the displayed default value for the alphabetic keys on the keyboard This has no effect when assigning functions to key combinations You need to use the Shift key in the combination if you intend to assign a function to a shifted alphabetic key You can toggle the Caps Lock state from the keyboard key or by clicking the check button in the Keyboard pane Note that the Caps Lock key itself can be mapped to another function than toggling the state of Caps Lock Scroll Lock The Scroll Lock state is not used in keyboard mapping You can toggle the Scroll Lock state by clicking the check button in the Keyboard pane Note that the Scroll Lock key itself can be mapped to another function than toggling the state of Scroll Lock Layouts Layouts Layout name current Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administ
185. erefore removing the standard resizing maximizing minimizing and closing options If you wish to also disable the File Exit and Alt F4 functions then RM M1a will also need to be used Startup script S This parameter allows you to automatically start a script file as soon as the emulator comes up For example GL S START SCR would run the script file START SCR at startup time See the Script Reference Manual for a complete description of the script language Glink INI GLINKDATA options T This parameter allows you to specify that extra options are to be loaded from a GLINK INI GLINKDATA file resident in the Windows directory Options are specified in an options section in that file which could for example contain options default S START SCR tl S ANOTHER SCR This would tell Glink that the option S START SCR should be used by default but that S ANOTHER SCR should override this when T T1 was used in the command line User directory U The Glink user directory is normally the MyDocuments NGlink directory It may also be found useful if you wish to keep your own files separate from the standard files delivered with the emulator or have more than one user sharing a single computer The directory is specified with U as follows GL U C GLUSE Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 27 Installation The above command would tell Glink that user files should be kept in the C
186. erfaces The emulator may also be set up to accept incoming calls This is done simply by specifying a single asterisk as the X 25 call name the information provided in the section describing this functionality for the Atlantis X 25 interface applies equally to the Eicon ECLAN interface Others G amp R NetBIOS modem server For those running NetBIOS compatible networks with no supplied communica tions server capabilities this interface allows you to share a serial port between several machines in the network The machine with the shared serial port should run the GLNET32 program provided with the Glink software GLNET32 p c n NAME c r g t nnn h b n c is or 2 depending on whether COMI or COM2 is to be shared NAME is the network name by which the port is to be known t is an inactivity timeout in seconds h tells the program to run as a hidden window b specifies an initial lana number for use when alternate NetBIOS stacks are available Other parameters may be available start the program with no parameters to get the most current list GLNET32 is a standard 32 bit program and may be run on several of the machines in the network either with the same name if the ports are equivalent or with different names if you need to be able to select particular ports from the workstations You may also combine the two by running several GLNET32s with one name and several with another Two GLNET32s may b
187. ermit which supports this option should definitely try enabling it as it can result in savings of up to 30 on file transfers over high speed lines Character pacing This option is similar to the output pacing option in the communications setup menu but is used when Kermit also Xmodem or Ymodem is transferring files to or from the host In general hosts are able to handle data faster while running in this mode and the pacing value may be set lower often simply disabled by setting it to zero This allows for faster file transfers Ctrl Z means end of file Normally Kermit will react to an end of file character Ctrl Z or hexadecimal 1A for text transfers and assume that data after this character is not part of the text file If you turn off this option the transfer will send the entire file including any Ctrl Z characters that might be present in the file Note that binary transfers will never check for the end of file character Disable filename translate Host file names and PC file names follow different conventions in general Glink will therefore try to convert the name supplied by the host into something more suitable for the PC in those cases where this seems to be necessary If you want this function suppressed then set this option and the program will pass the name on to DOS without any conversion being applied If the function is enabled then only the last element of the host supplied name will be used and invalid cha
188. es The default AS 400 message queue name of QSYSOPR should be used in most cases Consult your AS 400 system administrator before changing this option TN5250 Printer device message queue library This option tells the AS 400 the name of the library containing the message queue used for sending operational messages The default AS 400 message queue library of LIB should be used in most cases Consult your AS 400 system administrator before changing this option TN5250 Printer device font ID This option tells the AS 400 the font identifier to use when printing TN5250 Printer device form feed type This option tells the AS 400 the form feed type to use for printing Auto feed sheets AUTOCUT automatic sheet feeder Continuous paper CONT continuous paper roll form feeder Manual feed sheets CUT manual sheet feeder Note that this form feed type is overridden when the Request print transform option is set TN5250 Printer device request print transform This option tells the AS 400 to convert the print output directly to the print format required for the configured printer model to allow pass thru printing When the AS 400 sends the print output Glink will send the print data directly to the PC s local or network configured printer This allows the AS 400 to send binary print formats such as PCL allowing for bar codes images or other preformatted printer output Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 95 Configuring the
189. et and change the password for the dial directory using the User Password menu option inside the dial directory you may also specify your password as part of the command line using the V switch 196 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Reset modem before dial If you specify this option the modem initialization string will be sent to the modem every time you dial a new host system This option allows you to make sure that the modem is always set up the same way when calling unless the site in question is configured with an additional modem command in the dial directory in which case this extra command will be sent just after the initiali zation string For example if your modem supports MNP you probably want to enable MNP when calling sites that provide MNP support but not when calling other systems Assuming that the modem command for disabling MNP is AT EO and that the modem command for enabling it is AT E1 check your modem manual for commands that apply to your modem then you could include the EO in your modem initialization string and turn on the reset modem before dial option this ensures that MNP is turned off for all normal calls Then you can include AT EL in the extra modem command field in the dial directory for those sites that do have MNP support and be sure that you are always calling in the correct mode Simple dial sequence This option tell
190. ets from the screen text will be stripped from the button text You may enter the macro to associate with the chosen text When you have entered both the screen text and the associated macro you should press the Add button to save them Optionally you can specify a custom text to be used for the button By default Glink will use the screen text Press the modify button to accept the changes Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 227 Configuring the emulator You can restrict the area in which searching for the screen text will be done by specifying non zero values for the bounding rectangle Press the modify button to accept the changes Values are inclusive so Left 20 Right 0 Top 24 Bottom 24 would search from column 20 to the end of the line in row 24 When you have defined both a screen text and a macro to associate with it you press this button to save the combination If you wish to remove a screen text definition then first retrieve it by selecting it from the list in the combo box Then press the delete button to remove the definition If you wish to change the macro to associate with a particular screen text then you may retrieve it by selecting it from the list in the combo box Change the macro definition to its new version and then press the modify button to save the change Stretch to fit screen If this option is checked then the wallpaper will be resized so as to fit the emulator window exactly
191. etup accordingly by choosing the appropriate setup options for hardware flow control If you are using a port higher than COM2 then you should be aware that the architecture of the PC is not designed to support IRQ sharing this does not apply to machines using the MCA bus This means that for example the COM3 port which uses IRQ4 by default will conflict with the COMI port in that this uses the same IRQ An internal modem configured for the COM3 defaults will therefore interfere with or be interfered by a device on the COMI port The only satisfactory solution to this kind of problem is to configure the COM3 device for an unused IRQ remembering to specify the IRQ for Windows using the COM3IRQ statement in your SYSTEM INI file A possible alternative if you are using COMI or COMO to attach a serial mouse would be to replace the serial mouse with a bus mouse that can be configured for a different IRQ Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 291 Communications interfaces On some non PC Windows platforms you may find that Glink does not correctly identify which serial ports are actually available the code used to enumerate the ports is highly Windows specific and may therefore need to be disabled To do this start Glink and execute the script command CFIX 2285 1 using the File menu and immediately save your configuration back to disk Windows Telephony This interface provides more generic access to modems than
192. f 43 rows will always be supported but use of the Rnn parameter can allow up to 99 rows on the emulation screen Changes to the number of lines shown on the screen can be made both under host control and by use of the SET SCREEN LENGTH script command Note how ever that if you wish 72 line scroll mode to be used in the VIP7800 emulation then you must use R72 rather than any other value 72 line scroll mode R72 24 This parameter specifies that you wish 72 line scroll mode to be active for the VIP7800 emulation If R72 is not specified then only the normal 24 line emulation will be available Note that 72 line scroll mode will only be active if the window resizing option in Settings Screen Window attributes is set to change displayed area The scrolling functions on the real terminals consist of Next Segment and Previous Segment which move a full screen at a time through the 72 line data space and Scroll Up and Scroll Down which move one line at a time The equivalent commands in Glink are implemented as a combination of the ALT key and functions on the extra keypad between the main keyboard and the numeric keypad The actual keys are as follows ALT END Next Segment ALT HoME Previous Segment Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation ALT PAGEUP Scroll Down ALT PacEDown Scroll Up The real terminal has only one scrolling function where the cursor follows along with
193. face Secure Sockets Layer SSL Glink uses the Secure Sockets Layer SSL through Microsoft s Secure Channel SChannel security package to provide security enabled communications including identity authentication and secure private communication through encryption Refer to the prerequisites section for details of the software you may need The host system you are connecting to must support SSL otherwise the connection will fail SSL servers are normally configured on a separate IP port number e g Secure telnet telnets is normally port 992 You would configure Glink to connect to hostipaddress 992 When use of secure sockets is enabled in Glink then SSL encryption will always be used whereas authentication is configurable and is dependent on the host you re connecting to If the host requires client authentication then you will need to acquire a valid client certificate that the host system accepts If the host refuses your client certificate the host will immediately disconnect the Glink session 280 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes If you configure server certificate validation then Glink will check that the returned host certificate is from a trusted certificate authority and that the servers name CN corresponds to the host name you are connecting to or the server name you configured Glink will immediately disconnect the session if the server certificate is not validated
194. fferent Cirel cards are supported amongst them are the FPM card which connects to a TCS TCU instead of a terminal and the FPX card which may be used for a standalone or LAN multistation connection over TGX25 This interface is supported for VIP7800 VIP7700 VIP7760 and DKU7107 7211 text and forms modes Note that if you are already running using the Cirel emulator and wish to use Glink in VIP7800 mode then reconfiguration in the front end will possibly be necessary as the Cirel program emulates the Questar series of terminals VIP7760 mode Eicon Bull TGX The Eicon Bull TGX interface provides TGX services in a LAN using the EiconCard and Eicon s associated OSILAN Gateway for DOS The interface to Glink is supplied by the ECLAN Client for Windows software No other confi guration than the standard ECLAN configuration is necessary See the Eicon ECLAN section above for more information Eicon ECLAN The Eicon ECLAN interface provides X 25 services in a LAN using the EiconCard and the associated ECLAN Client for Windows software No other configuration than the standard ECLAN configuration is necessary For con ventions about X 25 addressing and parameters see the notes on the Atlantis X 25 interface on page Error Bookmark not defined these are supported in exactly the same way for the Eicon interface Glink provides full PAD facilities internally Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 295 Communications int
195. fig The configuration file GLINK PHO The dial directory If a user directory is specified then keyboard glinkxlit and layout layouts glinklayout files may reside either in the standard GLINK directory or in the user directory If a file exists in both then the file from the user directory will be used Additionally if the help files are not found in the GLINK directory then the program will also search for them in this user directory If you are using the alternate configuration file possibility then you may start the emulator using the C parameter followed by a string with the site name the extension glinkconfig will be added to this to produce the name of the particular configuration file you wish to run from For example to use CNX glinkconfig as your configuration file you would start the emulator with GL C CNX If you wish you may specify a complete file name For example GL C CNX glinkconfig This also applies to the other options described further on in this section Another parameter allows you to insert an identifying text into the status line This may be useful if you are running more than one copy of the emulator and need some way of seeing which one you are using easily To use this option start the emulator with for example GL N UNIX host A further parameter allows you to automatically start a script as soon as the emulator comes up This parameter looks like GL S Start scrgl Glink Administrat
196. file then the file will be placed in your Glink user directory Always time out for host print Always time out for local print These two options allow you to force usage of the printer timeout for ending print jobs rather than print immediately when this otherwise would have been done In the case of host printing this may be useful when the host is sending successive print jobs that you don t want separated on several pages The same applies to local printing where you possibly would prefer that output should be continuous rather than done on a one page per printout basis Remember that even when the timeout is applied you can force immediate printing by clicking on the printer icon on the right hand side of the status bar Timeout This option specifies how long Glink should wait before emptying print output from the host to the printer Note that if you are using a laser printer then such a printer timeout will probably result in a new page on your printer If this is not desirable then set a high value for the printer timeout You can force printer output to be sent when you are done printing by clicking on the small animated printer icon in the status bar which will be shown while the timeout is still in effect Host print data options These options apply to print data received from the host Interpret SDP accented chars If you are using a print application to deliver print data to your Windows printer with an extended characte
197. from a combination of other attributes It has several modes mono 1M 4 color A 4A 4 color B 4B and 7 color 7Q 4 color A generates 4 colors by combinations of underline and low intensity 4 color B generates the same by combinations of blink and low intensity 7 colors are generated by combinations of blink underline and low intensity All are supported plus an additional mode 7G where the original attributes also are preserved The mode can be set using this option or by the host and also using the script SET DKUCOLOR command Some applications especially GCOS7 will react to the terminal model and generate attributes intended for mapping to color A table showing color mappings for the normal Questar modes is provided below Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 141 Configuring the emulator No White e Yellow Blue Violet Black White No No No White rol e Green R e e White Turquoise Green Turquoise Red Cursor straight up down Setting this option will allow you to use the arrow up down keys to move to the nearest field in the previous next lines rather than to the leftmost or rightmost field Enter key XMT If you are using the VIP emulation in text or forms mode you may wish to have the transmit function placed permanently on the ENTER key the TX RET option does not apply in forms mode and also may be reset by the host This option al
198. fter each set of printer output 170 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Pre print ctl This option decides which characters should be sent to the printer before a page of output is produced Pre printer file If the pre printer control selections do not give you enough scope for your needs for printer initialization this option lets you specify the name of a file that will be sent to the printer before each set of printer output Use print ctl for host data Usually Glink will only supply pre and post print controls or files for the Local printing option in the Printer usage section in the general printer options dialog box If you want these also to be applied to Host printing then check this option Note that this is only useful when the host sends complete pages of print such as with the VIP7800 PHD command Printer character set 7 bit This tells Glink that you have a printer that would like the national characters for your country sent in seven bit mode Ideally you should set your printer up to tackle the standard PC character set as used internally by Glink but if yours can only handle seven bit codes for the national character set then pick the appropri ate language with this option 8 bit This option tells the emulator which character set is supported by your printer Normally Glink will assume that the printer is set up for the PC character set and do
199. fying non zero values for the bounding rectangle This can be useful for example for IBM host applications which often display PFnn function texts in the lower part of the screen Values are inclusive so Left 0 Right 0 Top 20 Bottom 24 would search for buttons in lines 20 21 22 23 and 24 To define custom texts and actions for enhancement in this way you should press the custom button To define custom texts and actions for enhancement in this way you should press the custom button Custom pushbuttons This button opens a new window where you may define any texts of your choice for conversion into buttons whenever they appear on the screen For each text you can supply a macro which will be executed when the button is pressed You may enter the text to be checked for The check is case sensitive For each text you supply a macro which will be executed when the button is pressed and then press the Add button to save the text and its associated macro Texts that have already been configured along with their associated macros may be retrieved by opening the combo box You can use the as a wildcard character position Unless the character is used to indicate a variable field position buttons will not be scanned for on variable fields The is also a wildcard character The texts will be scanned in reverse alphabetical order wildcard characters will be searched for last Enclosing lt gt or brack
200. g a company support number for the Glink about box After installation the user would simply click on the preconfigured Glink desktop icon to connect directly the remote mainframe application no configuration would be required by the user NOTE The Glink packaging tool requires write access to the Demo admin directory where Glink is installed This could be a issue when Glink is installed in ProgramFiles using Windows Vista Creating Glink packages Custom Glink installation packages can be created using the Glink packaging tools delivered with the software When you start the Create Glink package icon from the Glink administrator program group in the start menu you will be guided through a series of dialog boxes allowing you to create a new customized Glink package There are three parts to a Glink package the list of files and icons to install optional parameters on where or how to install and finally the actual packaging process of compressing and adding the package to the installation program itself Two default delivery package examples are installed a workstation and a web controlled example 248 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Create workstation package The Glink workstation package will install Glink and create Glink icons on the desktop and in the Start menu as for any other program installed on the PC The installation will normally prompt the user for installation di
201. g the emulator Scripts Here you can enter script paths that then become candidates for assignment to your Layout Select the Scripts function and a button Add script s appears below the Terminal type drop down Or expand the Scripts tree and you find an entry labeled add new script Either one of these takes you into a folder window that by default positions you in your Glink scripts folder but you can navigate freely to pick up scripts elsewhere Select the script or scripts that you want to have available for assignment to your configuration All the selected scripts are added to the Functions list You can now use these script paths as functions that can be dragged and dropped into your Layout Menu shortcuts Here you find the shortcuts to all your menu line setup entries If you have not reconfigured your Glink menu line then you find functions such as File that takes you to the Glink submenu display under the File menu line entry As you modify your custom menu line in the Menu setup pane your own menu line entries will be added to the shortcut list A menu shortcut can like any other function be assigned to a key combination or a button in a Function or Keyboard bar Settings Here you find the Glink configuration settings All of the dialog boxes used to configure Glink features are listed in this tree You will find functions of the type ANS VT DKU Attribute mapping Communications DKU mode setup and File transfer Al
202. g to wait for the connect to the primary IP address before attempting to simultaneously connect to the alternate The default value of zero means that the connect to the alternate will be made immediately This field is only applicable when using the Windows Sockets interface which allows Glink to make an asynchronous connect to the gateway For other interfaces Glink must wait for the primary connect to time out This may take considerable time depending on the configuration of the TCP IP stack being used DGA Protocol DSA Connects using native Bull DSA protocol over TCP IP transport DIWS Connects using DSA ISO Work Station protocol over TCP IP transport DGA Local SCID The Local SCID is used as the calling DSA session control name node name on outgoing connections The SCID name is 4 characters or less in length Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 77 Configuring the emulator DGA Local DSA200 address A DSA200 address consists of two components with the following syntax AAA TTT AAA is Area Number 1 254 and TTT is the Transport Number 1 254 The values are given in decimal The default value for the Local DSA200 address is 1 2 The local DSA200 address need only be included if you will be using Glink DGA to make DSA200 connections DSA200 is typically used for DPS7 native DSA access and for some DPS8 subsystems DGA Remote DSA200 address A DSA200 address consists of two component
203. ge Printer IBM 39303 IBM 3930 03D Page Printer IBM 4019 LaserPrinter IBM 4019E LaserPrinter E IBM 4019LaserPrinter HP Mode IBM4019E LaserPrinter E HP Mode Glink Administrator s Guide 97 Configuring the emulator 98 BM4029 BM4029HP IBM4037 IBM4039HP IBM4070 BM4070EP BM 4072 BM4076 BM 4230 BM4232 BM 42011 IBM42012 IBM42013 IBM 42021 BM42022 BM42023 IBM42071 IBM42072 IBM42081 BM42082 IBM4212 IBM4216 BM4226 BM4230 BM4232 IBM47121 BM47122 IBM 4029 010 LaserPrinter 5E IBM 4029 020 LaserPrinter 6 IBM 4029 030 LaserPrinter 10 IBM 4029 040 LaserPrinter 10L IBM 4029 010 LaserPrinter 5E HPMode IBM 4029 020 LaserPrinter 6 HP Mode IBM 4029 030 LaserPrinter 10 HP Mode IBM 4029 040 LaserPrinter 10L HP Mode IBM 4037 5E Printer IBM LaserPrinter 4039 10D HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 10D Plus HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 10R HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 10R Plus HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 12R HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 12R Plus HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 12L HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 12L Plus HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 16L HP Mode IBM LaserPrinter 4039 16L Plus HP Mode IBM 4070IJ IBM 4070 IJ Epson Mode IBM 4072 ExecJet IBM 4076 ExecJet II Printer HP Mode IBM 4230 483 Printer IBM Mode IBM 4230 413 Printer IBM Mode IBMA232 302 Printer IBM Mode IBM 4201 1 Proprinter IBM 4201 2 Proprinter
204. h keys are available for mapping which already have a function and which are reserved and unavailable for mapping As you drag a function across the Keyboard pane you will see each key change color as it is selected for the drop You can also select keys by clicking with the mouse or pressing the key on the keyboard when the Keyboard pane has the focus The selected key is used as the target for a number of buttons that can assist you with keyboard mapping These buttons are found in the tabbed Keyboard mappings pane Map key to This displays the function currently selected in the func tion tree in the Functions pane If you press the button the selected function will be assigned to the key Map to shared This displays the function currently assigned to this key in the shared keyboard configuration i e the configu ration that is shared by all emulations This button will reconfigure the key back to the shared function Map to default If your custom keyboard overrides the default function for a key this button will reconfigure the key back to the default function The default function can be specific to the emulation and if so the correct default is selected Remove mapping This button removes all mapping The key will no longer have any function in the selected emulation or in the shared configuration if that is currently selected The key names used in the Keyboard pane are taken from the keyboard driver and thus are alway
205. he Kermit setup menu then you may need to disable the DPS8 compression option Check whether an upgraded FTRAN is available first though Expand tabs TAB characters in text files will by default be expanded to spaces when the text file is sent to a host machine The reasoning behind this is that TABs are usually set every eighth character in PC files while this may not be the case on the host If your TABs are not set up for 8 characters between TABs or if you want to send the TABs unchanged to the host then you need to alter the contents of this option Setting zero will tell the program not to expand TABs at all setting any other value will tell the program the TAB offset your file is using and the file will be expanded accordingly Host quoting needed This option must be enabled if you have a host that uses a special character as a quote or hide character If your host is using this option the quote character will normally be the backslash although in some countries this may have been changed to the grave accent If this is the case then Kermit transfers will not be possible without this special option To test whether the option is needed type in the command at the RDY prompt LNWD If the host accepts your command and shows you the name of your working directory then you will need to set the option for the backslash If the host does not accept the command then try typing L WD If this command is accepted then
206. he one you want Send transmits the contents of the function Send page transmits the contents of the function followed by transmission of the current screen Display enters the contents of the function as keyboard input at the current cursor position Function codes are two single character fields in the VIP header of the transmission block used to transmit the function contents Enter what you want from the keyboard Contents are the actual characters that will be transmitted Enter what you want from the keyboard For simplicity you use the same notation as for strings in Glink macros and scripts using e g A to denote CTRL A SOH Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 187 Configuring the emulator To open the Function codes or Contents fields for keyboard entry you can double click the field or you can select the field single click or using the keyboard and then hit the Enter key on the keyboard Once you have configured the values you want for Action Function codes and Contents you can drag the modified Function key function to the pane where you want to assign it Movement These are terminal functions that move the cursor in the display You find functions of the type tab back tab and cursor up down left right Most of these functions are meaningful when assigned to control keys both on asynchronous terminals which send the command sequence to the application and on synchronous terminals that move
207. ic pad between cursor keys and application keys If you enable this option then the reverse will be true and application keypad mode will be applied when NumLock is not active giving you NumLock as a switch between application keypad mode and a numeric keypad 130 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Auto Linefeed In If this option is turned on then Glink will automatically add a line feed character to all carriage return characters received from the host This option may be used in cases where all the data from the host is written on the same line of your screen Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Auto Linefeed Out This option specifies whether the emulator should append a line feed character every time it sends a CR This option is provided for 7800 compatibility only and should be left OFF for normal usage on most host machines Destructive Backspace Effective only for modes where characters are being echoed locally by the emulator i e the echoplex option is turned off this option specifies that the Backspace key should delete the character backspaced over Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Echoplex This decides whether the emulator
208. ich you store on your local disk Once all authentication and encryption key negotiations have concluded successfully the Glink session will continue as normal Encryption algorithms are CPU intensive and you may find that this affects system performance 278 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Refer to the PuTTY User manual for a detailed explanation of PuTTY Public key authentication support Prerequisites The plink exe module is the only prerequisite for Glink s PuTTY interface and must be in the Glink directory If it s not Glink will install it for you the PuTTY license will be displayed at this point The PuTTY software is truly freeware and is distributed under the MIT license similar to BSD http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty download html Public key authentication Instead of a password you can configure the Glink PuTTY interface to use Public key authentication when identifying your Glink to the SSH Daemon Public key authentication is based on two keys a public key which anyone can know and is configured on the SSH system and a private key which only you know If your private key is stored somewhere on the file system enter the path or choose Browse to look for it The Glink PuTTY interface requires that your private key is stored in PuTTY native format PPK If your private key has an associated passphrase you must supply this as your SSHD password
209. ied to the main directory if found on the secondary When a secondary directory is specified all forms stored are stored both on the main and secondary directories Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 137 Configuring the emulator If only a directory name is supplied without a preceding full path then the directory will be created under the Glink User directory This is the case of the default tsm8 value which will be created in the Glink User directory There is no default for the TSM8 secondary directory which will normally be configured for a shared file server TX on Return This option only has an effect when the emulator is started in Text mode If set on then the CR key may be used to transmit messages to the host In addition to transmitting the data the key will also perform its normal CR function with an added LF if the Auto LF option is on Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Typeahead mode Typeahead applies to TEXT and FORMS mode only and is a simple implementation of flow control When typeahead is active if you press the transmit key then no more keyboard input will be processed until either the turn has been received from the host or 10 seconds have passed with nothing being received from the host at all or the host has been idle for at least 500 milliseconds for this optio
210. ies used by the emulator sse 256 Window platform directory locations 256 Files used by tlie emulatof ette ee ie e e dee ners 257 GLECOLS INIGLINKDATA fle eite erre terrere RAO 258 Windows Interface aeree teer etes o ee RE Eee suec rtu ge egets 260 Script control from the host uio er EET E EE 261 Language Ino 265 xiv Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents e 268 DPS6000 contigurati n creto ES Ve Ee tec EYE SE t eade sev 269 Technical specifications x 2 oce e Eee etd ege etit tus 270 ETT DE A fue t Rt C EE ETE TL Securing Glink sd een Rotes n pae e eee ue eductus 271 Starting Glink from a hyperlink esse 271 Restricted user environments sess eene 272 Locking selected configuration options sssssseeeeee 272 Locking all configuration options cc cccsseesseseeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenseenaes 272 Disabling functionality by command line sees 273 Disabling functionality by script 274 Configuration security options sss 275 PASS WOTGS 2n etat eet n E DERI A erent o Qt da rase recede 276 Recovering from unwanted configuration changes ssssss 276 Secure Shell SSELDy ce estet ce HR ete wn e IURE Ra QR UU Eee dus 2T Pr requisites toes eios NU E beanes 279 Public key authentication essere 279 Generating a Publi
211. ile has a default name of DEF glinkconfig The C option allows you to select one of several alternate configuration files You may specify either just the name or the complete filename For example C MODEM Configuration file is MODEM glinkconfig fC Displays list of available configurations glinkconfig C GLCONF 1 Configuration file is GLCONF 1 Configuration files are stored on the Glink user directory see the U command line option Configuration directory CD The Glink configuration directory is normally the CommonDocuments Glink or GlinkExecDir directory If this option is used then Glink searches for configuration files in this directory rather than the Glink directory before looking in the Glink user directory see the U command line option This option may be useful in web controlled Glink environments where the main configuration files are on the web server but the user may have some local configuration files such as a merged GLHOST INI GLINKDATA file GL CD http myhost com glink config U SGLINKS License server CS The CS parameter is used instead of the LS parameter to specify the Glink Java NET license server DNS name This option should be used when sharing session licenses with the Java and Net versions of Glink and GlinkWeb in a Glink Enterprise Edition environment Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 19 Installation License server over SSL CSSL The CSS
212. ill arises There are two ways to resolve this problem the less palatable approach is to reduce the line speed of course The alternative is to install a more modern communications chip UART on your serial port or replace the serial port altogether with one using such a chip Windows provides specific support for the NS16550AFN chip This chip is pin compatible with the 16450 chip found in most normal PC serial ports and has an extra buffer that can save characters received while Windows is not able to handle them Replacing the chip may seem a little drastic but it s fairly inexpensive and is well worth the investment if you need reliable high speed serial communication in the Windows environ ment Another common problem you may experience when running high speed comms is flow control The normal setup you use when talking to a high speed modem is to configure the data rate between the PC and the modem to a higher speed than the actual data rate over the telephone line This allows you to make full use of modern data compression schemes but requires that both the PC and the modem be able to control the flow of data The recommended way of doing this is to configure the modem for hardware flow control otherwise known as CTS RTS flow control The commands used for this vary from modem to modem but should be described in your modem manual under one of the above keywords You will then obviously have to configure your Windows comms s
213. ill be immediately usable after the upgrade procedure is complete If you wish to install a new version without overwriting a previous version it s OK to do so by specifying a new directory for the installation but remember that Windows will not allow you to run two different versions of the software simultaneously Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 9 Installation Installing Glink on a file server 10 Installation of Glink on a file server is done in the same way as installation on a local drive see the above except that you will select a network drive when asked for a directory on which to install the software There are a few additional points that must be dealt with and an additional utility is provided to allow you to automate the task for those who will be using the software If you prefer to deal with these manually we list here the main points otherwise skip to the next section describing the NETSETUP network setup utility We will assume in the examples that you are installing to F GLWIN The Glink icon will have to be installed on each workstation using the File New menu selection in the Program Manager and choosing F NGLWINNGL EXE as the program name Each workstation that will be using the software should have its own user directory for files that are specific to the workstation for example configuration files This directory can be either on a local drive or on
214. ime the backup license service is started the name of the machine on which the backup service is running must have been supplied to the main license server in the alt command line parameter when the service was started To summarize this to run a licensing service on main mydomain com with a backup licensing service on backup mydomain com you would use gllservice install start alt backup mydomain com on the main machine and gllservice install start backup name main mydomain com on the machine being used to provide backup Any number of machines may be used to provide backup in this way Backup servers will take over from the main server whenever it becomes unavailable They will continue to supply licenses to clients for a maximum of one week by which time you must either have restarted the service on the main server or provided a replacement server The backup machine does not need a license in order to run the service as the license is obtained from the main server The only files you need to have on this machine are gllservice exe The service program gllserve exe The monitor program gllserve hlp The help file gllserve cnt The help table of contents int This is used to specify a non default license renewal interval in seconds for the licensing service Once they have obtained an initial license from the server clients are required to renew the license at regular intervals the default value being 60 seconds Inc
215. in the packing list file should however reflect the actual file name rather than this modified version Once you ve made your changes you need to edit the relevant PACKING LST files to reflect any modifications you ve made If you are making a multilingual package you need to edit all the PACKINGx LST files and use a PACKING LST syntax with the PACK command You can now repack the file using the following commands del mypackage exe GLPACK PACK glinkfiles mypackage exe packing lst If you need to change installation options such as group or installation folder then you can use the interctive GUI dialogbox instead GLPACK PACK glinkfiles mypackage exe packing lst Q A few words of explanation as to what s happening here may be useful The setup exe program which is always inside each delivery is the basis for the installation package and is copied as a starting point You may package inside your own program so if the mypackage exe file already exists then the packager will use that as a starting point this 1s the reason for the del mypackage exe command which ensures that a fresh start is made GL PACK is then invoked to read the specified packing lists and merge them into the installation program Only files that are mentioned in the packing lists referred to will be included Be careful when doing this packaging if any of the files mentioned in the packing lists are not available then the installation will not function correctly Yo
216. ing This parameter corresponds with the DMB parameter used when connecting using the Datanet Terminal manager Typical values would be GCOS8 TSS GCOS7 IOF MML Host node Specifies the name of the host system to which you are connecting Ggate This parameter is used to identify a host entry in the DSA configuration file and must be present in the configuration file This entry is a logical name only but will often be identical to the session control entity DSA node name The host entry in the DSA configuration file may have a SCID parameter giving the real node name but otherwise the SCID defaults to the same name as the host entry provided it conforms to the DSA node name length of maximum four characters 108 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator DGA Specifies the name of the host system to which you are connecting This parameter is the four character SCID Session Control Identifier of the DSA node where the host application resides It corresponds to the SC parameter used when connecting using the DNS Terminal Manager The node s IP address and its DSA200 address if needed are configured in the DGA comms setup They are delivered from Glink to DGA using DGA specific line parameters HO the IP address LN2 the DSA200 address Host profile name Each host profile has a name that may be configured as your host name in the communications setup menu or alternatively
217. ink 2 Install a single icon titled Glink in that group 3 Create directories 3MyDocuments Glink and sMyDocuments Glink scripts 4 Use a command line of NGLWINNGL EXE U sMyDocuments Glink OU SMyDocuments Glink scripts Let s expand on this a piece at a time First we ll install a script library and place it on the K NGLWINNSCRIPTS directory Also we will change the name of the icon from Glink to DPS8 We then use a NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA containing Admin Signoff TRUI LH Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Installl IconTitle DPS8 NetScriptDirectory K GLWINNSCRIPTS This installation would do exactly the same as the first one except that the command line would have O K NGLWINNSCRI PTS added to it Now let s assume that we don t want to use the local hard disk for anything in that your user is never going to back anything up from there and that the net work setup provides every user with a personal drive as H We might then use something like Admin Signoff TRU Gl Installl IconTitle DPS8 NetScriptDirectory K GLWIN SCRIPTS UserDirectory H GLWIN UserScriptDirectory H GLWINNSCRIPTS This will do exactly the same as in the previous example except that the direc tories will be created on the H drive and the command line parameters will also be pointed to that drive Now let s say that we want to add a couple of ou
218. installation if the user initially selected one of the groups that is listed in this directive For example you could specify Group Dept2 Dept3 which would tell the program that this icon should only be selected if the Dept2 or Dept3 group was chosen in the initial group dialog box If the Group directive is omitted from a group and no previous Group directive has been used in a prior group which would otherwise be inherited then the icon is considered to be a member of all groups You can also specify this using the directive Group ALL IconFrom If you want to use your own icon in the group window you may use this directive to set the name of the file from which to load the icon For example IconFrom C WINDOWS MORICONS DLL The default icon is taken from the GL EXE file See also the IconIndex directive Iconindex This directive is used in conjunction with the IconFrom directive and speci fies the zero based number of the icon in the file that was specified For example IconIndex 1 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 45 Installation IconTitle This specifies the title for the icon to be created and will appear underneath the icon in the group window The default value is taken from the NETSETUP EXE program and may be modified using a resource editor if necessary As delivered the title is G1ink in other words IconTitle Glink NetGlinkDirectory
219. ion mode you can work on the configuration of any of the emulation specific keyboards or the shared keyboard by selecting it here Shared Defining a new default for a key in the shared keyboard configuration applies it to all of the keyboards resetting any emulation specific definitions of the same key You must go back to the emulation specific keyboard configurations to override the shared key for those emulations where you want another definition Functions Functions E Terminal functions functions EE Glink functions EFO Macros Hj 0 999 empty EFE Scripts Em Menu shortcuts EA Settings EA Characters The Functions pane displays the function tree This contains all the functions found in Glink by category Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 185 Configuring the emulator You can expand any part of the tree in the normal way to reach the function that you want to assign to some key key combination Function bar button Keyboard bar button or Menu setup entry When you have reached the function in which you are interested you can simply drag the function from the tree and drop it into the pane that you are configuring Note that if you expand the function tree and select a function then the function is regarded as being pre selected for use in conjunction with configuration buttons in the Keyboard mappings Function bar Keyboard bar or Menu setup panes to assign the selected function
220. ions or if you select the File Exit option from the menu You can ask always to have to confirm that it was your intention to exit never be prompted for confirmation or only be prompted 1f the connection is still active Continuous reminders This option affects whether or not the beeping from a reminder set in the appointments function should continue until shut off by the user or whether it should stop after one minute The window will in any case remain on the screen until removed with the Esc key Disable remote commands Glink provides extensive facilities for host control of the PC in order that host and PC applications may easily be integrated In some circumstances you may not wish to allow this however in which case turn on this option Disconnect actions Here you may specify what action to take 1f the connection with the host is lost The default is no action but you may also choose either to terminate the program or to automatically reconnect the line Note that if a script is running then no action will be taken until the script has terminated Glink title bar text This option allows you to configure the text used in the Glink title bar GLINK is the default text You can include parameters in the text which are replaced at runtime with their actual values For example the text shown below prefixes the title with the unique instance number of the current Glink session SINSTANCES GLINK Please refer
221. irectory These will be replaced any time they occur inside a number in the dial directory before the number is used For example if you configured the C abbreviation as WA46401298756 then a telephone number entered into the dial directory as 815 455 5917C wil actually be sent to the modem as 8154555917W46401298756 Smart modem configuration The most important part of configuring a smart modem and probably the most difficult is to find out what the best modem initialization string should be for your modem If you are fortunate enough to be using one of the modems in the smart modem menu first time installation then this job will already have been done for you Otherwise you will probably have to experiment a little yourself in order to get the best possible use from your modem The setup string that is configured by Glink when you choose the other modem option in the first time setup will almost certainly work but at the same time is almost certainly not the best setup string for your modem Some of the more commonly supported options that you should consider using are amp C1 use real carrier signal amp D2 use DTR signal to drop connection Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 201 Configuring the emulator amp GO do not use guard tones 511 270 fast touch tone dial To see whether your modem supports these and other commands first start Glink Type the following ATE1Q0 lt enter gt
222. is option is not used then Glink will use the default font for printing Otherwise select the font you wish to use for print output with this list box Note that for all normal cases you should choose a non proportional fixed pitch font for print output Only fonts that use the ANSI character set and that have been set up for use on the currently selected printer may be chosen here Font size Selecting default in this option tells Glink to use whichever font size is defined as standard by your Windows printer driver Selecting auto on the other hand tells Glink to choose a font that uses as much as possible of your paper in comparison with the current screen size Alternatively you may select a font size directly specified in points that is units of 1 72 of an inch In the case of true type fonts a selection of sizes is displayed but you may specify whatever size you choose to the nearest tenth of a point Font style Use this list box to select the basic font style for printing Formatting horizontal The horizontal formatting options allow you to modify the way the printed text output will appear on paper See also the section describing vertical formatting options The default values of zero characters per line and automatic character spacing tell Glink to use the default printer settings for the fonts used and for the width of paper Characters This option can be used to specify the maximum number of characters that Glink
223. k all configuration options RL Restricted user RL command line option can be used to completely lock all configuration options in all the settings dialog boxes In the same way you could also disable the save options in the settings menu using the RG 2 command line option GL EXE C myconfig RL RG 2 Disable specific menus RM The restricted user option RM can be used to disable a set of menu items or configuration options The RM option uses a syntax with the same principles as the MBAR script command The first character 1s D Dial display F File display M Main menu S Scrollback menu W Windows system menu X Supersetup menu Then follows a single character for each menu level 1 9 a b c separators count as a position in the same way as with MBAR So RM M15 M1a disables the fifth and tenth items in the first item of the main menu print screen file display You can combine RM options or have separate RM entries both the below are valid command line parameters RM M14 M15 M16 RM M18 Note that disabling a menu item will also disable the equivalent function on the toolbar if it s present This applies both to items disabled with RM and those that are disabled with RG parameters 26 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Remove Windows system menu RW This parameter completely removes the System menu from the caption title bar of the Glink window and th
224. k title bar text below would prefix the title with the unique instance number of the current Glink session SINSTANCES GLINK Glink supports all system environment variables using the SVARIABLES syntax e g STEMP SystemRoot SAPPDATA ProgramFiles and also supports the special variables MyDocuments CommonDocuments CommonAppData and LocalAppData for cross platform compatibility Glink also supports some internal variables using the VARIABLES syntax e g SGLINKS The following internal variables are supported SGLCFGS Glink configuration directory CD SGLINKS Glink program directory GL EXE directory SGLSCRS Glink script directory O SGLSUSES Glink user script directory OU SGLUSES Glink user file directory U SINSTANCES Current Glink session instance number SUSERS User s logon name SUSERNAMES User s logon name SCOMPUTERS Computer name Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Default command line options Rather than always start your copy of GLINK with GL U CAMYFILES You can configure default command line option in the GLINK INI GLINKDATA file or set the GLWINOPT environment variable GLINK INI GLINKDATA file The GLINK INI GLINKDATA formerly GLINK INI file should reside in the Glink directory You could create a GLINK INI GLINKDATA file and set default parameters by including a line like options default U
225. l There are two ways of using the PuTTY interface Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 289 Communications interfaces You can select the PuTTY SSHD interface to be used for communication with Secure Shell daemons SSHD over a TCP IP network using the SSH command line interface A more normal need is to use the SSHD system to provide SSH tunneling for your normal TCP IP line interfaces Even though your chosen TCP IP protocol Ggate TNVIP TN3270 TN5250 Telnet Rlogin is insecure your connection will be made secure by tunneling thru a command line SSH channel to the SSHD server system and then port forwarding to the target service You can make your connection to a service on the same system as the SSH server or another system via the SSH server system In the latter case your connection is only secured by Glink as far as the SSH server the path from there to the target service should be secured by other means your internal systems firewall Secure Socket Layer SSL Glink can be configured to use the Secure Sockets Layer SSL through Microsoft s Secure Channel SChannel security package to provide security enabled communications including identity authentication and secure private communication through encryption All currently supported versions of Microsoft Windows include SSL SSL v2 v3 and TLS vl and data encryption as a standard and require no additional software For Windows 95 and 98
226. l SSH Glink uses the Secure Shell protocol provided by the PuTTY plink module The PuTTY software is truly freeware and is distributed under the MIT license similar to BSD http www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty download html There are two ways of using the PuTTY interface You can select PUTTY SSHD under the Vendor APIs or TCP IP list in the Glink Communications Interface configuration dialog box The PuTTY SSHD interface is used for communication with Secure Shell daemons SSHD over a TCP IP network When you select the interface you open a secure channel to the SSHD server system and are presented with a command line shell This might be what you want for example if you intend configuring your SSHD system by supplying your public key The SSH console interface is however limited in the terminal characteristics it can negotiate and some applications cannot be run at all using the SSH channel Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 277 Administrator notes To access TCP IP gateways Ggate TNVIP TN3270 TN5250 Telnet Rlogin use the SSHD system to provide SSH tunneling for your other TCP IP line interfaces for example Telnet connections to the SSH system or via the SSH system to other systems Glink allows you to do this by providing a PuTTY interface for all of the TCP IP protocols To use SSH with one of these you select the interface you want and check the radio button for SSH in the security gro
227. l of these configuration dialog boxes can be assigned to your custom layout and called up by a key Key bar Function bar or Menu line entry Characters Here you find the complete 256 characters of the PC character set defined as functions so that they can be assigned to keys or key combinations The character set is divided into categories Control 0x00 Ox1F Normal 0x20 Ox7E and Additional 0x7F OxFF Expand the tree to look at the individual characters Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 189 Configuring the emulator Keyboard mappings Functions Keyboard mappings 3 Function bar 4 Keyboard bar Menu setup Next word v Previous segment Previous word v Return Configured on Scroll down Selected key Padn Mapped to Next segment Selected function Next segment Remap key to Alt End Map to shared Scroll up v Tab p Map to default E Glink functions i Remove mapping Receive a file E Macros EE Scripts FHM The Keyboard mappings pane has two functional areas a display of the currently selected function in the Functions pane and a display of the currently selected key or key combination in the Keyboard pane with buttons for configuring it See example Assign a function to a key using the Keyboard mappings buttons The Selected function area 190 Open the function tree in the Functions pane and sele
228. ld be delimited with an ETX or EOT character this applies to all messages in Forms or Text mode and to status messages in Character mode Typeahead mode Typeahead applies to TEXT and FORMS mode only and is a simple implementation of flow control When typeahead is active if you press the transmit key then no more keyboard input will be processed until either the turn has been received from the host or 10 seconds have passed with nothing being received from the host at all or the host has been idle for at least 500 milliseconds for this option to function properly the host must not have response time problems If typeahead mode is active but there is no response from the host you may clear it by pressing the break key This option only affects the initial setting for typeahead mode to change the setting interactively use the equivalent option in the toggles menu Use SISO for printing Normally the SI SO control characters are used to indicate line graphics from the host Some special purpose applications use them for print control however and for such applications this option must be enabled Use SS2 for 8 bit chars By default this option is turned ON and means that Glink will accept sending and receiving extended characters such as accented letters euros etc as SS2 encoded sequences Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 145 Configuring the emulator Wrap around tabbing When this option is set
229. led by TAPI cannot be set up the same way as you would set up a serial port so if you need different specific setups for accessing different sites then you must use this facility NCU address This option is only shown for the Zenith ZLAN interface and should be used to enter the address of the network controller and port you will be using Net name ID On the Case 6000 interfaces this field is used for entering the network name or id of the port to which you wish to connect This may be either a logical name or a device identifier On the raw NetBIOS interface this field will contain the NetBIOS name of the server to which you are connecting Network Number This field should normally be left at its default value of zero but may be set to something else in the case where the DNTD gateway machine resides on a different internetwork than the one to which you are connected OSI interrupt number This option is used for the CASE 6000 interface the number configured here should be left at its default value of 66h unless this has been changed in the supporting software It defines which software interrupt should be used by Glink to communicate with the OSI driver 86 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Pacing This option specifies how many milliseconds the emulator should wait between each character it sends to the host In all normal situations this parameter should be left at its
230. lem reading the backup copy later on This is not the same as saying that you can make copies and give them away you must have a licence to use the emulator You can use the Disk Copy Disk selection under the Windows File Manager to make this backup copy If you are intending to install the software for use on the serial port make sure that you have connected the serial port with a suitable cable and also that your modem if any is switched on If you are intending to install the software for use with a LAN communications interface then any necessary LAN software should be installed and activated before you attempt to install the Glink software The Communications Interfaces appendix to this guide page 284 contains information about requirements for the various interfaces supported by the emulator Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 3 Installation Installing Glink The Windows installation procedure assumes that Microsoft Windows is installed and running and that you have a basic knowledge of how to use Windows Put the installation diskette or CD if the software was delivered on more than one physical diskette this will be the diskette labeled as number 1 in the drive you wish to install from Start the SETUP program using either of the two following procedures e Select File Run in the Program Manager or File Manager menu bar or Start Run in Windows 95 or NT and type A SETUP in the wind
231. lients Machine name User name Reported IP Actual IP Number of licenses Backups Gallagher amp Robertson Name being used by the license service Port number being used by the licensing service Maximum supported sessions allowed by license Current number of active client licenses Current number licenses held by backup servers Largest number of active sessions since service was started Total number of license requests renewals Total number of requests granted Total number of requests not granted Total number of timeouts licenses reclaimed because the clkient did not renew Maximum number of simultaneous license requests that can be handled this is increased dynamically as needed and is provided to give an indication of server loading License requests that are actually in process this number should normally be fairly low List of clients with active licenses You may select a client from this list detailed information for the client in question will then be displayed in the fields that follow Machine name for selected client User name for selected client IP address of client as seen by client IP address of client as seen by server Number of licenses being used by this client This supplies a list of active backup servers Glink Administrator s Guide 37 Installation Additional buttons in the dialog allow you to terminate the monitor program inspect this help file upgrade the license and stop or start
232. link window at the left hand edge of the screen Right will place the right hand edge of the Glink window at the right hand edge of the screen 210 Glink Administrator s Guide GLIN en propertie x amp Screen colors tag VIP attribute mapping og ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Color adjustments E window attributes Fonts FE Toolbar setup Options 9 Facelifting Initial screen width Initial length 7 Popup dials 240 Q0 5132 Rows 24 F Title includes host name Window appearance J Use menu bar Default Normal 5 Icon Maximize 7 Use status bar Horizontal position Use caption bar Q Default D Left 2 Right Center V Use tool bar Current Use keyboard bar Vertical position Use function bar Top Bottom 3 Center gave bar positions E gt v Undockable bars Window resizing options iu 4 Use toolbar tips Change displayed area Minimize to tray Adjust font size Adjust screen rows columns Update threshold options Dialog box size Characters 240 Lines 9 Spt 5 10pt 5 12pt OK Cancel Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Center will place the Glink window in a position with left and right hand edges at the same distance from the edges of the screen Current will save the current position and size of both the main emulator window and the scrollback window in the current configuration file when Glink is terminated and use these values again the next time th
233. lly detects the plink exe version it is using and can still use the original plink exe downloaded from the above web site If plink exe is not present in the Glink directory the Glink will install it for you the PuTTY license will be displayed at this point The rest is invisible you configure the IP address user name and terminal type plus private key information if that s needed and connect Glink starts plink exe in the background to provide the SSH channel The PuTTY software includes a utility for generating private keys and the Glink configuration dialog interfaces seamlessly to it Use the SET PKEY script command for setting the private key used in the SSH PuTTY interface Raw TCP IP Using the raw TCP IP interface gives a null protocol and is similar to the way Glink communicates over the Windows serial port Telnet negotiation and other protocol packets are not interpreted they are treated as normal data Rlogin Terminal sessions can use Rlogin protocol when user identification is to be passed between GLINK and UNIX Linux server systems as part of the connection protocol The default Rlogin port number is 513 Telnet Terminal sessions use the Telnet protocol to reach standard Telnet servers on UNIX Linux or many other Open server systems The default Telnet port number is 23 288 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces TN3270 TN3270E IBM systems can be accessed using
234. lly you will only need to install a client certificate if the host system requires client identification 282 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes You should never need to install a server certificate as it should always be valid and issued by a trusted root CA If not then server certificate validation cannot be configured in Glink Installing certificates Certificates can be imported from a certificate file or downloaded from certificate servers To install a certificate file e g PFX CRT CER P7B simply double click the file and Explorer will start the Import certificate wizard Other certificate file formats can also be imported via the Import button in the Internet options Content Certificates It is also possible that the host site has set up a certificate server for administering and distributing client certificates A certificate server will normally be accessed via a secure web page with your browser Configuration options Please refer to the security configuration options section for details Scripting SSL Please refer to the SET SSL script command section of the Glink Script Reference Manual for details Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 283 Communications interfaces Communications interfaces GLINK supports TCP IP a number of third party commercial X25 TGX network interfaces asynchronous serial ports and also supplies its own
235. lows you to always use the ENTER key as a transmit key Message Terminator This determines whether messages should be delimited with an ETX or EOT character 142 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Model Allows you to select the Questar model type that the emulator will return in the reply to a device attribute enquiry This option may also be set using the script SET DKUMODEL command New line after XMT When this option is set then a new line operation will be performed when the transmit key is pressed This is the standard mode but it may be convenient to suppress it when working with some editors that generate a new line themselves and which would otherwise force you to work with double spaced lines Printer columns Allows you to specify the number of printer columns that will be returned by the emulator in a response to a device attribute enquiry Printer cps Allows you to specify the printer cps rate that will be returned by the emulator in a response to a device attribute enquiry Printer ID Allows you to specify the printer ID that will be returned by the emulator in a response to a device attribute enquiry Printer lines page Allows you to specify the number of printer lines per page that will be returned by the emulator in a response to a device attribute enquiry Right justify with This specifies which character should be used when doing right justification
236. m the host is already set up for printing on a real printer or contains control sequences specific to the printer you are using Host printing This list box allows you to select the type of printing Glink will use when print output is received from the host The Host print data options will also be used for host printing Local printing This list box allows you to select the type of printing Glink will use when doing local printing suchas the Print screen and Print variables menu commands Windows GUI printing uses the Windows printer section above and the Windows GUI printing options Windows text printing uses the Windows printer section above and the Text printing options File text printing uses the Write to file section above and the Text printing options GlinkApi text printing uses the options set for text printing When you choose this all print output is sent to the GlinkApi client program as PRINT DATA events If no client is linked then print data will be discarded Print Write to file named Specify here the name for the file to which printer output is to be sent The 16 bit version also requires you to select the to Print to file option Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 161 Configuring the emulator If this option is left blank and you have selected File text in the Printer usage then printer output will be discarded If you do not specify an absolute pathname for this
237. mal way of connecting the printer to a TP8 mailbox and using the extension as the printer s LID The parameters are delivered from Glink to DGA using DGA specific line parameters PDA Host application mailbox for print PDX Host mailbox extension for print 112 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator If the GCOS system connects out to the printer then the print mailbox parameter is used as a mailbox name when listening for a host connection to the Local SCID For example print directed to a GCOS7 Twriter queue or TDS LID assigned as a ROP printer can be printed on your PC printer when the printer mailbox parameter is used to define the mailbox name to which GCOS7 will connect The printer mailbox parameter is delivered from Glink to DGA using the DGA specific line parameter PMN Local mailbox name for accepting connections to the printer There can be only one listening print task on the RFC1006 socket port 102 That means that a second instance of Glink on the same PC cannot have a listening print task on the standard RFC1006 socket because the socket is busy If you need to have two or more Glinks listening for printer sessions with different mailbox names then the second and subsequent Glink must create a printer task that waits for connections to a non standard RFC1006 port This is done using the G amp R Server parameter 1p local port as an additional parameter For example using a
238. mand line As with other programs on the PC one or more options may be specified on the command line to control different features of the emulator These may be specified on the command line you use when starting the emulator you can display the command line associated with a Glink icon by highlighting the icon right clicking and selecting Properties from the menu Command line options can be put in a glink file and used as a shortcut or an URL to start Glink e g http myweb com glink startup web myhost glink You can also setup default command line options in the GLINK INI GLINKDATA formerly GLINK INT file see also the T parameter below or add the GLWINOPT environment variable Refer to the Administrator s Guide for information on environment variables Command line options Here is an overview of all command line parameters Ba Specify NetBIOS LANA number default 0 C file ext Specify name of configuration file or displays list of available configurations glinkconfig Specify name of configuration directory Glink Java NET license server DNS name port 30842 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 11 Installation 12 Glink Java NET SSL license server DNS name port 30852 configuration options pr meeiememes 000000 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation RG a b c Disable predefined groups of menus 1 6 Disable Load Sav
239. mark already on the screen then the shift key will be given its normal interpretation and the current mark will be extended if this is not what you intend simply remove the mark before defining the new marked area If you prefer local mouse usage to be the normal interpretation for mouse clicks then you may set this option When its set the actions above are reversed and a normal mouse click will operate locally while a shifted mouse click will be transmitted to the host for interpretation there Norwegian ASCII This option is required when running in ASCII mode on Norwegian systems where the standard transliteration has been modified If the option is needed then typically you will see data displayed in incorrect locations on the screen A correct setup in this case will often be achieved by setting this option choosing international as your main 3270 5250 transliteration and NOR as your transliteration in the keyboard setup menu Numeric checking This option specifies what type of numeric checking should be done by the emulator when the host defines an unprotected field as being numeric There are four possible values that can be set None No numeric checking is done This is equivalent to a Typewriter keyboard selection in some emulators Strict Numeric checking is enforced and only numeric digits decimal point comma and minus sign may be entered in the unprotected field Emulator Same as above but also allows plus sig
240. me in the server name field of the communications setup menu NOTE if you are going to use the shared port from Glink on the server machine you should also use NetBIOS to access the port if you want the sharing to be done in an orderly fashion Accessing the port directly will work but will give unpredictable results if the network software also should wish to use the port G amp R SPX modem server For those running SPX IPX compatible networks with no supplied communica tions server capabilities this interface allows you to share a serial port between several machines in the network The machine with the shared serial port should run the GLNET32 program provided with the Glink software GLNET32 p c n NAME c r t nnn h C is or 2 depending on whether COMI or COM2 is to be shared NAME is the network name by which the port is to be known t is an inactivity timeout in seconds h tells the program to run as a hidden window Other parameters may be available start the program with no parameters to get the most current list GLNET32 is a standard 32 bit program and may be run on several of the machines in the network either with the same name if the ports are equivalent or with different names if you need to be able to select particular ports from the workstations You may also combine the two by running several GLNET32s with one name and several with another Two GLNET32s may be run on the same PC if both seri
241. mode if they are at least a certain size This saves having to scroll back through a number of short commands This option is used to set the minimum size of command you wish to save Non linear forms This is a special option that tells the VIP emulation mode to use fields in the order they are defined rather than in the order they appear on the screen Don t use this unless you have an application that has this particular need in that the application must be written specifically for this type of form The main use of this option is for defining forms that allow the user to tab through variable fields in an application specified order Preserve roll mode This option tells the VIP emulation that the roll mode setting should be preserved while forms are being shown on the screen A standard terminal resets roll mode when entering forms mode and will not be in roll mode when going back to text mode unless this is set specifically by the host application Setting this option will allow you to stay in roll mode when returning to text mode 136 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Space suppression If this option is set on transmission trailing spaces at the end of lines and or fields are removed In text mode each line is terminated with CRLF In forms mode each field where spaces are removed is terminated with HT Fields with no trailing spaces are terminated with US If not set all lines fields
242. mple would allow GLHOST INI GLINKDATA to be picked up from the URL and any changes would be saved and merged in from a local copy in the users GLINK directory The config file would be picked up from the URL config directory Please refer to the below Environment and internal VARIABLES parameters section for a full list of the interpreted values For automatic updates you can use the VER option VER 723 http www mydomain conyglink download glinksetup exe Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 15 Installation At each execution Glink will check if its version is less than the version in the command line Glink version 7 2 3 in this example if so it will access the web server and download and execute the new version from http www mydomain com glink download glinksetup exe at the user s request Environment and internal VARIABLES parameters 16 Glink supports several parameters that will be replaced with their actual values at runtime These parameters can be used in the Glink command line glink command file or in the Glink title bar text For example 1f Glink is installed in D Glwin and the users logon name is Peter then the command line GL EXE CD SGLINK Configs C SUSER glinkconfig would set the Glink configuration directory to D Glwin Configs and the configuration file name to Peter glinkconfig thus loading the configuration from D Glwin Configs Peter glinkconfig The Glin
243. ms needs no changes to the applications and no workstation software other than a standard browser A Glink installation on your web server is the only requirement Application server The Glink Enterprise Edition license includes GlinkAPI for NET and Java platforms GlinkAPI objects can be used from server side applications launched from JSP or ASPX The GlinkAPI object can be a session object belonging to the specific client that launched it or it can be an application object shared by all clients using the same JSP or APSX Page Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 67 Web modes 68 The GlinkAPI object is ideally suited for applications developed using a three tier architecture This architecture uses thin clients usually browsers that only do presentation The business logic of the application runs on an Application server The interface between the client and the application is a JSP or ASPX page GlinkAPI provides the new business logic with access to the core business systems running on mainframes Note that the Java version of the API is designed to give three tier architecture development capability in the cross platform Java environment It can be used with any web server that supports Servlets and also with full blown J2EE compatible application servers such as BEA s WebLogic IBM s WebSphere ObjectWeb JOnAS or JBoss Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the
244. mulator Character pacing This is similar to the other pacing options and applies to ASCII uploads The emulator will pause for the specified number of milliseconds between each character sent on the line If your host loses characters from ASCII uploads because you are sending too quickly then this is one option you may use The default value is two milliseconds the same as for the normal pacing CR and LF translation to host The various formats of file you may have on your PC may not all be compatible with what you actually want to send while uploading This applies especially to delimiters between lines which may sometimes be just a CR sometimes just a LF and sometimes both In addition the host you are using may require different combinations These two options allow you to control exactly what is sent For CR and LF characters included in the file you may specify that they should be sent as a CR an LF not sent at all or sent as a CRLF sequence When using a host that only expects a CR at the end of each line and sending a file that inclu des CRLF between each record you can set the CR option to CR pass through and the LF option to STRIP In that this is the normal situation this is the default set by the emulator Expand blank lines When doing an ASCII upload you may be sending to a system which expects that a line consisting only of a single CR marks the end of the editor input Using this option will tell the emulato
245. n this is the numeric checking that is implemented in several other emulators Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 149 Configuring the emulator Relaxed Allows all of the above also uppercase letters and shifted numerics for example and This is equivalent to a Data Entry keyboard selection in some other emulators The default setting is none i e numeric checking is not performed Preserve insert mode on transmit The standard 3270 and 5250 terminals reset insert mode when you transmit data to the host This option will tell Glink not to do this and leave the status of insert mode alone when you press transmit Suppress status line This option tells Glink not to display data in the status line other than when instructed to do so by the host machine This option may be found useful in situations where you wish to make hard copies of the screen using the PRTSCR key note however that the built in hard copy with ALt P suppresses the status line in any case Typeahead mode Typeahead is a simple implementation of flow control When typeahead is active if you press the transmit key then no more keyboard input will be processed until either the turn has been received from the host or 10 seconds have passed with nothing being received from the host at all or the host has been idle for at least 500 milliseconds for this option to function properly the host must not have response time problems
246. n and Glink will avoid these 164 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Windows GUI printing options The options below will only be used if the Windows GUI option has been selected in one of the Printer usage options in the general printer options dialog box The dialog box for the Windows options looks like this GLINK Printer properties EN x S2 Options E Windows GUI printing S Text printing Orientation Default M Print in color Print quality Normal M Color scheme defaults V 4 Show fixed fonts only Font name Font style Size Margins 2 Defa Left 0 Dots Right 0 AaBbCc XxYyZz 0123 Inch Top 0 cm Bottom 0 Vertical formatting Lines per page 0 Line spacing Auto Fill page Exactly specify below Exact spacing dot inch cm Ip pcm Horizontal formatting Characters 0 t Character spacing 9 Auto Exactly specify below Exact spacing dots nch cm q cpcm See below for descriptions of the different options Color schemes As printed colors don t always match or fit the actual colors on the screen this option allows you to select an adjusted printer color scheme for the print output To change or create printer color schemes you must use the Color adjustment dialog box in the Screen settings options Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 165 Configuring the emulator Font name If th
247. n process is completed with minimum end user intervention the download and installation is initiated by clicking a URL accepting the installation security warning and installing The installation package is packed and signed by G amp R with our digital signature to ensure integrity Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 59 Web modes Copies of Glink installed in this way are automatically updated each time the system administrator makes a new version of Glink available on the web server Glink itself checks each time it is started that it is at the same level as the Glink that is currently available on the web server and if not initiates the download and installation process for the new version Command files prepared by the administrator and resident on the web server are used to start a web controlled Glink The command files point to the associated configuration files also on the web server The system administrator builds the command and configuration files necessary for each type of mainframe connection needed by the user groups A command file can also set the script directory again resident on the web server containing all the scripts available to the Glink controlled by the command file A command file can also initiate a start up script that is executed when a user starts the Glink controlled by the command file The start up script can simply log on to the target application eliminating time consuming inter
248. n screen You find functions of the type delete char line and erase EOF EOP These cannot meaningfully be assigned to control keys on an asynchronous terminal where they are transmitted to the application which would not understand them All of these can be meaningfully assigned to control keys on a synchronous terminal to perform local editing functions on the data on the screen before transmission Function keys These are terminal keys that transmit a function key sequence For most terminals the function key sequence is fixed and so the function e g the F1 key has a specific definition Note that in the Glink VT emulation the keys F1 F4 default to the VT keys PF1 PF4 F1 to F4 are internal functions on a real VT terminal You can move these keys over to the top row of the numeric keypad NumLock etc if you prefer There is a standard Layout for DEC that you can load to do this for you If you want to change what is transmitted by function key F1 on your keyboard for one of these emulations you must define the sequence you want as a macro function See Macros and assign the macro function to the key instead of the F1 function Some terminals e g the DKU7107 have programmable Function keys In this case you will find that you can expand the function in the function tree In the case of the DKU7107 you will find three sub functions Action Function codes and Contents Action is divided into three possibilities simply check t
249. n start menu D Desktop and Glink program group No value indicates no icon is required description icon cmdline The description text is displayed by the setup program when it installs the file The icon text is optional and is the name of the icon to be created if the D or Y indicators where used Please not the enclosing brackets are required If no icon name is specified the name of the file will be used If the file is a program then optionally command line options can follow the icon name The following will install a the Glink command file to the Glink directory and create a desktop and Glink start menu icon called My Glink MyGlink glink 115 D My startup file My Glink Option installation parameters can also be added to the PACKING LST file however the GUI interface of the packaging tool will normally add these to the Glink package separately Below is a quick overview of these options 252 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes LANGUAGE Default language to used by the installation program d D e UK f F n N s SUO u USA PRODUCT productname Glink package being installed Glink Professional this productname text will be displayed by the Glink setup program when installing Glink GROUP icongroupname The Glink setup program will use this name as the program group The user will not be prompted If this option is not specified the default will be th
250. n that also uses Telephony in the same way When control of the modem is left to Telephony Glink is no longer able to set specific port parameters as you can when using the simple serial interface details like this are hidden inside the drivers However you may find that you still need to work with different setups for different hosts for example one may run with even parity and one with no parity Glink provides for this by letting you define specific named profiles for each modem and these may then be associated with the host to which you are calling or loaded dynamically 292 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces X 25 TGX Atlantis Bull TSA V8 This interface allows you to use the Atlantis Bull transport either stand alone or in a network and gives you a synchronous polled VIP line or X 25 connection to a front end Also supported are connections to Bull terminal controllers TCU TCS SVE and connections to the Atlantis Terminal Manager Please refer to the Atlantis documentation for installation and configuration of the Atlantis communication base When the Atlantis communication base is correctly configured you can start Glink with the Atlantis Bull TSA interface the X 25 address should be supplied in the X 25 address field if you are going to be using X 25 not otherwise The station address must always be specified This interface is supported for VIP7800 VIP7700 VIP7760 and
251. n to function properly the host must not have response time problems If typeahead mode is active but there is no response from the host you may clear it by pressing the break key This option only affects the initial setting for typeahead mode to change the setting interactively use the equivalent option in the toggles menu Use SISO for 7 8 bit Some Bull hosts allow you to use a special algorithm for emulation of eight bit data over a seven bit line note that Server6 on the Bull DPS6000 does not need this emulation To use the SISO algorithm turn on this option We recom mend that on newer machines that have the possibility you use an 8 bit line for greater efficiency especially for file transfers 138 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator VIP compatibility This option controls the compatibility mode in which the 7760 emulation is run If your application was written specifically for the ITT courier and or a Thomas Box then you will need to select the appropriate option in order for your application to run correctly Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 139 Configuring the emulator DKU mode setup When entering the DKU initial setup screen you should receive a menu similar to the following 9i Mode Ex Initial setup nz VIP mode setup E DKU mode setup en
252. nager 116 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator This parameter is usually specified when you connect to GCOS8 and GCOS7 systems but is not used for connections to GCOS6 and IBM systems GLHOST INI GLINKDATA files Host profiles are stored in a file GLHOST INI GLINKDATA formerly GLHOST INT residing in your Glink user directory Any changes you make will be stored back to that file when you choose Save from the setup dialog box Note that if you change any parameters for the current host and exit from the dialog box without saving then the changes will be used for the current session only For multiple users wishing to share profiles a second copy of the file may be set up in the Glink directory the same directory as the GL EXE file Any profiles found in that file will also be available in the setup dialog Modifications made to such profiles will however be stored back to the copy in the user directory and will therefore remain specific to the user making the modification Such modifications are stored by saving only those parameters that differ from the ones specified in the base copy in order that subsequent modifications in the base copy of items the user has not changed will still be picked up Users may also revert to default values as set in the Glink directory simply by blanking the fields in question and re saving the data if you need to go back to the default setup for all values i
253. nd a descriptive name that will be displayed in a dialog box listing the available groups When NETSETUP is run the user will be prompted to choose one and only one of the available groups and when this has been done only matching icons as defined by the Group directives in the icon definitions will be installed This functionality 1s optional if you don t specify a Groups section or use Group directives then the program will just install all of the defined icons unless some are optional see below 42 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation Secondly some or all of the icon definitions can include a directive Optional True Remember that once you have defined an icon with this directive then it will apply to all subsequent definitions until an Optional False directive is used If this is the case then the user will be presented with a dialog box listing the icons to be installed Those that are not optional will be presented with a pre checked and disabled option while those that are optional will be user selectable Whether these options are initially checked is determined by the OptionChecked directive and the text that is displayed next to the checkbox is taken from the OptionName directive if this is not present then the IconTitle text is used instead You can of course combine these two methods in which case the user will first see a list of available groups and then cho
254. nfigs myconfig glinkconfig ini glinkdata 186 Layouts mylayout glinklayout 1614 The first number added is the size of the file before compression and is used by the setup pragram to estimate installation size and progress Please refer to the PACKING LST section for more details Adding Glink icons to the start menu Adding Glink icons to the Glink propgram group in the start menu is done using additional syntax in the PACKING LST To add an icon for the MyGlink glink command file simply add the Y indicator to the file entry in your addon file list in the extended PACKING LST MyGlink glink 115 Y My startup file My Glink 250 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes The installation program will display My startup file when installing the file and will create a user icon called My Glink Adding Glink icons to the Desktop Adding Glink icons to the desktop is done using additional syntax in the PACKING LST file To add an icon for the MyGlink glink command file to the desktop simply add the D indicator to the file entry in your addon file list in the extended PACKING LST syntax MyGlink glink 115 D My startup file My Glink The installation program will display My startup file when installing the file and will create a user desktop icon called My Glink When D is used a icon will also be places in the Glink program group in the start menu Adding command line parameter
255. ng a direct connect line to a mini or to a mainframe then it will most likely be 9600 or 19200 bits per second Glink supports line speeds from 75 to 57600 bits per second using the standard Windows drivers but will also sup port 128000 and 256000 bit per second if you use drivers that allow this Binary session When this option is set new sessions will be opened as binary sessions rather than ASCII sessions This will possibly give strange results that will require stty commands to give acceptable screen output Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 75 Configuring the emulator Break character This option specifies which character if any is to be used as the break character when using the Excelan TelAPI service The character may be used either by pressing the key you have defined or by pressing Glink s normal ALT B break key Buffer size The communications buffer is used to hold characters coming from the comms line until the emulator is able to process them Normally you will not require a large buffer but in certain circumstances for example if you are doing a long ASCII transfer on a slow PC then you may require a buffer that is considerably larger than the standard 1024 bytes Calling address This field may be used to supply a calling address to be used in the outgoing X 25 call packet if this is required by the host Normally the calling address will be supplied by your PTT but if you are using su
256. nistrator s Guide 271 Administrator notes Restricted user environments If you are intending to prevent users from altering their Glink setup you must also be prepared to prevent them from configuring their own versions of the Glink icon in the Start menu or on the Desktop or changing the attributes of the icon that already is configured Glink is suited for Restricted user accounts in both Windows server and Windows terminal server environments Locking selected configuration options Use the configuration locking feature to lock selected setup options This feature will only be fully functional if you also prevent changes to the Glink command line as outlined in the section describing general restricted user environments On the other hand if the main mission here is to indicate to the user which options may be safely changed and which not then use of configuration locking with no additional overlying security is a convenient method of doing so Locking all configuration options Here we have two distinct scenarios one where we wish to prevent the user from making any permanent changes to the configuration so that the emulator is always started with the same options and one where we wish to prevent any change at all whether temporary or permanent One way to prevent permanent changes is quite simply to make the configuration file read only Restricted user RL command line option can be used to completely lock all configura
257. nition specifies exactly how a call should be made given a telephone number in standard format and allows you to use the same telephone directory from wherever you are using your computer Use the Change button to modify the current location or to add new locations to the list Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 105 Configuring the emulator Host configuration for Ggate and DGA Host profiles are maintained using the host configuration dialog box and stored in GLHOST INI GLINKDATA formerly GLHOST INT files The Host profile name may correspond to a Ggate coname in the DSA configuration file on the gateway system if you are connecting via G amp R Ggate If so the CoName entry may define some or all of the configuration parameters that otherwise would have to be entered in the profile including your terminal device type and associate a printer session with your terminal device In which case parameters in the profile are used to complete or override the parameters in the Coname entry DIWS DSA host configuration Host profile name Description Use check mark for interactive prompting Ggate coname X Host application mailbox x Mailbox extension x Hr Host node x Zu User ID x New Password x Project x Billing x e Host type kd Terminal mode M GRTS LID user string x Local mailbox name x Printer connect to host Printer connection name Bix Additional parameters Script afte
258. nk Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents XMT saves in scrollback cecceccesseesseesceeseeseceeseeeceseceseceaeensecseeeaeeeaes 223 Facelifting eer n a a E O ROSE heaton DENEN S Ue OYENTE BUY 224 BD BoA Co P 224 3D variable field options ERU REFER EI ERR 225 Genter frames ise RR eG RE eee 225 Center wallpapers vec tt a eee 225 Fix DKU attributes o o eee PITE NEIN 225 Frame wallpaper file i eere reet ete t veru eee 226 Keep aspect ratio frame sse 226 Keep aspect ratio wallpaper sse 226 Mr eins 45 aeta oit ntn eat ied 226 P shb ttongx a 85h esce on eate e bete aate 226 Custom pushbuttohs sires tierce ret t eee e e aet ied 227 Stretch todfit Screen sd ra nea eee eo e ee tens 228 M allBapet usas trea ete n eae ie tu tede 228 Wallpaper does not scroll sssssssseeeeenn 228 Sound Set pziau saos castitatem eter itte i ecu et ue rud 229 Filetranster set p nacida eti ree idee tears 230 General file transfer options 230 Alarm after transfer dh niei de nei tuens 231 Allow file overwrite host essere 231 Allow file overwrite local essere 231 Default ETP h St x se e eet hte det 232 Default protocol esses enne 232 Download directory sess 232 Host command t eee 232 IND FILE command input field essen 233 Save abor
259. nk c glwin demo glink Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 61 Web modes Web controlled demo The Glink Enterprise Edition includes a working demo of Glink in web controlled mode This demo illustrates the simplicity of configuration and ease of use of Glink when controlled from the web The web controlled demo is installed in the SGLINK Demo glink directory and includes on line HTML documentation that explains the configuration options available in more detail If you have installed the Enterprise edition these files are available in the following Microsoft HTML Help formats requires the Microsoft HTML Help engine HH EXE to view web controlled html quide glinkwebctrl chm You may also view them directly with a browser from SGLINKS Demo glink index html Setting up the web controlled demo 62 An administration wizard for the web controlled demo is included and takes you through the basic steps of configuring and running the working demos If Microsoft Internet Information Server is running on the same server then the wizard will also create the necessary virtual directories or alias links for the browsers to reach the demo HTML pages If you are setting up the web controlled demo to be used with Microsoft IIS then you can skip directly to the Web controlled demo admin wizard section otherwise you will need to read the descriptions below to understand how the demos work and what is required to config
260. nk menu bar When you are setting up one of the LAN interfaces you will in general need information about the network configuration Usually this will consist of some form of host address which you put into the async server name or equivalent field As an alternative to this method of specifying the host name you will usually also be allowed to configure a number of host names in the dial directory putting the network address in the field that normally is reserved for the telephone number Pointing to the relevant entry in the dial directory and pressing ENTER should then connect you to the appropriate host machine Alternate This option specifies an additional IP address as an alternative to the primary address When a connection is to be made to a Ggate server the connection will first be made to the main address however see the random connect option on page 89 If after a configurable delay the connection has not been made then a simultaneous connection will be attempted to the alternate address This may be used to provide backup connectivity in the case where one of several Ggate servers may be down and also to provide a form of load leveling Note that if no delay is configured the connect to the alternate will be done immediately after the connect to the primary address The connect that is first answered will be used 74 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator In the same way
261. normal default setting of zero milliseconds On older machines if characters are sent too close together it is possible for the host machine to lose them For such machines the recommended setting for running on a normal modem or direct connect line is two milliseconds although in general a setting of zero milliseconds will not cause trouble at speeds of up to 9600 baud For running at 19200 baud we recommend using the 2 millisecond setting and under certain circumstances usually when running non standard communications of some kind values of up to 30 milliseconds may be needed If you are losing characters that you are sending to the host you should experiment with increasing the value of this parameter Parity This may be set to 7bit even 7bit odd 8bit none 8bit even or 8bit odd Most systems nowadays will use the 8bit none setting Many older mini and mainframe systems will however require you to use 7bit even A few IBM hosts may require a setting of 7bit odd and in rare circumstances use of 8bit with parity may be required In such cases you should check whether this is actually necessary These settings cause additional overhead and can usually be avoided by configuring the host correctly Parity check Normally a parity error on the line will cause an error status to blink in the status line If you turn off this option then parity errors will simply be ignored and not reported Physical channel This specifies whi
262. normally contain the LID Logical ID The mailbox extension string can contain up to 4 characters Login to GCOSS via CXI requires that the host mode be set to CXI When you define a LID in TP8 one of the parameters is mailbox extension usually set to be equal to the LID Password Specifies the password for the host subsystem to which you are connecting and is equivalent to the PIC or PW parameter you would specify if you were connecting using the Datanet Terminal Manager This parameter is always specified when you connect to GCOS7 systems sometimes on GCOSS systems but seldom for connections to GCOS6 and IBM systems Printer connect to host This option is only needed when the host expects the printer to initiate the connection Normally the host connects to the printer It is equivalent to the dsa cfg PCN ON parameter Printer connection name Ggate only This parameter associates another CONAME to the terminal session This CONAME will be used for print The Bull mainframes often send print over an independent print session which has to be associated with a terminal session so that the print can reach the terminal s printer The printer s CONAME has to be defined in the dsa cfg file and must expand into the set of parameters needed to establish the printer session This option is equivalent to the dsa cfg PCO XXXXXX parameter Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 111 Configuring the emula
263. ns will then be set up with LS myserver mydomain com in the command line Note that this part of the installation will nomally have been done as part of the setup procedure If you want to run on a different port than the default 30845 you could use gllservice stop uninstall gllservice install start port 30875 Client applications will then be set up with LS myserver mydomain com 30875 in the command line Setting up a system with the main server on myserver mydomain com and backup servers on myback1 mydomain com and myback2 mydomain com could be done using On myserver mydomain com gllservice stop uninstall 36 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation gllservice install start alt mybackl mydomain com myback2 mydomain com On myback1 mydomain com and myback2 mydomain com gllservice install start backup name myserver mydomain com License monitor Monitoring license requests A separate program gllserve is supplied to provide a visible monitor of licensing activity When the program is started it will contact the licensing service and extract statistics showing current server status The following details are shown in the statistics screen Server name Server port Max sessions allowed Active sessions Active sessions backup Max active sessions Requests so far Successful requests Failed requests Timeouts Max simul connect Current connect C
264. ntrolled demo works sse 63 Web controlled demo administration wizard esee 64 GlinkWeb Glink in a browser eese 66 HTML onthel y Re eter t RR Re eter peste ies tere 66 GlinkWeb facelif ng i sistere e e e E USE 67 Application servers cs sanete enu aee o rua te bend 67 Configuring the emulator eeeeeeeeeee ceres ee eren eee neseensse OD Configuration locking 5 e oe eee E Pe RR RO e E Pe ee as 71 HinPru TE 73 Communications interface eee re Oe e erba ete Re eU Eee EH eee 73 Communications OPtiONS siisi sessioni konon oeii EEEE EKE EE E EEE 74 Pizarro HR 74 ASCII session line delimiter esee 75 SVIGCSeEVOEA 1 Deseo HAS Eee pte Ye UH BER ete x t pde ERE ee Pe E ENT ee EARS 75 Baud Tale 3 eese tentes tette tiit ii tei ina Ei E DETTO LARES 75 Biriaty SesslOllz ii doe Eb PON De ieri OU IS d 75 Br ak charactet ee ee DNI rl tes 76 B tfer S765 03 a we te SER tS 76 Calling address metre de PU RR a eoe e ARRIERE 76 Card umber 4 ea eei HE I UNES B 76 Channel PER 76 C l ster UIDs nont tate ate ken asthe ae e aster cuit teers es TT COMMS Port unice ey Save eae ENaC EA Sow GTB E GR Ys TT Delay Q T IDGAPrOtOCO Ieee ipee IIIS TT DGA Local SCID 2 ier Ee IDE TT DGA Local DSA200 address eese eene 78 DGA Remote DSA200 address sse 78 DGA Connection
265. ocedure GLHLP CNT Help file table of contents GLHLP HLP Help file STD glinkconfig Default configuration settings optional DEF glinkconfig Current configuration settings GLINK PHO Dial directory GLINK TLB Glink type library for OLE automation GLINKAPI CHM Glink GlinkApi COM component HTMLhelp file xxx glinkxlit Keyboard screen transliteration files xxx glinklayout Function key layout files in LAYOUTS GLCOLS INI GLINKDATA Initialization file for color schemes NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA Network setup dummy init file Some of these are not actually delivered with the emulator so when you start up the first time the default values will be used The DEF glinkconfig file is maintained using the Settings menus and the GLINK PHO file with the dial directory directly from the emulator The xxx glinkxlit and xxx glinklayout files are also maintained directly from the emulator GLCOLS INI GLINKDATA file The initialization file for color schemes GLCOLS INI GLINKDATA formerly GLCOLS INI may reside in either the Glink directory or the Glink user directory or both If both exist then schemes in the Glink user copy will override those in the Glink copy 258 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes The file may contain three sections a default section a screen section and a printer section Schemes in the default section will be available both for the screen and th
266. oding This option tells Glink to use UTF 8 Unicode transformation format encoding for communication with the host machine UTF 8 is a variable length character encoding for Unicode used as a default on some open systems such as Linux Glink will convert received data to the currently configured character set The default is the character set you have configured for Windows but this can be changed for internal use in Glink using the character set option in Screen properties gt Fonts gt character set UTF 8 is only required when characters outside the base ASCII 0x00 0x7F character set are to be used The option is suitable for hosts that use an extended character set but keep within a given 8 bit character set such as the ISO8859 series If the host system uses Unicode and characters from outside a given 8 bit set then you need the option for full Unicode support Emulator properties gt Transliteration gt Full Unicode UTF 8 support If you are running on Linux you can check whether or not you are set upfor UTF 8 by examining the LANG or LC environment variables with set or env en US UTF 8 is a typical default that specifies UTF 8 It may also be necessary to define an appropriate terminal type response for telnet typically vt ut f8 Setting UTF 8 encoding will set 8 bit host mode automatically 154 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator General setup To view
267. of fields in the form Note that if you are having trouble with fields that are not right justifying correctly this may be due to use of a DKU emulation that is not emulating the real terminal correctly Try applying the script command CFIX 2562 1 in these cases Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 143 Configuring the emulator Roll mode This specifies whether the emulator should initialize itself in roll mode when DKU7107 is active scrolling the screen when receiving data past the end of the screen For some applications use of this option may cause screen images to be corrupted it s for this reason that DKU7107 mode has its own setting for this mode SDP attributes SDP attribute rendition normally set by the host 1f needed In this mode attributes do not take space on the screen and they are character rather than field oriented Show in blink blank Specifies whether the caret and tilde characters should be shown on screen when using them to indicate blink blank screen attributes Suppress status line This option tells Glink not to display data in the status line other than when instructed to do so by the host machine This option may be found useful in situations where you wish to make hard copies of the screen using the PRTSCR key note however that the built in hard copy with ALT P suppresses the status line in any case TCS enable This option specifies whether or not TCS should
268. of presentation should be used for the session This parameter will also force Glink to switch to the equivalent emulation mode at connect time The following terminal types are accepted as valid terminal types DKU7001 DKU7002 These are asynchronous terminals duplicating the functionality of the early VIP7001 series In Glink they will run in async VIP7800 mode which is a superset of the VIP7001 DKU7005 DKU7007 DKU7105 DKU7107 These are synchronous Questar terminals running in text or forms mode DKU7007D DKU7107D DKU7211D These models use the D suffix to indicate local forms capability They are otherwise the same as the models without the suffix DKU7211 This is the color version of the synchronous Questar terminal running in text or forms mode 114 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator DKU9107 This is the synchronous Questar terminal running in eight bit mode rather than using SS2 encoding to send extended ASCII characters It provides native eight bit EBCDIC connectivity using the PLW Pluri Lingual West character set to GCOS7 Diane systems HDS7 TWS2255V The HDS7 is a 72 line 8 bit ASCII terminal in the VIP7800 family running in text and forms mode Note that you must use the R72 command line parameter to enable the 72 line capability in Glink The TWS2255V model is the Questar emulation of the same terminal HDS5 TWS2255 The HDS5 is an asynchronous 8 bit ASCII
269. oft IIS servers As this page is the default page a user need only type in the following to enter the demo http www myhost com glink The basic scenario for a user would be for first time access only to click and open the self installing package and then to click one of the available Glink connection links From then on any Glink configuration file changes or Glink updates are managed by the glink files on the web server with no intervention required from the user If Glink 7 2 or later is already installed on the workstation then there 1s no requirement to download and open the self installing package Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 63 Web modes The Glink configuration files are located in the directory c glwin demo glink config The web demo admin wizard creates glink files corresponding to each Glink configuration file in the config directory c glwin demo glink startup web These glink files have the following format VER 721 http www myhost com glink download glinksetup exe LS gllserver myhost com CD http www myhost com glink config U SGLINKS O http www myhost com glink script C dku7107 to tp8test glinkconfig S tp8test connect scrgl RL RG 1 RG 2 RM M44 If the VER command line option is added to the command line file then at each execution Glink will check if its version is less than the version in the command line file 721 in this example If Glink is a
270. oice of which printer you wish to use The printer chosen will then be used for the rest of that session unless you choose another manually Redirect to file If this option is checked then print output will be sent to a file rather than to the printer It will also allow you to set a file name for the printer output The actual writing to the file is done by the Windows printer drivers and will therefore contain all the printer specific information e g PostScript or HP formats Selected printer If you have defined more than one printer in your Windows setup then this option will allow you to select which of these to use for print output from Glink 160 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Setup This button allows you to access the standard Windows setup menus for the printer you have selected Printer usage These options tell Glink which printing options to use When using the Windows GUI option then Glink formats the data internally and sends it to the Windows printer as a document The Windows GUI printing options will be used to format the print providing you with a variety of options for producing high quality printed output If any of the other options are selected then the Text printing options are used In this case Glink sends the print data directly to the printer with no formatting and only applying the Text printing options This may be needed if the data coming fro
271. ollowing options GLINK File transfer properties Ss General 3 Text v Kermit File options Add Ctrl Z at end of file 4 Ctrl Z means end of file Disable filename translate 7 Expand tabs Tabsize 8 Host options 4 Enable DPS8 compression E Non standard FTRAN E Override host packet size E Host quoting needed Quote character Add Control Z at end of file Protocol options Character pacing Packet timeout Maximum retries Maximum window size E Allow long packets Maximum packet size 800 Packet header character Eight bit quote Default ON 20 15 AA OFF If this option is enabled Kermit will add a Control Z character to the end of any text files received This may be required by some local software packages The best rule here is to leave the option off unless your local software package complains about a missing end of file character in which case you will have to turn the option on 238 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Allow long packets The Kermit included with the emulator supports long packets using the standard defined in the documentation of Kermit from Columbia University However to enable their usage this option must be turned on if you have a communications line that may be unreliable then you will probably not want to turn the option on Users with direct connect lines to a system using a K
272. on to separate it from the rest of the address In the case of IPv6 addresses you might also need to enclose the address itself in square brackets to avoid ambiguity For example to connect to port 1311 on the hosts above you would specify an address in the form Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 83 Configuring the emulator 129 7211 502134 e80 3343 3dc9 5b1 edbd 1314 f ec0O 1 249 1314 You may configure multiple host names separated by commas Glink will then connect to these hosts in sequence until a successful connection has been made For the Windows Sockets interface you may specify the IP address as a single asterisk This tells Glink to wait for an incoming call In almost all cases you will wish to run this with raw TCP IP set as your protocol and with a specific port number for the connecting application to use for example specifying the address as 1311 NOTE on Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 The current version of the Internet protocol IPv4 uses 32 bit addressing and thus allows for 4 294 967 296 unique addresses As early as 1991 it became apparent that this would not accommodate the phenomenal increase in numbers and types of devices that would require Internet addresses This led to the definition of a new protocol IPv6 that uses 128 bit addressing and which will enable significant improvements in areas such as security options and routing algorithms in addition to va
273. on for this will look something like this ATD 52 20 X C280 0 9600 7801 ASP 52 20 X C280 DEVICE ATD02 52 20 X C280 ATD02 255 CRT DEVICE ATD02 52 20 X C280 PRT02 255 ROP On HVS machines you may configure the PC and its printer with the buffered printer adapter option for good measure we ll also configure this one for 8 bits no parity and so on ATD 52 20 X 0880 0 9600 8800 0 NONE FD 8 NONE BPA DEVICE ATD02 52 20 X 0880 ATD02 255 B DEVICE ATD02 52 20 X 0880 PRT02 255 N ROP Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 269 Administrator notes Technical specifications Windows versions supported Win95 98 ME Windows NT versions 4 0 Win2000 XP Win2003 supported Hardware supported Any Windows platform Serial ports supported Any port supported by Windows TCP IP supported Windows sockets TCP IP protocols supported Raw telnet rlogin TNVIP TN3270 E TN5250 G amp R DSA DIWS Gateway G amp R DGA Direct GCOS Access Other comms interfaces Atlantis Bull Atlantis X 25 Cirel X 25 Cirel Bull Eicon ECLAN X 25 Eicon Bull TGX NetBIOS raw or to modem server more Video adapters supported Any adapter supported by Windows File transfer protocols FTP ASCII text transfer Kermit Xmodem Ymodem Ymodem batch Ymodem G Modem 7 Telink FTRA for GCOS7 GCOSS CompuServe B Zmodem IND FILE UFT DGA only Built in Kermit supports 1 or 3
274. only clears the screen occasionally it can be helpful to have this done in an automatic fashion An alternative solution is to enable the other save option where the screen is saved every time you press the transmit key Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 221 Configuring the emulator Cursor Type The cursor indicates the current screen position for the emulator as opposed to the mouse cursor which operates independently This option is used to choose one of the three available cursor types a blinking line cursor a blinking block cursor or a steady block cursor Disable clock display This option allows you to turn off the clock in the status line Include spaces in rectangles This option tells Glink not to strip trailing spaces when copying marked rectangles to the clipboard This option may be useful for pasting as blocks to other applications Inverted screen Use of this option will give a screen with dark letters on a light background instead of the usual light letters on a dark background Keep screen on setup This option will allow you to preserve your screen picture when you return from the setup configuration menus Normally the emulator resets when you have been in the setup menus to ensure that everything is included from the new setup Most of the time this is not necessary setting the option on will ensure your screen image comes back undisturbed However if you have changed anything
275. ons or let you use the built in Windows GUI Graphical User Interface printer functionality The 16 bit version of Glink allows you to send print output directly to the printer via the Windows spooler or directly to a local LPT port Both versions also allow you to send print output directly to a file When you choose the Settings Printer option from the Glink menu bar you will see the general Printer options screen There are separate dialog boxes for Windows GUI printing or Text printing Which options will be used depends on the Printer usage selection you make Printer Options The dialog box for printer options looks like this GLINK Printer properties r9 Options f E Windows GUI printing FS Text printing Windows printer Selected printer Microsoft XPS Document Writer on XPSPort z Printer selection Redirect to file fill below Current Z Setup Printer usage Host printing Windows GUI Zij Local printing Windows GUD ui Text to file Write to file named Timeouts E Always time out for host print Timeout seconds Always time out for local print 10 Host print data options E Remove printed DEL NULs T Print log all linewrap Disable national translation Suppress blank pages Interpret SDP accented chars Z Use 0x19 as SS2 Use Esc E as SS2 Combine double escapes L a Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 159 Configuring
276. ontents 54 The following files are delivered with the standard release your supplier may have included additional files but the files listed here should always be present FILES TXT 1 EXE LFONTS FON LFONTG FON FONTL FON GLINKXLIT ETSETUP EXE ETSETUP INI xa Gagoc ZZ HHLP HLP Q Z th pt UO LINKAPI CHM LINKFTP EXE LINKFTP HLP AMAAAAADAARAAARAAAD Q NET32 EXE LICENSE TXT UVTI32 DLL UVTI32 LIB UVTI32VC LIB UVTI H UVTI HLP UVTIDB32 DLL UVTILIB PAS GLUVTI INI Q List of files in this release Main program Glink special screen fonts Glink special Greek fonts Glink special Latin 2 fonts National keyboard transliteration Network setup utility GLINKDATA Network setup directives Online help file German Language texts English UK Language texts French Language texts Norwegian Language texts Finnish Language texts English US Language texts E Uninstall program Uninstall Glink Type Library definitions GlinkApi COM Delphi definitions GlinkApi COM VBScript definitions GlinkApi COM JScript definitions GlinkApi COM Help file GlinkFTP ftp client program GlinkFTP help file COLS INI GLINKDATA Prepackaged color schemes Modem sharing utility for NetBIOS TCP SPX Glink license information UVTI dynamic link library Stub link library for UVTI
277. ook commands sse 200 Alternate options cene He ie et eid 201 Abbreviations x eee t DH e ER TREO e Pesca 201 Smart modem configuration eene 201 Dumb modem configuration essere 203 NIMIUM 204 Screen colors eet tee eere nice da 204 VIP attribute mapping recen hee ener ie ders 205 ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping sse 207 Color adjustments cere tenere te Reda 208 Window attributes nee eee n dere te ie Ra 209 Dialog bOX S1z6 as tiet atit au ine hae 210 Horizontal positiOn 44 re e RED PER REUS 210 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide xi Contents Initial screen length n eee rr e RE Eee 211 Initial Scteenwid th 2 x irre CIR eases cts nee 211 Minimize toittay iere oe ee Scene 211 Pop p di ls eet E RO ee Se ae 211 Save bar POsitiOns i o etr Pe OE ER SERRE T eee 211 Tatleincludes host name tess orte Ie te ERN erae 212 Wndockable bars rete t ie 212 Update threshold characters ccscesssessseeseeeeeeeeceeeceeceseesseeneeeeeenes 212 Update threshold lines 212 Use caption bats sessi teet ee e Pe ie Rl 213 Use Function bat iier ee eee ve i hg 213 Use Keyboard Bat vcd istis e ente iie 213 Use Menu bat bati ete n dee e Eee ces 213 Wse Status bari end dosi eter eet eee e te n 213 Use Toolb at eet aide tite ertet eee pese hg 214 Use toolbar tips vi o sie eerte eee tte bg 2
278. or s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation where START SCRGL is the name of the script file to execute You may also use the O parameter to specify a script directory that will be searched whenever a script cannot be found in the current directory An alternate dial directory may be specified with the P command line parameter More than one option may be specified in the same command line and the order in which they are specified makes no difference unless you specify the same option twice with different arguments in which case the last value specified will be used For example GL S GCOS 8 scrgl C CN1 Options using arguments requiring embedded spaces may use single apostrophes or quotes to mark the beginning and end of the argument If the argument Itself requires arguments for example the S option might need script parameters to be entered this way GL EXE S Connect to Host scrgl parl par2 par3 Then use single apostrophes inside the quotes for this purpose The command line also interprets environment variables using the standard VARIABLE syntax As different Windows platforms and networks use different environment variables for the users logon name Glink accepts SUSERS and SUSERNAMES in the same way as the NETSETUP program does e g GL U H USER MYFILES OU TEMP Glink accepts GLINK for the GLINK directory e g GL CD http myhost com glink config U GLINK C myconfig The above exa
279. orkstation or Host Links platform giving the user full DSA functionality for all GCOS connection modes including DAC DACQ and CXI for GCOS8 and the standard GCOS7 mode with all DSA parameter settings user password billing etc Additionally DGA makes Bull UFT available to Glink as an extra file transfer protocol and supports a separate print session When using the G amp R DGA interface connections are made over a TCP IP network using the Internet standard RFC1006 transport protocol to replace OSI transport RFC1006 can be installed in the FCP7 and FCP8 cards to support DSA connections direct to the mainframes without passing through a front end The GNSP of newer GCOSS systems and the Open System personality of GCOS7 Diane systems both support RFC1006 connections direct into the mainframe G amp R Ggate DIWS From the Glink client connection using G amp R Ggate DIWS is identical to using G amp R Ggate DSA Using Ggate in DSA protocol mode is the preferred way to connect to the Bull systems but the DIWS protocol mode can still be used if you have historical reasons to do so Ggate DIWS implements DSA presentation over OSI session interfacing to the OSI transport stack according to the Bull DSA ISO workstation specification There are no known technical reasons for using Ggate DIWS in new G amp R Host Links installations 286 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces G amp R Ggate DSA
280. ose optional components from the group selected If a group without optional components is selected then instal lation will simply skip this step The example provided here may help you see how you can make use of the functionality at your site Directives The following directives may be used in the NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA file NOTE You may pick up the contents of any environment variable in these definitions using the syntax name For example if there is a de fined environment variable USER you could specify oe UserDirectory K GLWIN SUSER AddToDesktop Use this directive to specify whether a shortcut should be placed in the desktop or not default is not to For example AddToDesktop Yes Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 43 Installation CommandParameters Use this directive to specify any additional command line parameters you need over and above the U O and OU parameters that are inserted as the result of other directives For example CommandParameters R 72 L N CommonGroup Use this directive to specify whether the group referenced should be a common group available to all users of the machine or a user group available only to the user running NETSETUP The default is to use a user group For example CommonGroup Yes CreateGroup This specifies the name of the group to be created and will appear in the title window of the group Th
281. ot transparent for example you cannot use the option on a path using XON XOFF flow control 234 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Text file transfer options The Text file transfer dialog box provides the following options GLINK File transfer properties v am al General a Text 48 Kermit 7 Expand blank lines E Paste as block F Text files in OEM charset Paste Upload line wrapping CR translation to host Insert new line on column Wrap after last word Strip 9 CR LF CRLF Pacing LF translation to host Wait for character Q Strip CR LF CRLF Capture delimiter from host Character pacing msec 0 x CR 9 LF Both Line pacing tenths O Capture delimiter from host This option decides how CR and LF characters should be treated when capturing or logging to print When set to CR or LF then a new line will be started when that character is received and the other will be ignored When set to CRLF CR and LF characters will be passed transparently to the capture file or printer Normally this option should be set to LF but for certain special applications you may need to change the option to get correct output on the capture file This option is not acted upon in VT102 220 mode which supports data capture compatibly with the built in print functionality on the actual terminals Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 235 Configuring the e
282. ovided for this in the gllserve monitor program You may of course also stop and start the service in the usual way from the control panel The license service may also be stopped and started directly from the command line using the gllservice commands gllservice stop gllservice start Manually installing uninstalling The license service may be installed and uninstalled directly from the command line using the gllservice commands gllservice install gllservice uninstall Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 39 Installation Note that most cases you will want to start the service as well as install it also you will be providing any necessary parameters at installation time So a more typical installation command would be gllservice install start alt mybackup mydomain com In the same way you will normally need to stop the service in order to fully uninstall it from the system gllservice stop uninstall Changing the port number As usual to change the startup parameters you must first stop and uninstall the service and then reinstall with the new parameters So to change the port number being used by the licensing service you could use something like gllservice stop uninstall gllservice install start port 30875 If you change the port numbver this way then you must ensure that client applications are aware of the change This is done in the LS command line parameter on the client
283. ow that appears if you are installing from a CD drive then replace A in the example with the drive letter from which you are installing e If the File Manager or Windows Explorer is active double click the icon for the diskette CD drive from which you are installing and then double click the SETUP EXE file in the display of files on the release diskette Once the installation program is running it will display an initial window asking for confirmation that you intend to install the software You may interrupt the installation either here or at any later point in the process by pressing the CANCEL button in the dialog boxes that are displayed If the installation diskettes or CD contains a generic version of Glink then Glink will display a dialog box allowing you to enter the serial number information If you do not have the necessary information please contact your distributor See the following section for more details 4 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation The first item of information you will be asked to provide is the name of the directory on which the software is to be installed An initial suggestion will be made normally GLWIN on the same drive as your Windows installation but you may override this by typing any valid directory name over the suggestion If the directory does not exist you will be asked for confirmation that it s OK to create it If the directory already exists
284. p Robertson Configuring the emulator Use notifications The communications interface can either be polled for input the program uses idle time to ask the interface whether there is any input or can be set up to warn the program whenever new input is available If this option is checked then the latter method will be used This will also give an apparent decrease in use of system resources while the emulator is running if you at the same time check the message based mode of operation in the general setup menu Be aware that some communications interfaces have problems with this mode of operation and if you are experiencing problems you should not check this option The option does not take effect until the next time the communications interface is restarted Use PuTTY SSHD If this option is enabled your connection is secured using the Secure Shell protocol If you enable it you can use the Configure button to reach the configuration dialog box and configure the SSH Daemon system address and your name and password on the SSHD system If you do not configure it the SSHD system will be assumed to be the same as the target system you have specified in the IP address Even though your chosen TCP IP protocol Ggate TNVIP TN3270 TN5250 Telnet Rlogin is insecure your connection will be made secure by tunneling thru a command line SSH channel to the SSHD server system and then port forwarding to the target service You
285. play the present call timer in other words the elapsed time from your last connect using the dial directory Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 195 Configuring the emulator Comments on call log If you turn this option on then you will be asked for a comment that will be added to the telephone log every time you log out from the system you were logged into If you don t want to add a comment then just press ENTER when asked Constant speed modem When you use the dial function the program will change the speed on the com munications port to whatever speed is reported by your modem If you wish to run your modem at constant speed in other words use speed conversion between the PC and the modem this option will tell the program not to switch the speed on the line Dial directory locking This option when turned on will tell the dial directory to ask for your password every time you use the dial directory and not just the first time you use it If the password has been disabled or you have just not specified a password this option will of course have no effect Password disable This option may be used to disable any password you may have set in your dial directory This should only be used if you do not remember your password as disabling the password will mean that you will lose any passwords you may have set for your host machines in the dial directory this is for your own protection You may s
286. plication or terminfo setup The synchronous terminals deliver the command sequence to the emulation They only transmit if the transmit function is assigned to the key It is therefore meaningful to assign Editing functions such as Clear Insert Delete character Insert Delete line Erase EOF Erase EOP to control keys in order to facilitate local editing of the screen before transmission Keyboard pane Keyboard Esc F2 F3 Fa F5 Fe F7 FB Fo Fio Fi1 Fi2 Pt Scr pause NK clk Sik Sern Lock spee fe fe te fads fc p f f mE Ins Home Page Dos e 1 2 3 4 s 5 6 7 8 9 1009 y Up iS Qa w e frit v u fi o p ja A Del End Page 7 8 j9 Down Home PgUp Capstock A s D F G H J k e SA 520 1 a z x c v B N M f 1 1 2 lt ul End 1 PgDn RI Ctr Alt AltGr ctrl Y l Ins Del gl Selected key Bi Mapped key Reserved key J Unmapped key The primary function of the Keyboard pane is to act as a drop zone for functions dragged from the function tree in the Functions pane See examples Drag and drop a function to a key Drag and drop a function to a key combination 180 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator The keys are color coded so that you can see whic
287. ption allows you to configure memory for the scrollback buffer Every time a line scrolls off the top of the screen Glink will save it in this buffer unless the option is disabled this is done by setting the number of pages to zero You can inspect the contents of the buffer at any time by using the scroll back key CTRL PcUP and scroll it up and down by using the PcUp PcDn and arrow keys Esc will exit Note that each extra page of scrollback you configure will cost you 4K bytes extra memory Use Rectangular marks This option specifies the initial setting for the Mark rectangles option in the edit menu Word delimiters This option allows you to specify additional characters that should be considered as delimiters when words are marked on screen by double clicking them with the mouse space is always considered to be a delimiter in any case Setting characters with this option will also affect the behaviour of the script GETWORD command but scripts may use the SET DELIMITERS command and SDELIMITERS variable to make their own modifications to this XMT saves in scrollback This option tells the emulator to save the screen every time the transmit key is pressed This may be useful in cases where the host just sends modifications to the current screen rather than clearing the screen and sending a new form In general you should enable only one of these scrollback save options although in special
288. r Product Glink Professional edition 7 2 0 Type Commercial copy Distributor My Glink distributor US Serial key 6B351CA6 Customer My Company Inc Arizona Serial Customer ref 243 License ref 8799 Limit users 250 Expiry yymmdd 6 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation This information is entered into the dialog box GLINK Glink serial number information Y E abc Text version V Detail version Support information If you do not have the information required please contact your Glink distributor License information Product Glink Professional Edition 8 1 0 Type Commercial copy Distributor A Glink Distributor US Serial key 538E93DC Customer A Company Inc Arizona Serial Customer ref 243 License ref 8799 Limit users 25 25 DGA Expiry yymmdd Hardware ID I 4JJx 2iofPGM8FY All the information entered must correspond exactly to the information provided by the distributor If any field is incorrect then the following error message will be displayed Invalid serial key information please contact your distributor The Serial key is an 8 plus 3 character field The first part is a validation key The following part is the Glink version number and cannot be modified in the above example this is 610 The Serial number information is valid for the given version of Glink only The Serial number is a 6 plus 12 character reference number
289. r amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Display bar now If your layout does not put the buttons on screen during startup you can do it with this check box for test purposes while you are building the configuration Add button This button adds a new button to the bar New buttons are always added at the end of the bar Note that if there is no function selected in the function tree then the new button is created but has no function assigned to it and you must drag and drop a function afterwards If a function is selected when you create the button then that pre selected function is assigned to the newly created button Remove button This button is enabled if you select any button in the list and will remove that button if clicked Menu setup Keyboard mappings E Function bar A Keyboard bar Menu setup FE amp File EF amp Edit amp Settings Setup menu Addmm dein Add item E amp Transfers E amp Help Add separator add menu ae add item add separator Default menu The scrolling list This shows the current configuration of the Glink menu line as a tree Each menu entry defined is listed and if it is defined as a menu rather than assigned to a function the tree branch is indicated and can be clicked to expand the tree The shortcut for each entry is indicated by an ampersand in the name e g the File entry has the name amp File
290. r 155 Compress context SAVES earann iena aae AE EEE AERA EEE TS 155 Confirm exit program eie teint iii 156 Continuous reminders a ient rt tie dene i 156 Disable remote commands sse 156 Disconnect actions om enne d oet bed 156 Glink title bar text cce tee eere de iie 156 Message based mode sse nenne 157 Short screen dump see tte ett e Ree eerie de 157 Silent Modenese RH e aree ee t DO ect eg 157 Start in dial directoty secs eee dede 157 Startup script 14 ducet eter eee ei eee 158 Suppress error messages cc eeeeceesceceseeesseceeeeecaeceeeeecaeceeeeecaeceeeeessaeceeeeees 158 Suppress welcome window sess 158 Printer Setup xmas eR UR Eee n NUI ete 159 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide ix Contents Printer Opt ons iiss cet Go sete SE ER IR RIEN RS Wiidows Pfintet uiii raii piian E EEEE S Printer usaige Or RE eA Hostprint data optioris cnet tette tte tee tI ene een Windows GUI printing options Color Schemes uet etre eere ro SRI PARERE Recettes Font aime M i fuir ER t Ont Style cscs aoo nete iei tete nei a e egest Formatting horizontal ssssseeeeeeeeeeeeennnen nennen Formatting Vertical soceri eee ftue viet UC GUC E Orientation oo pot donde eet eate eb o sus Print incolora seh eh deer on ano et ce mt Dat s Print qu lity oet diete dba t te iet Show fixed fonts only 4 nie etie ee
291. r a version of the license server with a full set of symbolic debugging information can be made available upon special request For more information and instructions on how to use and debug with this version you should contact your local distributor Network setup NETSETUP This utility may be started by a user by running NETSETUP with Program Manager File Run or by double clicking the program from the File Manager in the usual way It will create a group in Program Manager with one or more Glink icons in the group If the group exists already then the icons defined will be added to the existing group Control of the utility is through the NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA formerly NETSETUP INI file which should reside in the same directory as the NETSETUP EXE program this will usually also be the same directory as GL EXE An Admin section at the start of the file contains information about whether the file contents are valid or not and information about the software distributor This is followed by an optional Groups section that contains the names of various predefined groups of icons the user may wish to install Each possible icon will then have its own section Installn where n starts at one and increases by 1 for each icon to be installed This gives you a general file structure that looks like this Admin Signoff TRUE DistName Gallagher amp Robertson A S Dis
292. r connect Browse Additional parameters Additional parameters that apply to the DIWS or DSA line handler may be specified here See the Host Links Ggate and Gline documentation for more details 106 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Billing Specifies the billing for the host subsystem to which you are connecting and is equivalent to the BA parameter you would specify if you were connecting via the Datanet Terminal manager This parameter is most often used when connecting to GCOS7 systems Delete Deletes this profile from the copy of GLHOST INI GLINKDATA on your user directory Note that if a profile of the same name exists on the copy of GLHOST INI GLINKDATA on the Glink directory deleting the entry will have the effect of reinstating that profile Description Here you may enter a descriptive text for the system you are configuring This text will be used as the host name for this system if you leave it blank then the host name will be set to the connection name Ggate coname Ggate only This option of choosing a Ggate coname allows you to move some of the configuration from Glink to the Ggate system The Ggate coname corresponds with CONAME as described in the dsa cfg section of the G amp R Gline manual Unless it is suppressed coi OFF Ggate will send the Glink client a list of available CONAMES to populate the drop down list and when one is selected it
293. r nam port server port Some examples are provided for common administrative tasks install This is used to install the licensing service Any additional parameters that are supplied on the command line will be used every time the service is subsequently started To change the startup parameters you must first stop and uninstall the service and then reinstall with this option and the new parameters For example if you wished to change the port number being used for the service you could use gllservice stop uninstall gllservice install start port 30875 start This is used to start the licensing service Command line parameters that are to be used for the service should not be supplied at this time they should be specified in the command line used to install the service Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 33 Installation stop This is used to stop the licensing service You may also choose to uninstall the service with the same command gllservice stop uninstall uninstall This is used to uninstall the licensing service If the service is running at the time the command is used then it will not actually be uninstalled until the next time the service is stopped alt This is used to specify a list of backup license servers that will be allowed to take over for the main license server if for some reason it s not available Any number of addresses may be supplied separated by commas
294. r own parameters to the command line For example we want to specify a possible 72 line screen and a startup script We would then adda CommandParameters directive Admin Signoff TRU Gl Installl IconTitle DPS8 NetScriptDirectory K GLWIN SCRIPTS UserDirectory H GLWIN UserScriptDirectory H GLWINNSCRIPTS CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR STARTUP SCR would of course refer to a script residing in the common net work script directory Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 51 Installation 52 Now let s take one further step and install three different icons starting from three different configuration files that have been placed in C1 glinkconfig C2 glinkconfig and C3 glinkconfig on the directory K NGLWINNUSER These icons will replace icons with the same titles if they already exist Admin Signoff TRUE Installl IconTitle DPS8 Replacelcons Yes NetScriptDirectory K GLWIN SCRIPTS UserDirectory H GLWIN UserDirectoryFrom K GLWIN USER UserScriptDirectory H GLWIN SCRIPTS CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR C Cl Install2 IconTitle DPS7 CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR C C2 Install3 IconTitle DPS6 CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR C C3 Note that we only need to supply the directives that differ from those used in the previous install section Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation As a final step let
295. r set and have used Bull printer terminal mode PRT722X A2 PRT1220 or DKU7107 attached printer to enable it then 8bit accented characters are encoded as SS2 Single Shift Two sequences of 7bit characters for transmission Glink must decode these sequences to single 8bit characters before they are sent to the printer 162 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator There are two alternative SS2 encodings Esc E and 0x19 The one used depends on how the printer is configured in the mainframe but in most cases you can simply enable both options There are specific cases where this doesn t work for example if the application sends transparent text print containing PCL Print Control Language to the printer Print Control Language uses Esc E as a control sequence print reset and it must arrive at the printer unchanged For these applications you must configure the printer in the mainframe to use 0x19 and you would only check the Glink box for 0x19 as SS2 There are also print applications bar code printers that use only Esc E for SS2 and expect 0x19 to be delivered to the printer There are some non standard print applications that use Esc E as SS2 but need to send a real Esc E command through to the printer Glink provides a workaround for this where you may send the command as Esc Esc E If you check Combine double escapes the two escapes will be combined and result in a single E
296. r that any such empty lines in the file to be uploaded should be expanded into a single space If the option is not turned on then the contents of the file will be sent exactly as found in the file Line pacing Yet another way of controlling the rate at which data is sent is by using line pacing In this case the emulator will pause for the specified length of time after each LINE it sends to the host Note that 1f you specify a handshake character then any line pacing you have specified will be disabled Paste as block This option tells Glink to paste clipboard data as a block so that each new line starts at the column below the original cursor position rather than at the beginning of the next line If the option is not set you can still paste data as a block from the context menus in Glink s main and scrollback windows 236 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Pasting data as a block can only be used if the emulation mode allows cursor positioning locally generally this will only be TEXT mode or FORMS mode in unprotected fields Paste Upload line wrapping These options allow you to control line wrapping when Glink pastes or uploads text This is useful when uploading texts from such programs as word processors which treat paragraphs as one single long line of data These options may be necessary when uploading to host editors which expect line wrapping The following options ar
297. r this in the dialog box Initial setup The following selections are available on the Enulation Initial setup screen GLINK Emulator properties fax GLINK E I le oO Mode nitial setup VIP mode setup piu DKU mode setup en IBM 3270 5250 setup 45 Transliteration Es H Auto linefeed in T Echoplex 7 Auto linefeed out Destructive backspace _ ANSI use high intensity E Erase with default bkgd _ ANSI BBS compatibility No column 81 App keys when NumLock off V Left click moves cursor V Allow lowercase to host ANSI answerback onc Note that these options only apply to the state of the emulator when it is started up and have no effect on the current setting of the respective options these are available under Settings Toggles Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 129 Configuring the emulator Allow lowercase to host When this option is set lower case data from the keyboard will be sent to the host as is If the option is unchecked then any lower case data will be converted to upper case before being sent to the host ANSI Answerback This option allows you to configure an answerback string to be used in ANSI mode when the host machine sends an ENQuiry character to the emulator In VIP mode this will always result in a standard status report as defined for the VIP series but in ANSI mode the requirements will vary from sys
298. racter set The mainframe may be using a 7 bit national character set an 8 bit national character set from the ISO8859 series or some other more unusual character set In all cases this must be transliterated correctly to and from your Glink character set when you communicate See Settings Keyboard Options 216 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator for the transliteration tables available to you and the user interface for generating tables that are not supplied Font name This field defines the name of the Windows font you wish to use in the emulator window Note that only non proportional fonts will display properly Font style Here you may choose the display style for your chosen font If you have selected a true type font then be aware that choosing anything other than the regular default may slow down the display considerably if you don t have a true type font for this particular style Italic styles are provided for special purpose appli cations only and will in many circumstances result in clipping of characters on the screen display Show fixed fonts only In that fixed pitch fonts are the only suitable ones for usage in the Glink display the list of installed fonts will usually be restricted to these If for some reason you wish to use a proportional font then you may remove the check mark from this box and Glink will display the complete set of fonts you have installed Spre
299. racters stripped Eight bit quote Normally the program will decide whether 8 bit quoting necessary for trans mission of binary data on a 7 bit connection should be used by checking the type of connection This is the default but in cases where 8 bit quoting needs to be chosen specifically this option may be used to force the program to use the mode you choose Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 239 Configuring the emulator Examples of cases where you would wish to change the default action include host machines that default to 8 bit quoting even when the connection actually is 8 bit and connections that apparently are 8 bit to the Kermit protocol but that contain 7 bit paths and therefore require the quoting to be done Note that FTRAN must always use 8 bit quoting for transfer of binary files Enable DPS8 compression Recent versions of the PC FTRAN software for GCOS8 implement a com pression algorithm that provides better throughput for transmission of binary files than the normal Kermit algorithm The technique used to negotiate this protocol is supported by Glink but unfortunately not by all of the older versions of FTRAN on various hosts notably the FTRAN on GCOS7 Use of the compression option can in such cases lead the host FTRAN to believe that Glink does not provide support for long packets If you see FTRAN running without long packets even though they have been enabled with the relevant option in t
300. raction with the host operating in TEXT or FORM mode you may move the cursor directly to any permitted position on the screen simply by left clicking it without moving the mouse If you would prefer this not to happen then you may disable the function by turning off this option No column 81 This option decides exactly how the emulator treats the right hand column of the screen and only has an effect in ANSI mode This option should only be needed in exceptional circumstances Roll mode This specifies whether the emulator should initialize itself in roll mode scrolling the screen when receiving data past the end of the screen This parameter will often be set for you by the host machine when you log on it s useful to leave it on if you are running on other systems Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection 132 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson VIP mode setup Configuring the emulator To view the VIP emulator options screen select VIP mode setup from the Settings Emulation menu GUNK Emulator pro o Mode E initial setup al VIP mode setup E ESC sends FZ E Enter key XMT E Suppress status line E Disallow status line lock E Typeahead mode 4 Add CRLF in non SSM V Space suppression ETX on return Answer to ENQ 730G EN x B DK
301. rator s Guide 183 Configuring the emulator Layout name The Layout name shows the last keyboard layout that you loaded or stored with a specific name If you have not loaded an existing keyboard layout and have not stored your current keyboard definition by name as a keyboard layout then your keyboard is by definition an unnamed custom keyboard current that is stored in your Glink configuration file in the Glink configuration folder or your Glink user folder if you have one The current layout is treated like any other part of the Glink configuration it is stored when you save your Glink configuration If you exit Glink without storing the configuration change you will be asked if you want to save it first Your current custom keyboard for the configuration is not available to other Glink configurations as a layout unless you save it from the Layouts pane using Save as If you change a named Layout it will be flagged with an asterisk until you either save the change or use Save As to save it as a new named Layout Glink is delivered with a number of standard Layouts e g DEC SCO and the Layouts used by other popular emulations such as PCOMM Save This button is only enabled if you have loaded a named layout It updates the named layout If you make changes to a Layout after loading it the Layout and do not save them they will still be saved in your Glink configuration provided you save the changed Glink configura
302. reasing this value will result in less overhead on the network but at the same time increase the time it will take to reclaim licenses from clients that have not returned their licenses because the client application was not terminated normally Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 35 Installation name This is used to specify the machine name used for the licensing service This parameter is not normally needed as the machine name is specified in the license issued for the license server It is however a mandatory parameter when you are starting a backup server You will also need to use this parameter to override the localhost name that s provided with the original evaluation software while you are waiting for a full license issued for your specific server port This is used to specify the port number used by the licensing service The default value is 30845 Examples The software is delivered with a generic license to localhost This license can be used for evaluation purposes until a real license has been obtained You will be able to use the demo license to provide licenses to local applications by specifying LS localhost on the client side To use a host name that is reachable from other client machines you will need to specify the host name you will be using in the clients This can be done with gllservice stop uninstall gllservice install start name myserver mydomain com Client applicatio
303. rece e ee 189 NISUS EI m 189 Characters v2 Renee ve oer e es Re ee 189 Keyboard mappings ceret EE Rr e ge dentia 190 The Selected function area ire eto ge see Eee 190 The Sel cted key reaz hikes tie te eet erre tide 191 Function bar Keyboard bar sse 192 The scrolling list sederet e e ees 192 Display bar at startup sess 192 Display Dar now esie rere ket ies 193 Add Dutton onis ht ede tdt uite us 193 R move button ose ite eet eem beg ig 193 MIU Sel p sd dente melee dieimintsebetieesdoemts 193 Xhe scrolling list sino oen ate iret ei etes 193 Add menu ocho cst Seid reete ear tube ns 194 Addatem i enda ter eee hte hs 194 Add sepatator iet dtes ith eee adt eset nt 194 Remove ites ent diete hodie RR dm iis 194 Modem setup s pesi ducks tee e ede dads 195 Call logeing oe ti e reete eic t d e e EU UR 195 Clock shows time online esses 195 Comments on call log ene 196 Constant speed modem sssssssssessssseeeeeeen nennen 196 Dial directory locking sese 196 Password disable sese eren 196 Reset modem before dial sese 197 Simple dial sequence ssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeen enne eene 197 Wait between dials esses enne 197 Walt Tol CarTie nn oed deett ese itc delitti die uade eds 198 Modem strings eerte tecta ote diee set tetra 199 Initialization strings nennen eene 199 Dial and H
304. rectories and program group names Create web controlled package The Glink web controlled package is intended for centrally configured Glink environments Glink is installed on the PC but creates no icons Users will be expected to click on Glink startup links from a browser and all configuration files will then be downloaded automatically as needed by Glink See the sections concerning Glink Enterprise Edition for more information The Glink web controlled package can also be configured to install silently For security reasons the Glink installation package sould be digitally signed after the packaging process has finish If the package is not digitally signed then the user s browser will display a security warning message and depending on the browsers configured security level may refuse to download it Adding a default Glink startup configuration file The simplest example of a customized Glink installation package is one with a default Glink startup configuration file called def glinkconfig If no extra Glink command line options are specified then at startup Glink will load default Glink configuration file Create a Glink configuration file with Glink and save it to def glinkconfig to the Glink directory Add it to the Glink package by clicking the Edit custom addon files button This will initially display an empty text file in notepad Just add def glinkconfig and def glinkconfig ini glinkdata to the first two lines and sa
305. rectory all files in the form glinkxlit or the old form GLWINK are assumed to be transliteration files The transliteration file in addition to being used as a transliteration table when exchanging data is also used as a keyboard filter to prevent you entering characters that cannot be transliterated using the table you have chosen Generally DEF is not suitable as a seven bit transliteration table except for the US and other countries using straight seven bit US ASCII on the mainframe Other countries using a seven bit set will be using a national version where national characters replace the the substitution characters Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 153 Configuring the emulator US 4 59 cdm ca Ld a Hex 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E These countries must choose the correct transliteration table from the supplied sets Choice of a seven bit national transliteration table e g SPA for Spain means that your mainframe is using the corresponding seven bit ASCII character set This means that Glink blocks entry of any other characters from the keyboard and allows only the national characters defined in the national seven bit ASCII set You can make a custom transliteration file by using the Configure button to reach the user interface for defining new transliteration files Save the file with a name in the form glinkxlit in order that it be listed as a transliteration file UTF 8 host enc
306. refer to the Prerequisites section for details of how these must be upgraded to support SSL Async Windows serial port For normal communication using the serial port on your PC you choose the Windows interface which utilizes the built in communications routines that are part of the Windows environment This provides access to any port that has been configured correctly in your Windows setup The SYSINI WRI file that you will find in your Windows directory contains a certain amount of information about this but some additional notes are in order The problem that arises more frequently than any other when using serial com munications under Windows 1s loss of data from the line typically causing a DATA OVERRUN message to flash in the status bar This occurs when charac ters arrive from the line faster than the Windows communications routines can process them Use of networking software and or disk caching software can 290 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces often make this problem even more apparent This means that you are even more likely to see this when capturing data from the line or using a file transfer protocol that requires simultaneous disk and line access Zmodem for example One parameter in SYSTEM INI that may possibly help you here is the ComBoostTime statement Try increasing this to say 10 this has been known to help On the other hand you may find that the problem st
307. rinter HP Mode TN5250 Printer device paper source 1 When using print transform this option tells the AS 400 the size of paper loaded in your printer s paper source 1 drawer Default MFRTYPMODEL the AS 400 uses the most usual paper source for your printer Letter LETTER standard letter sized paper 8 5 x 11 inches Legal LEGAL legal sized paper 8 5 x 14 inches Executive EXECUTIVE executive sized paper 7 25 x 10 5 inches A4 A4 A4 sized paper 210 x 297 mm A5 AS A5 sized paper 148 x 210 mm B5 B5 B5 sized paper 182 x 257 mm Continuous 8 inch CONTS80 continuous paper 8 inches wide Continuous 13 2 inch CONT132 continuous form paper 13 2 inches wide A3 A3 A3 sized paper 297 x 420 mm B4 B4 B4 sized paper 257 x 364 mm Ledger LEDGER ledger sized paper 17 x 11 inches None NONE no paper source TN5250 Printer device paper source 2 When using print transform this option tells the AS 400 the size of paper loaded in your printer s paper source 2 drawer 100 Default MFRTYPMODEL the AS 400 uses the most usual paper source for your printer Letter LETTER standard letter sized paper 8 5 x 11 inches Legal LEGAL legal sized paper 8 5 x 14 inches Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Executive EXECUTIVE executive sized paper 7 25 x 10 5 inches A4 A4 A4 sized paper 210 x 297 mm A5 AS AS sized paper 148 x 210 mm B5 BS BS sized pap
308. ript Reference Manual for details on the SET PKEY script command Comms Windows Sockets SSHD Server address X SSHD user name user SSHD password eeccccce Private key file Key file Browse Generate SSH version Auto SSH1 SSH2 Plink options Hide Plink F Collect user interactively Collect password interactively Collect Password interactively Use this option if you want to avoid configuring your SSHD password in the Glink configuration but prefer to supply it interactively during logon If you are using Public key authentication and your private key file has an associated passphrase you must supply the passphrase as your SSHD password Collect User interactively Use this option if you want to avoid configuring your SSH user name in the Glink configuration but prefer to supply it interactively during logon 122 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Hide Plink The first Glink you start automatically opens a command line SSH channel to the SSHD server system using the PuTTY plink module This channel is visible by default so that the very first time you connect you can follow the SSH connection dialog Once you have reached the situation where plink starts up by itself you can check the option for hiding it so that use of the SSH channel is transparent Private key file Instead of a password you can configure the Glink PuTTY interface to use Public key a
309. rsion from http www mydomain com glink download glinksetup exe at the user s request This feature is only available in Glink Enterprise edition Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation No modem initialize X If the X parameter is specified then the modem will not be initialized at startup time This can be used in the case where you have exited from Glink altogether but still have an active modem connection where initializing the modem would almost certainly cause the connection to be dropped Suppress reminders Z This parameter specifies that warnings generated by the appointment book should not be respected This will most often be used in a multitasking situation where there is more than one copy of Glink executing in which case you will want just one of the copies to be responsible for such warnings Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 29 Installation Glink license server The Enterprise edition of Glink uses a license server to supply by session licenses to clients The standard installation procedure will set up the licensing service automatically for you but here we will supply additional information that will help you understand the setup and enable you to make appropriate adjustments to it General information Overview The licensing service will run on a single machine which must be available from all clients using the license it supplies It runs as a Win
310. s A menu is available on the CtRL F6 key to give you a quick way of changing pad parameters on the fly and call clear for host control Help is available for each pad parameter simply by pressing F10 while positioned on the parameter you need help for Note that the options that are controlled BOTH by the PAD parameters and internal Glink options echoplex and various line feed options may be control led equally well by using the CTRL F6 menu or by using the toggles menu Don t use the setup menu to change this kind of thing remember that the equivalent options there have to do with the way the program starts up rather than which options actually are being used at any given moment If you need to start up with a different set of PAD parameters than those which are used by Glink then use the script language look at the PSET command in connection with the command line S option to achieve this The emulator may also be set up to accept incoming calls this is done simply by specifying a single asterisk as the X 25 call name In this case the emulator will wait for an incoming X 25 call If you are using a script you may test for the presence of an incoming call with the IF ONLINE script statement and you may also check the X 25 address of the incoming caller using the built in SCALLER script variable PAD parameters for the caller may also be set in this case using the PREMOTE script command If you are using
311. s If nothing is specified for this option then the current setting for the 8 bit keyboard option will be used This option can be useful if you are transferring a text file to the PC with high ASCII characters that you wish to be saved in DOS format with a code page other than the one your PC is set up for normally you can choose to save DOS text simply by picking the appropriate option in the file transfer menu Full Unicode UTF 8 support This option enables support of the full Unicode character set for display rather than being limited to the currently selected character set in Windows default or Glink It is suitable for host systems that use Unicode internally and need to display characters from several different 8 bit character sets or specialized characters mathematical scientific bibliographic Note that the actual characters that can be displayed will depend upon support for this in the selected display font Screen properties gt Fonts gt Use Windows font This option is only available for VIP7800 ANSI and VTxxx emulation modes This option automatically sets the 8 bit host option and the option for use of UTF 8 encoding for transmission of data to and from the host Seven bit transliteration table This option specifies the transliteration file to use when communicating with a seven bit mainframe Eight bit host option not set The list of files presented here will depend upon the contents of your GLINK di
312. s Glink directory will be created when a Glink configuration file is saved Note that if a glink ini glinkdata file is supplied with command line parameters it should be in the GlinkExecDir above The actual location of these directories will vary refer to the Windows platform directory locations section for details These locations may also affect where Glink will look for script files when no absolute path is specified Window platform directory locations The location on disk where Glink is installed and reads files from will depend on the type of installation per user or all users and the Windows version being used Here is a reference list of the default base directory locations under which the Glink directories reside 256 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Windows Vista Administrator notes ProgramFiles C Program Files SMyDocuments C Users lt user gt Documents CommonDocuments C Users Public Documents LocalAppData C Users lt user gt AppData Local SCommonAppData C ProgramData Windows 2003 ProgramFiles C Program Files MyDocuments C Documents and SCommonDocuments C Documents LocalAppData C Documents and Settings Application Data CommonAppData C Documents and Windows XP ProgramFiles C Program Files MyDocuments C Documents and SCommonDocuments C Documents SLocalAppData C Documents and Settings Application Data SCommonAppData C Documents an
313. s Glink to use a normal dial sequence on your smart modem If you turn off this option a more complex method is used which may not work on all modems However in those cases where turning off this option does work you will be able to see exactly when the modem dials and when it has finished and is waiting to connect to the host This is especially useful if you are also going to be using the dial directory for making voice calls Wait between dials This option tells the dial function how long in seconds to wait before calling the next number in the dial queue The default value of 3 seconds works for most modems but if your modem is a little slow to hang up the telephone you may need to increase this value Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 197 Configuring the emulator Wait for carrier 198 This option tells the dial function how long in seconds to wait for a response from the modem before giving up Usually it will be sufficient to set this to a higher value than that used in the equivalent option in the modem this way you will always get a response from the modem before timing out If this is not possible for some reason this option sets the maximum time to wait for a response Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Modem strings To view the Modem Strings screen select Settings Modem Strings from the Glink menu bar GLINK Modem proper
314. s assume that all our users need the DPSS entry but that some will need the DPS7 entry and possibly the DPS6 entry as well We can achieve this by making the last two icons optional simply include an Optional true directive in the Install2 section but as an example of how this may be combined with use of icon groups we will do it in the following way Admin Signoff TRU Gl Groups Basic Basic system usage Advanced Advanced system usage Installl Group ALL IconTitle DPS8 OptionName DPS8 access Replacelcons Yes NetScriptDirectory K GLWIN SCRIPTS UserDirectory H GLWIN UserDirectoryFrom K GLWIN USER UserScriptDirectory H GLWINNSCRIPTS CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR C Cl Install2 Group Advanced IconTitle DPS7 OptionName DPS7 access CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR C C2 Install3 Optional true OptionName DPS6 access OptionChecked true IconTitle DPS6 CommandParameters R72 S STARTUP SCR C C3 When the program is run with this file a dialog box will first appear letting the user choose between basic and advanced usage If the first of these is selected then the installation will proceed directly and install the first icon only If advanced usage 1s chosen then a new dialog box will appear with all three items All three will also be checked but only the last of the three can be changed Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 53 Installation Release c
315. s displayed in the national language configured in Windows for the keyboard Key combinations You will often want to assign a function to a key combination rather than a single key e g Shift F1 or Ctrl A Keys that can be combined with others in key combinations are known as modifier keys Shift Ctrl Alt Alt Gr You can combine modifier keys e g Ctrl Alt A can be a key combination to which you assign a function Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 181 Configuring the emulator Selecting modifier keys You can combine mouse and keyboard usage by dragging the function first and while hovering over the desired key use the keyboard to select the modifier you want by pressing and holding the modifier key or key combination while you drop the function Note that you must drop the function i e release the mouse button before releasing the modifier key This method allows only use of the generic modifier i e there is no difference between the left and the right Ctrl keys Pressing and holding either one while you drop the function will assign the function to the Ctrl key combination Pre selecting modifier keys The modifier keys can be pre selected in the same way that other keys are selected Click the key or if the Keyboard pane has the focus press the key on the keyboard The modifier keys when pre selected act slightly differently to the other keys The first click selects the generic modifier e g a cli
316. s is overridden by the administrator or your own profile the variable is used to pick the terminfo file that is used by standard applications to control the terminal Some applications test the terminal type specifically and will refuse to run unless you configure a supported type The Glink VTnnn emulation is a superset of the VT100 and VT220 terminals and supports most features of the VT340 You should in any case set the response to the terminal type expected by your applications For users of Gallagher amp Robertson Host Links products Qsim V78sim G3270 on UNIX we provide two improved terminfo files glinkvip for users who start in VIP78 mode and remain in it and glinkvt for users who start in VTnnn mode and switch in out of VIP78 mode on entry exit to from Host Links Setting the terminal type response to glinkvip or glinkvt will select the desired terminfo file as long as TERM is not overridden and as long as they have been compiled tic by the administrator Timeout This option specifies in seconds how long to wait for a successful connect and is available only for the Windows Sockets interface If you leave this set at zero then the underlying timeout in the TCP IP stack in use will apply TN3270 Alternate screen size When using TN3270 you choose which model of 3270 terminal to use in the setup dialog and this will normally also decide the alternate screen size The 3270 terminal will usually start up in 24x80 mode irresp
317. s to the default Glink desk top icon The Glink desktop 1con will normally be created with no startup parameters You can add Glink command line parameters to the Glink icon by filling in the Command line parameters option e g U SGLINK Configs C myconfig glinkconfig Packing Ist file syntax The PACKING LST file is packed into the Glink installation package and analysed at run time It contains a list of files to install and information on how and where to install them and possibly also installation parameters The syntax for each file list line is srcfile path tfilename size indicator icon description icon cmdline srcfile path filename The srcfile text is optional and only required if the packaged file name is different to the filename to be installed on the PC Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 251 Administrator notes The path is in the Glink folder structure and should be specified relative to the Glink folder e g myconfig glinkconfig Configs hisconfig glinkconfig 3570 would package the GLINK myconfig glinkconfig file and install it to GLINK Configs hisconfig glinkconfig indicator O keep old don t overwrite on re installation P protected installed as read only overwritten only if it is still read only on re installion R readme file displayed with notepad after installation No value indicates normal file overwrite on re installation icon Y Glink program group i
318. s with the following syntax AAA TTT AAA is Area Number 1 254 and TTT is the Transport Number 1 254 The values are given in decimal The default value for the Remote DSA200 address is 1 1 The Remote DSA200 address need only be included if you will be using Glink DGA to make DSA200 connections to this node DSA200 is typically used for DPS7 native DSA access and for some DPS8 subsystems DGA Connection mode This parameter sets a connection mode to be suggested to the other party when the connection is initiated The following connection modes are supported Automatic By default the handler offers to do both 2 way alternate and 2 way simultaneous and leaves the initial choice of turn to the other end When Glink receives an incoming connect it accepts whatever the other end suggests unless you set one of the values below 78 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator 2 way alternate initiator turn The applications must have turn to send The application establishing the session starts 2 way alternate acceptor turn The applications must have turn to send The application accepting the session starts 2 way simultaneous initiator turn The applications can send without having turn The application establishing the session starts 2 way simultaneous acceptor turn The applications can send without having turn The application accepting
319. sable Load Save config menus Disable Setting menu Disable Script menus Disable Dial directory Disable Transfer menu Disable Toggles options QUA 4 UC F2 Functions will be disabled both it in the menu and in the toolbar 1f present e g GL EXE RG 1 2 5 Will disable the settings and transfer menus completely and will also disable the settings upload download and GlinkFTP buttons in the toolbar The RM option uses a syntax with the same principles as the MBAR script command The first character 1s D Dial display F File display M Main menu S Scrollback menu W Windows system menu X Supersetup menu Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 273 Administrator notes Then follows a single character for each menu level 1 9 a b c separators count as a position in the same way as with MBAR So RM M15 M1a disables the fifth and tenth items in the first item of the main menu print screen file display You can combine RM options or have separate RM entries both the below are valid command line parameters RM M14 M15 M16 RM M18 Note that disabling a menu item will also disable the equivalent function on the toolbar if it s present This applies both to items disabled with RM and those that are disabled with RG parameters Further functionality can be disabled by script Disabling functionality by script A startup script can also be written to disable Glink functionality To
320. sc E being sent to the printer rather than used as SS2 This last option only takes effect if you check the option for using Esc E as SS2 Note that if you are using G amp R Ggate to connect to GCOS7 then a new G amp R printer type has been defined for the GCOS7 Diane systems using PLW internally If you set your printer terminal type to PRT9220 then all 8bit accented characters are sent as a single character and need no SS2 decoding You must uncheck all SS2 options in Glink Ask G amp R or Bull for the necessary Diane update level Disable national translation Normally output from the host to the printer will be transliterated in the same way as output to the screen thus providing you with the same PC compatible output In certain cases you may be sending printer output that already has been set up for your PC character setup in which case you must turn on this option to receive the correct output This option is also controllable by the host machine Print log all linewrap Use of the print log all function in the VIP emulation allows logging of all line data direct to the printer If you do this data will be sent continuously and your printer must therefore be set up to wrap data that cannot be contained in a single line Alternatively you can turn on this option which will insert the necessary carriage control characters to provide line wrapping for a printer that would not otherwise have done this Gallagher amp Robertson
321. screen update threshold lines parameter typically using values between 1 and 10 and compare the results with what you obtain by setting a large value in the line update threshold and varying the character update threshold typically using values between 30 and 1000 The results of various combinations of these two parameters will vary depending upon the applications you are using and the screen drivers you are using so if speed of screen update is an important factor then some experimentation may be worthwhile Update threshold lines This option controls how often the screen should be updated in relation to the number of lines that have been received from the host since the last screen update For more information see Update threshold characters 212 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Use caption bar In certain cases it can be useful to suppress even the caption bar in the Glink window This could for example be because you have selected the smallest available font and wish to have the window occupy as little space as possible or because you want to use the entire screen for the emulator screen Turning off the caption bar will automatically turn off the menu bar as well Windows does not allow use of a menu without a caption bar If you have turned off the menu bar using this option you may redisplay it by recalling the system menu with the ALt Space standard keystroke combination
322. scriptname This may be used either directly from the command line or as shown for the DOS interface integrated in the Server6 menu system A most attractive use of this option under Server6 is to configure a local edit key on the gt EC_HELP gt DIRUSE file E gt Local edit of file on PC amp gt PCS LOCEDT SCR GKERM M The LOCEDT SCR file would reside in the Glink script directory and contain something like ERASE PARAM GETFILE KSERVE PARAM SET DOSWAIT YES DOS NOTEPAD SDOWNLOAD 1 D S UTFILE KSERVE SDOWNLOAD 1 ERVER FINISH RASE SPARAM T Pointing at a file and pressing E in GARDIR will now transfer the file to your PC start notepad with that file and do an automatic transfer back to the DPS6000 when you leave the editor Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 261 Administrator notes The standard syntax available elsewhere for the script language whereby you can execute a single command directly instead of a script file is also available A trivial example would be to execute the command PCS halt on the DPS6000 to terminate the emulator 262 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Keyboard and screen transliteration In general the mainframe will not use the same character set as your Windows PC and data communicated between them must be transliter
323. se the file will be written with the specified name whether or not it already exists Note that with other protocols this option does not apply in that the emulator can guide you through the available options with prompts If the file exists then you will be asked interactively whether or not it is to be overwritten you can also suppress this but using the local overwrite option instead Allow file overwrite local When you are asked interactively for the name of a file to be received from the host machine the emulator will warn you when you specify the name of a file that already exists so that you can avoid overwriting data accidentally If you would rather avoid this prompt you can check this option Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 231 Configuring the emulator Default FTP host When you start an FTP session using the Transfers FTP client menu option you will normally be presented with a list of configured hosts and can select which host to connect to If you preconfigure a host name here then the connection will be made immediately to this host Also if a default host name is configured here then it will be used for FTP transfers started from scripts in the case where the SET FTP HOST command is not used This option may be set from a script using the SET FTP DEFAULT command Default protocol Normally the file transfer menu will place the protocol cursor into the ASCII transfer proto
324. section Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 47 Installation ScriptDirectoryOverwrite This specifies whether the files that are copied to the script directory as a result of the ScriptDirectoryFrom directive should overwrite existing files of the same name in the user script directory The default is not to overwrite such files The directive applies to all icons until a new ScriptDirectoryOverwrite directive is used So if you for example did want to overwrite existing files you could use ScriptDirectoryOverWrite Yes Uninstalllcon The uninstall program will always be installed and will be available through the control panel in the normal way If you would also like the icon to be installed into the program group then you may use this directive Uninstalllcon True UserDirectory This specifies the Glink user directory where all user specific information will be stored configuration files dial directories and so on This will usually be on the users local hard disk The default value also a resource string in NETSETUP EXE is MyDocuments NGlink in other words UserDirectory sMyDocuments Glink If the directory does not exist then it will be created as part of the setup procedure See the UserDirectoryFrom directive if you wish to initialize this directory with preinstalled files The user directory will automatically pro vide a U parameter in the command line of the icon you
325. seeseeeer eere eene nennen nennen 241 Non standard E TRAN ertet der E ed dag 241 Oveiride host packet Size nieto eee voe tede 242 Packetttneout 0er de Gto tu elo 242 Packet leader character i onse e ee Reed 242 Administrator notes eee ee esee ee eese eese sess ee eese ee sesssssssseeeeeeeess D4D Glink MSI Installation neret nee nee 243 OVetyle Ws es due pudet eie RR RE eased INTESA Te ERAS RUE 243 Glink MSI Installation bootstrap program sseeee 244 Installation Variables 000 cc ecesesccssecseeeeceeeeeceseeeeesecaeesecneeeeceaeseeeaecaeeeeeneees 245 File Extraction and Customization essere 245 Repacking the installation bootstrap program sseseeene 247 Glink pack ging unee Rete tipi bester tti e iei e aa seene 248 OVELVIOW adotta PERMET atta UR pec LU aaah oa 248 Creating Glink packages sse 248 Create workstation package 249 Create web controlled package ssssseeeeere 249 Adding a default Glink startup configuration file ss 249 Adding files to the Glink packages see 250 Adding Glink icons to the start menu 250 Adding Glink icons to the Desktop sse 251 Adding command line parameters to the default Glink desktop icon 251 P cking lst file synt x eese ete dii ede iue 251 GLPACK tool 5 teneret ette e EROR OTRO TR Er ER PEE ee 253 Director
326. sequences to the host in VIP7800 character and TX RET modes instead of the normal ETX Host autotabbing This option controls whether automatic tabbing move to the next field of the form when the last character of a field is entered should also be applied to input coming from the host machine The normal Glink action here is not to perform such automatic tabbing for host data even when local auto tab is set The option may be required for host applications developed using emulators that make the assumption that auto tabbing applies equally to local and host data Well behaved applications should not make such an assumption Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 135 Configuring the emulator Init mode This option determines whether the emulator should start up in character CHAR or text mode For use on the DPS6000 this option will normally be set to CHAR For mainframes it will depend upon the way you are connected Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Limit 7700 cursor movement Normally the emulator will allow free movement of the cursor over a 7700 form in the same way as is done in the 7800 emulation The actual terminal limits cursor movement to the variable fields in the form and this option may be set to enable equivalent functionality Min edit length Commands are only saved in edit
327. session is used directly with no additional levels of protocol This may be used to talk to any host that implements this functionality simply by choosing the raw NetBIOS interface and inserting the correct data for the host name NetBIOS communications servers exist for UNIX and DEC machines supplied by various third party suppliers Glink itself can act as a NetBIOS host you may do this by configuring a name that starts with an asterisk If you do this then Glink will not make a NetBIOS call when started up but will instead perform a NetBIOS listen using the rest of the supplied name For example a Glink configured with a name of SERVER could be contacted by another Glink using a name of SERVER This may be found useful in NetBIOS compatible networks when using script procedures that need connections between two PCs in the network 298 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Communications interfaces A typical script sequence to wait for such an incoming connect could be CTYPE NETG NETCONNECT SERVER WAIT IF ONLINE GOTO CONNECTED DTENTHS 1 GOTO WAIT Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 299
328. should show the characters you type as you type them in Normally this option should be on meaning that the host is expected to echo the characters as you type them In general if you do not see what you are typing as you type it then you should change the setting from on to off If you see two of every character you type then you should change it from off to on This option will not have any effect when running in VIP forms text modes and only affects the mode in which the emulator starts the Settings Toggles selection will allow you to change the setting dynamically while running the program Erase with default bkgd This option is relevant in ANSI mode only and tells the emulator to use the background color defined in setup whenever clearing areas of the screen If the option is not set then such erasures will be done using the current screen drawing attribute This is the way most ANSI systems expect things to be done but if you want to preserve your own background color as much as possible then check the option Note that this option only affects the initial state of the emulator if you need to change it interactively you should use the Settings Toggles selection Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 131 Configuring the emulator Left click moves cursor For those emulations which permit it roughly speaking these are the emulations where you may move the cursor locally using the arrow keys without any inte
329. side Glink glink ini glinkdata file options As an alternative to the LS command line parameter the license server name and port number may be supplied in the glink ini glinkdata file which resides in the Glink executable directory The parameters are supplied in the init section which can contain something like the following init licenseServer myserver mydomain com licenseServerPort 30875 Troubleshooting If you are having problems with the licensing service one way of tracking problems is to run the monitor program with the DEBUG command line parameter A separate window will then be displayed showing detailed information about server activity 40 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation This will for example show you whether or not license requests from clients are actually reaching the licensing service at all a common problem here is a mismatch between the name configured at the server end and the name being used by clients One other common cause of problems administering the licensing service is when multiple copies of Glink have been installed Only one instance of the licensing service can actually be active on any particular machine and you must use this one for any administration If you are unsure of which instance of the service is actually in use open Control Panel and inspect the service from there For more advanced debugging than can be done with the DEBUG paramete
330. started the program Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 57 Installation 58 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Web modes Web modes Glink is a complete solution the Glink Enterprise Edition license includes the following products Glink can be run as a freestanding Windows workstation application installed and configured on individual workstations but it can also be run as a Windows workstation application that is installed updated configured and controlled centrally from a web server with minimum end user intervention GlinkWeb for NET and Java platforms is available to web enable core business applications running on mainframe systems with no changes at all to the mainframe application All the end users need is a browser no other workstation software is necessary Individual mainframe application screens can be face lifted or automatically processed to enhance the application interface for the end users GlinkAPI for NET and Java platforms can be installed on an application server to make core business applications available to server side applications in a three tier architecture Web controlled Glink in a window The Glink Enterprise Edition includes a web controlled mode By placing a Glink self extracting installation package on a web server an organization can completely automate delivery and installation of Glink to its users The delivery and installatio
331. stly increasing the address space In order to ease the transition IPv6 networks will be able to talk with IPv4 networks and vice versa The new Windows Vista and the coming Windows Server Longhorn support IPv6 by default IRQ See the hardware address option In the same way this option will allow you to choose the correct IRQ for your add on card Keepalive interval This option allows you to set a keepalive interval for Ggate interfaces When set to a non zero value it tells the program to send dummy packets to the gateway with an interval of the specified number of seconds The gateway will monitor these and will assume that Glink has terminated abnormally or that the PC has been turned off if these packets stop arriving 84 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Line mode Glink is equally happy working with 7 bit or 8 bit characters but the same does not apply to all hosts If you set this option to 7 bit this will stop Glink from sending any 8 bit characters to the host instead sounding a local alarm when a key that would generate an 8 bit character is pressed Setting this option to 7 bit mode will also cause all Kermit transfers to use 8 bit quoting If you set the option to 8 bit mode Glink will assume that it can use the full 256 character set for transmissions to the host Long Q frame This specifies whether the synchronous interface uses a short or long frame when sen
332. t a lower level it will access the web server and download execute and delete the new version from http www mydomain com glink download glinksetup exe in this case All the web administrator needs to do is to update the download file and the Glink command line files on the Web server with a new VER directive when he wants the users of that command line to receive an automatic update to their Glink Web controlled demo administration wizard The Glink web controlled demo administration wizard is installed with the Enterprise Edition and when started takes you through the basic steps of configuring and running the working demo You can start the wizard from the Glink Enterprise Administation Setup web demo entry from the start menu It is a Glink script which also uses VBS to access Microsoft IIS to retrieve information and create the demo virtual directory alias links 64 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Web modes For any testing you ll need Microsoft IIS installed and configured ready to run or running It doesn t have to be on port 80 as the web admin wizard will detect the port automatically Quick start The step by step procedure for installing and configuring the demo is 1 Install Glink Enterprise Edition 2 Start or restart Microsoft IIS so that it picks up the new GlinkApi class and x glink MIME information from the registry You can use windirNsystem32NIISReset exe for restarting IIS 3 Run
333. t es Text Printing ODptlOns ether e E ara a tee Yee Prnt Cono 5 ehde ea assi AE LLL Eu D esten Printer character Set cane aie ai e evi aed Keyboard Layout setup ener enne enne OVER VIC WU eee oct ager i abere e e DAY eter Examples 943685 Et eto t e EL Me a S Id Drag and drop a function to a key Drag and drop a function to a key combination 174 Assign a function to a key using the Keyboard mappings buttons 175 Changing the sequence transmitted by a Function key 177 Changing the sequence transmitted by a command key 179 Asynchronous versus synchronous terminals 180 Keyboard pane deeds A mites 180 Key combinations ccceecceescessceseceecesecenecaeecaeeeseeeeeseseeeseneeeneeneearens 181 Nutr Locks nne goin te aiti ttu tette 183 Gaps Lock edet efe Ehe e debe eere da 183 Scroll Lock to hp eg sata deg 183 pu P ceive A EEEE aeste cede Segue eons eae etads EEA 183 Lay Out naM eoe hee aree eter etie gebe teat ecko aree Enn 184 AVE E A reet E ne eo REC e 184 SaVe AS eoru eem e te CH 184 Terminal type eii eee eR E Eee tents 185 Shared Eee on en ico 185 Inno M 185 Terminal functions cese eet eie ede 186 Glink functions iue Ret re t eerte eret 188 Macros C 188 SOHDLS fastest ee RR EAST RU Ue E 189 X Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Contents Menu Shortcuts
334. t files or Glink scripts NOTE to reduce the attack surface some web servers such as Microsoft IIS 6 Internet Information Services and Windows 2003 Server are configured to restrict file downloads to configured MIME types only If Glink is configured to download any unknown MIME types e g gdIwinc glwink glwinl or glink pho then you may need to open up the virtual web directory containing those files e g configure the glink config directory to allow all file extensions without a defined MIME type as binary files glink config application octet stream glink config layouts application octet stream glink config tsm8 application octet stream glink config tcs application octet stream This can be configured by selecting the properties of the glink config directory in the Internet Information Services manager selecting the HTTP Headers tab and clicking the File types button in the MIME Map section Associated extension mad Content type MIME application octet stream If you are not using IIS then your web server may need to be configured to recognize glink files as MIME content type application In the case of GwebS the G amp R web server this is done with the Content Type directive Content Type application x glink glink In Apache Tomcat you use the AddType directive AddType application x glink glink Your web server must be able to find the SGLINK demo glink directory e g Alias gli
335. t folder Optional parameters Q Ask for options interactively L Update glicense txt REPACK ONLY N xxxxx Distributor name T xxxxx Distributor phone P xxxxx Product description G xxxxx Group name to install I xxxxx Installation folder W xxxxx Web pickup URL C Common install D Add to desktop S Silent mode U xxxxx PDF Documentation URL Normally you will only need the UNPACK option to extract to a directory where you can update the package followed by the PACK option to repack it into a new self installing package You will first need to extract the raw files from the distribution package Create a new folder to hold the files and then unpack them using the syntax GLPACK UNPACK glinkproRRR exe glinkfiles this example assumes that the folder for the raw files is glinkfiles You will see that the folder is filled with the complete contents of the release and you may now make any modifications and or additions you need Don t delete any files you think you don t need the packaging process will do this for you automatically If you need to update the license file glicense txt now is also the time to do it For large files you should compress them using GLPACK COMPRESS myfile exe glinkfiles 254 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes An additional will be inserted into the file name this is a useful reminder that the file needs to be expanded The entry for this file
336. t in dial directory Turning this option on will result in you being presented with the dial directory when you start up rather than the normal online screen If you use a smart modem then this option should normally be turned on in that you normally will start by calling another system Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 157 Configuring the emulator Startup script This option specifies that when the program is loaded using this particular configuration then the script named here should be run immediately Note that if a startup script is specified using the S command line parameter then that script will be run in preference to the script specified here Suppress error messages Turning this option on tells the emulator that you do not wish to receive any of the various error messages issued by the emulator in the first field of the status bar Although this will lose the information you will then not have to use the key sequence to reset the error message The emulator will still sound an alarm in these situations unless the alarm has been disabled Suppress welcome window If this option is on then you will not see the welcome window when you start Glink but will be given the terminal screen immediately 158 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Printer setup Glink will allow you either to send print output directly to the printer using the Text printing opti
337. t s simpler just to use the delete button this will bring back the original if it still exists In a multi user situation a system administrator would typically set up a list of the most common host profiles in a private copy of the host configuration testing them as they are set up to ensure that they function correctly This version of GLHOST INI GLINKDATA can then be copied to the Glink directory for shared use after removal of parameters like user IDs and passwords that are user specific If an application should at some point in the future be moved to another host for example then changing the host name on the Glink directory will automatically apply to all users sharing the Glink installation Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 117 Configuring the emulator If you prefer to edit the file with a normal text editor you are at liberty to do so The format of the section describing the DSA DIWS setup is provided in this help file for your assistance Note that the password if included in the file may be written in cleartext When saved using the local dialog menu however it is written in encrypted form not to provide 100 security but rather to prevent casual inspection of the file including passwords even in encrypted form represents a security risk in that experienced Windows programmers will be able to use Glink itself to extract such passwords whatever encryption method is used If you ne
338. tPhone 47 11 11 11 11 Groups Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 41 Installation Name description Name description Installl directives Install2 directives and so on Each directive will have a default value but once the default has been changed in an Installn section then the new value will apply as the default for succeeding sections For example if the Glink program does not reside in the same directory as NETSETUP EXE the default then a NetGlinkDirectory directive will only be needed in the first install section as it will then apply to all following install sections The NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA file must be tailored for your specific site by the system administrator when this has been done change the signoff parameter in the Admin section to TRUE as delivered this parameter is setto FALSE Optional and grouped items Although you may choose to use NETSETUP as a simple tool for copying files from the server to the workstation and setting up a basic Glink icon the program has more advanced facilities to allow you to provide for selection of suitable items from an array of possible icons of your choosing This is done in two Ways Firstly you may specify a list of icon sets by defining a Groups section in your NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA file Each set will have a logical name to be used as references from the icon definitions a
339. ted downloads sse 233 Small transfer window sse 233 Upload directory esses 233 Wait after transfer eene nre nen 233 Zmodem compression sss nennen enne 234 Zmodem crash recovery eet tete derer 234 Zmodem transparent data essere 234 Text file transfer options rese e dec s 235 Capture delimiter from host 235 Character pacing eee eee tee 236 CR and LF translation to host sse 236 Expand blank lines 2 eee eet ee dne 236 Line pacing nei Ae e rdc 236 P ste asiblock o eene e epe et 236 Paste Upload line wrapping sese 237 Text files 1i OEME chatset intet atre tiet dal ee 237 Wait for character aste RR ee RT ede 237 Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide xiii Contents Kermit file transfer Options sss ene 238 Add Control Z at end of file sss 238 Allow lone packets x ce oett trea o teintes 239 Character pact Ge tie esi ee eon oe See ydo 239 CtileZ means end sor tile eae etek ni ee cence 239 Disable filename translate essen 239 Eightbit quote 2 RR S ERE ERI RENDERE 239 Enable DPS8 compression 240 Xpand 13bS x bostes eed eet nee tud etum 240 Host quoting needed iain iat e eee eee 240 Maximurm packet size isdem eatis tu edet 241 Maxitnu imetries oo acest di e tet tee 241 Maximum window size ssese
340. tem to system Any string may be entered here If control characters are required inside the answerback string this should be done using the normal prefix notation Note that if you have enabled CompuServe B file transfers then this will mean that the ANSI answerback is NOT sent as the enquiry is used by CompuServe for its own purposes ANSI BBS compatibility The form of ANSI emulation often used on BBS systems uses a highly simplified subset of the ANSI standard which in some cases is incompatible with the standard as it was originally defined Use this option if you need to be compatible with this You will usually notice that the option is needed when logging into such a system in that some of the menus you are shown will not appear to be 100 correctly displayed ANSI use high intensity When you are in ANSI emulation mode the default is to set low intensity as the standard intensity and emulate the set high intensity command from the host The set low intensity command from the host will then be ignored Using this option you may choose to run the ANSI emulation with high intensity as the default and have the emulator react to the set low intensity command from the host instead In this case the emulator will of course ignore set high intensity commands from the host App keys when NumLock off Normally VT100 application keypad mode will be applied when NumLock is active meaning that the NumLock key will switch the numer
341. ter transfer This option decides the number of times a file transfer will beep at you when it is complete in case you are in another part of the office for example Setting this option to zero will stop the emulator from beeping at all at the end of the transfer Allow file overwrite host Normally if the host machine asks to write on a file that already exists on your machine the emulator will not let it do this Using Kermit the file will be renamed before it is stored This will be done by appending a dollar sign to the name if possible and if the resulting filename does not exist For example MYFILE would be saved as MYFILES so long as MYFILES does not already exist as well If this does not work then the file extension will be replaced by a number between 1 and 999 In the unlikely case that all 999 such file names already exist then the last letter of the original filename will be replaced with a dollar sign and the resulting filename written to unconditionally even if it already exists on the disk As an example if the file being received was originally called MYFILE TXT and this file already exists then appending the dollar sign will not work MYFILE TXT and MYFILE TXTS are equivalent so far as DOS is concerned The file will therefore be renamed to MYFILE 001 or MYFILE 002 and so on if MYFILE 001 also exists If you want to avoid this file renaming then you may turn on this option In that ca
342. terminal in the VIP7800 family running in character or echo mode The TWS2255 model is the Questar emulation of the same terminal HDS5T TXT2255 The HDS57 is an asynchronous 8 bit ASCII terminal in the VIP7800 family running in text or forms mode The TXT2255 model is the Questar emulation of the same terminal VIP7804V VIP7805V These models use the V suffix to indicate 72 line capability rather than the 24 line terminal In Glink you must enable this functionality by using the R72 command line option VIP7801 VIP7802 These models will set the emulation into TX RET mode if this has been selected in the current configuration otherwise it will select character mode The backspace character will be processed locally not sent to the host VIP7801C This model will force the emulation into character mode irrespective of the current configuration The backspace character will be processed locally not sent to the host VIP7801T This model will force the emulation into TX RET mode irrespective of the current configuration Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 115 Configuring the emulator VIP7801X This model will force the emulation into character mode irrespective of the current configuration The backspace character will not be processed locally but will be sent to the host It is roughly equivalent to the VIPFLOW model used by Bob Beamer s SE VIP7804 VIP7805 VIP7814 TXT7801 TXT7802 These mo
343. that affects the screen presentation you may get strange effects If this happens either turn the option off or exit from the emulator and restart it No high intensity This option tells the emulator to show all fields of the screen in low intensity whatever characters are sent from the host This option may be used either be cause you don t like the high intensity colors or more often because your screen does not really support high intensity This is especially noticeable when looking at inverse video fields which are shown by the emulator when in high intensity as a high intensity field on a low intensity background of the same color This can result in a totally invisible field on some screens When the emulator is showing an inverse video field in LOW intensity the field is always shown as a black field on a colored background a combination that is always visible So setting this option will make such fields visible again 222 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Ruler Type The ruler is an optional additional indication of the current screen position for the emulator This option is used to choose one of the three available ruler types a horizontal line a vertical line or a crosshair with both a vertical and horizontal line Note that unlike the normal cursor the ruler line does not disappear when the focus is moved to another window on the screen Scrollback pages This o
344. the file server In the AUTOEXEC BAT file for the workstation this directory should be configured as the Glink user directory with a SET command for example SET GLWINOPT U C GLWUS Gl Alternatively you can configure this as part of the setup for the Glink icon by including U C NGLWUSI LH as a command line parameter for the GL command The directory must be created manually Refer to Using the emulator in the User s Guide for a more detailed description of command line parameters All files in the F NGLWIN directory should be set to read only to enable sharing of the files between several simultaneous users This can be done with the File Manager using File Select to select all files in the directory and File Properties to set the read only attribute Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Installation e You will probably want to run the software once and make an initial configuration that is as suitable as possible for the majority of users on the file server Do this on one workstation and save the configuration using Settings Save inside the emulator This will give you a file DEF glinkconfig in the Glink user directory for that particular workstation Copy that file to the Glink directory on the file server with a name of STD glinkconfig Users starting the software for the first time will now be set up with this configuration as their initial configuration Com
345. the GLCOLS INI GLINKDATA formerly GLCOLS INI file This name will be displayed in the Color schemes list for future use It will also be displayed in the color printer setup dialog box The Two tone background color option allows you to configure a striped background making it easier for the eye to track lines in a form The color used can be configured by clicking on the color button There are default colors for all the configured background colors NOTE that if wallpaper is configured then it will be displayed rather than the two tone striped background Press the OK button when you have completed your adjustments or Cancel if you wish to discard any changes you have made You will need a 256 color video driver or better to obtain best effects Window attributes The Window attributes screen is where you define your desktop appearance and set up certain options Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 209 Configuring the emulator Dialog box size The font used in dialog boxes is by default 8 point Here you may choose to use a 10 point or 12 point font instead Horizontal position This option lets you decide where the initial screen display should be placed on the screen in the horizontal direction Default means that both the horizontal and vertical positioning will be left up to Windows to decide Left will place the left hand edge of the G
346. the scrolling Glink has additional scrolling functions that leave the actual cursor in place These let you inspect the rest of the form without moving the real cursor from its present position and the screen will scroll automatically back to the cursor position as soon as data is entered This functionality is supplied on the ALT UP ARROW and ALT Down Arrow keys the arrow keys on the extra cursor pad not in the numeric keypad Disable predefined groups of menus RG The restricted user option RG can be used to disable a set of menu items or configuration options The predefined restricted user RG group command line options can be used to remove specific Glink functionality from the user The following lt group gt values are defined Disable Load Save config menus Disable Setting menu Disable Script menus Disable Dial directory Disable Transfer menu Disable Toggles options DNnBWNKR Functions will be disabled both it in the menu and in the toolbar if present e g GL EXE RG 1 2 5 Will disable the settings and transfer menus completely and will also disable the settings upload download and GlinkFTP buttons in the toolbar Note that disabling a menu item will also disable the equivalent function on the toolbar if it s present This applies both to items disabled with RM and those that are disabled with RG parameters Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 25 Installation Loc
347. ties o Options ed Strings Init string Extra init string Abbreviations Dial string ATDT AA On hook string ATHO B B Off hook string ATH1 cc D D Alternate connect BE Alternate OK E F a This screen provides you with the means of configuring the data necessary to use a smart modem for communications Note that if you are using a network inter face to talk to a shared modem then you should always define strings both for the initialization and dial commands Initialization strings The first two options define the string used to set up the modem when Glink starts up and optionally every time you make a call At startup time a message box will be displayed while the modem is being initialized If this should stay on screen for more than a few seconds then there may be an error in your setup string Check it by typing it in manually and making sure that the modem responds with an OK reply The contents of the initialization strings will vary a great deal from modem to modem and you will need to consult the manual supplied by your modem manufacturer to set these to the most suitable values for your particular modem Here we can only give some general hints about what you should be looking for when setting the modem initialization string Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 199 Configuring the emulator The modem strings may only be used if you are using a Hayes compatible modem If you have
348. tin 1 mainframes and Latin 1 Windows where the two character sets are very closely related The small differences are addressed in Glink without a specific transliteration table The Latin 1 countries comprise most of Western Europe and the character set is known in the Bull world as PLW Pluri Lingual West The DEF transliteration is also used when the mainframe is using the double byte encoded versions of Chinese GB2312 and Japanese shift JIS In these languages Glink uses the same double byte encoded character set internally and it needs no transliteration to Windows If you are using Glink in DKU mode to access GCOS7 and your GCOS7 system uses Chinese internally then you need DEF even though the character set is in EBCDIC on the GCOS7 side and is transmitted using a seven bit encoding system The DKU emulation handles the decoding to give the correct double byte eight bit character set internally in Glink with no further transliteration necessary You can make a custom transliteration file by using the Configure button to reach the user interface for defining new transliteration files Save the file with a name in the form glinkxlit in order that it be listed as a transliteration file 152 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator File transfer transliteration table This option specifies the transliteration file to be used when running Kermit Zmodem or IND FILE text file transfer
349. tings for the locked options set to the correct values you should save the configuration and exit from the emulator If you now restart the program this time without the K command line parameter and enter the setup menus you will find that none of the options that were locked and that are marked as such by being displayed in grayed mode may be modified from their current settings 72 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator To change the value of such a locked option you will have to exit from the emulator and restart the program with the K parameter Toggles The toggles menu is available for temporary settings that need to be changed on the fly without affecting the permanently saved settings on the configuration file The options in this menu will vary depending upon the mode in which you currently are operating and are fully documented in the chapter Using the emulator in the User s Guide Communications interface The first step in configuring Glink is to choose the type of communications interface and set the related parameters You can list the communications interfaces that are supported by selecting Settings Communications Interface from the Glink menu bar GLINK Communications Interface Interface TCP IP Rlogin TN3270 TN3270E TN5250 TN5350E TNVIP G amp R Ggate DSA F G amp R Ggate DIWS G amp R DGA Direct GCOS Access PuTTY SSHD Raw TCP IP E Async E
350. tion Per user installations will install all Glink files to the user s MyDocuments location and all Glink icons to the user s Start menu or Desktop All Glink registry entries will also be placed in the users registry No other users will see or be able to execute that copy of Glink All users installations on the other hand install all Glink files to globally accessible locations The main Glink files are installed to ProgramFiles and the icons to the all users start menu and Destop Registry entries will be written to global entries For details on the actual locations of these directories refer to the following Directories used by the emulator and Windows platform directory locations sections In both per user and all users installations Glink will by default save configuration files to the user s SMyDocuments Glink directory U If this directory does not exist then the user will be prompted to create it when required If user files do not exist in the users directory then Glink will look in the CommonDocuments NGlink or GlinkExecDir directory CD Please refer to the Creating Glink Packages chapter for details on creating fully customized Glink packages including adding Glink configuration files and icons Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 243 Administrator notes Glink MSI Installation bootstrap program The Glink installation bootstrap program simply auto extracts the Glink MSI package
351. tion and be available the next time you load Glink unless you have opted to always load a named Layout on startup see Save As Save As This saves your current custom keyboard as a named layout You are given a choice of saving it in Layouts directory in the Glink configuration folder CD defaults to the folder from which you loaded Glink or to your Glink user folder U if you have one You can also at this point choose to load the stored layout at Glink startup This will ensure that you always have the latest version of the named Layout which might be important if a Layout is shared between several instances of Glink possibly by a group of different Glink users However you will lose any private changes you made to the Layout in your last Glink session unless you used Save to update the Layout 184 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Terminal type Terminal type VIP7800 Your Glink configuration includes a separate keyboard configuration for each terminal emulation type supported by Glink so that a single copy of Glink can be used in multiple emulation modes to access different mainframe types The keyboard configuration is switched when you choose a new emulation Glink also has a Shared keyboard configuration that sets defaults for all the emulation keyboards within a specific Glink configuration file Once you have entered Keyboard configuration from any emulat
352. tion if that is currently selected Function bar Keyboard bar Keyboard mappings Function bar J Keyboard bar Menu setup F1 F1 Display bar at startup F2 F2 F3 F3 Display bar now FA FA F5 F5 F6 F6 Add button F7 F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 F10 F10 F11 F11 n These two button bars are identical in function By convention the Function bar is used for buttons that send control sequences to the application while the Keyboard bar is used for buttons that have local editing or other functions but this convention in no way restricts configuration of the two bars The scrolling list This shows the current configuration of the bar Each button defined is listed with the function currently assigned to it The button bar is not necessarily visible on screen in the Glink window That is decided by the display check boxes see below Any button in the list 1s a possible target for drag and drop of a function from the Functions pane You can assign any function to any button in either bar Selecting a button makes it the target for the Remove button function see below A second click on a selected button opens the button text for modification You can choose any text for any button on either bar Display bar at startup This check box means that the buttons will be on screen whenever Glink starts with this layout 192 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallaghe
353. tion options in all the settings dialog boxes In the same way you could also disable the save options in the settings menu using the RG 2 command line option GL EXE C myconfig RL RG 2 The menu items could also be disabled with the RM or script MBAR command in a startup script but all these methods are only 100 effective of course if the user is also prevented from changing the Glink command line accessing the DOS prompt and the like 272 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes To prevent even temporary changes you will need to remove access to the unwanted options in the menu bar Do this by using the MBAR command in a startup script to remove all entries that can potentially be used to alter the configuration Easier perhaps is to remove the menu bar altogether and modify the tool bar to contain only items that will be needed by the user in practice Note that in this situation you will also want to disable the menu bar toggle in the system menu with a startup MBAR command Disabling functionality by command line The restricted user options RG RM and RW can be used to disable a set of menu items or configuration options These options can be used in the glink startup command line file The predefined restricted user RG lt group gt command line options can be used to remove specific Glink functionality from the user The following lt group gt values are defined Di
354. tions in the Glink emulations You can change what the keys transmit but you have to do it by defining a macro and assigning it to the key as described in the previous example Note that you need not use the macro method if you are assigning an existing function to the key For example to assign the VT102 PF1 function to the NumLock key you would simply drag the function from the function tree and drop it on the key rather than defining a macro as OP Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 179 Configuring the emulator Asynchronous versus synchronous terminals Note the very big difference between asynchronous and synchronous terminals as regards command keys The asynchronous terminals transmit the command sequence function to the application and thus the functions that can be assigned are limited to those recognized by the application but never transmitted by the application to the terminal The resulting application action is reflected in command sequences sent from the application to the terminal and are functions recognized by the terminal but never transmitted by the terminal When assigning functions to control keys on an asynchronous terminal it is only meaningful to assign those functions that are recognized by the application such as the F key functions and for the VT terminal functions such as Find Insert Here Next Screen Previous Screen and of course any macros that transmit sequences expected by the ap
355. tis software uses a pair of interrupt values so if you configure 7A both 7A and 7B will be in use For Case 6000 interfaces the number configured here should be left at its default value of 66h unless this has been changed in the supporting software It defines which software interrupt should be used by Glink to communicate with the Case OSI driver IP address Enter the internet address of the host you are logging into in this field The name must be one that is known to the LAN interface software in some cases you must enter the name in conventional format for example 129 1 1 150 but usually you will also be able to enter a symbolic host name Glink supports IPv4 and IPv6 for all TCP IP interfaces IP addresses can be specified in either Pv6 IPv4 format or as DNS names Glink will automatically detect if the workstation is configured for IPv6 If DNS names are used Glink will use IPv6 lookup if available and attempt to connect to the different addresses in the order supplied by DNS If you enter the IP address using numeric format you should supply this in the conventional dotted form for IPv4 for example 129 1 1 150 while for IPv6 you should use the standard formatting for IPv6 for example fe80 3343 3dc9 f5b1 edbd ec0 1 249 The square brackets are optional but see the note below If you need to connect to a port on the host other than the default this may be specified after the host name or IP address using a col
356. tly set up for that particular position on the toolbar You can now select both the icon that should be used and the function that should be executed by choosing them in their res pective list boxes You can also choose to have more or less than the default of 20 buttons on the toolbar do this by entering the number of buttons you wish to use in the number of buttons field Additional control over the toolbar is available from the script language using the SET TOOLBAR script command You will see that most of the functions in the menu bar that are normally needed while using the emulator are available in the functions listbox However you can also choose to associate any of the toolbar buttons with a macro This allows you to define your own functionality remember that macro keys can be configured not only just to send text to the host but also to execute a script for example by placing something like MYSCRIPT SCR into the macro definition Alternatively the macro could execute a direct macro command For example if you need a button that will turn the toolbar off you would configure the associated macro to SET TOOL OFF You may also supply additional bitmaps for toolbar images in a separate file GLBITMAP DLL which should reside in either the Glink or Glink user directory This file should include the bitmaps as 28 x 24 pixel bitmap resources numbered from 1 and upwards They will then automatically be added to the im
357. to the Environment and internal VARIABLE parameters section for a list of supported parameters 156 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator You can automatically add the name of the currently connected host to the text in the title bar by using the Title includes host name option in Settings gt Screen gt Windows attributes Message based mode This option tells the emulator that as far as possible the processor should be released completely when the program is idle This requires that the communi cations interface being used supports windows notifications and that the option for this has been enabled in the communications setup menu Short screen dump This option sets the format of the screen dump provided with the File Dump Screen selection from the Glink menu bar or with the ALT W key If you are using the short dump then the emulator will start screen dumps with a single form feed character and suppress all trailing blank lines If you are using the long form then all lines on your screen will be dumped including the trailing blank ones and no form feed will be written at the start of the dump In both cases the emulator will suppress trailing blanks at the END of the lines of your screen Silent mode This option ensures that the emulator operates completely in silence This is a blanket option which turns off sounds from the host local alarm sounds and so on Star
358. tor Glink connecting to DSA can accept print output directed by the host to an independent print session if this parameter is used For example print directed to a GCOS7 Twriter queue or TDS LID assigned as a ROP printer can be printed on your PC printer when you use this with an appropriate Ggate printer coname defined Unless it is suppressed coi OFF Ggate will send the Glink client a list of available CONAMES to populate the drop down list If no list is available you can type in the Ggate printer coname The coname list feacture requires G amp R HostLinks version 6 1 or above and if not desired can be disabled in Glink with CFIX 3524 1 See also the Ggate conname option Printer mailbox and Printer extension DGA only These parameters associate a printer session with the terminal session The Bull mainframes often send print over an independent print session which has to be associated with a terminal session so that the print can reach the terminal s printer The print session can be established by the printer connecting in to the GCOS system or by the GCOS system connecting out to the printer The mode is chosen by the printer connect to host parameter The printer mailbox and extension are defined differently for the two modes If the printer connects to the GCOS system the parameters are used as the mailbox and extension for a session that is established to the same node as the terminal session For example this is the nor
359. tor Show fixed fonts only In that fixed pitch fonts are the most suitable ones for printing the list of printer fonts will usually be restricted to these If for some reason you wish to use a proportional font then you may remove the check mark from this box and Glink will display the complete set of fonts Text printing options The options below will only be used if the Windows text or Physical text or File text options has been selected in one of the Printer usage options in the general printer options dialog box Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 169 Configuring the emulator The dialog box for direct printer setup looks like this GLINK Printer properties eA Options Ej Windows GUI printing EZ Text printing Print control Preprint ctl OCR CR LF CR FF CR VT Printer character sets Z bit None 8 bit PC OEM Postprint ctl Pre printer file CR 5 CR LF Post printer file CR FF D CR VT Use print ctl for host data See below for descriptions of the different options Print control Post print ctl This option decides which characters should be sent to the printer after a page of output has been produced Post printer file If the post printer control selections do not give you enough scope for your needs for printer resetting this option lets you specify the name of a file that will be sent to the printer a
360. tribute is available in the first position of the screen and is shown as user input This attribute will be applied to all user input typed at the keyboard so long as no attribute has been set at the current position by the host computer This may be used to provide easy differentiation of text you yourself have typed and text that came from the host Note this does not apply to ECHO mode in ECHO mode all characters displayed come from the host This specific attribute is not part of the standard VIP attribute set but may be accessed by the host using the sequence esc s 206 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Obviously some of the attributes will already be set for you for example I inverse video will be set by default to turn on inverse while leaving the other attributes alone In the example above if you wanted to ensure that the ONLY inverse video fields to be shown were the unprotected ones then you could change the definition for inverse video to also leave the inverse attribute untouched ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping This dialog box allows you to select exactly which foreground and background color should be used to enhance display of various combinations of attributes underline intensity inverse blink blank sent by the application GLINK Screen properties 2 NIU Color adjustments Window a
361. ttributes 4 Fonts Fg Toolbarsetup g Options 3 Facelifting Screen colors ps VIP attribute mapping ag ANSI VT DKU attribute mapping Normal Inverse All Fixed Blink Normal AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz Not underlined Low AaBbzz AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz High AaBbZz AaBb2z AaBbZz AaBbZz Normal AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz Underlined Low AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz High AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz AaBbZz Foreground Mill Default x Background Default V Blink enabled 7 Underline enabled Color scheme DKU 7 color z Reset Default Save scheme Delete scheme canes Select the combination of attributes you want to map by using the buttons to select a group or by clicking on the appropriate examples After selecting a group simply click on the foreground and background colors you wish to use You will find it practical to use the buttons to make block selections initially and then adjust single or multiple fields afterwards Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 207 Configuring the emulator Normally Glink preserves the state of the underline and blink attributes as they are sent but you can suppress the blink or underline by removing the appropriate check mark from the left bottom of the dialog box Color adjustments This dialog box is used to adjust the actual colors that will be shown on the emulator screen for mapping of the attributes that are sent from the host machine see the VIP and ANS
362. tunity of saving them at that time Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Whenever you are pointing at an option in either the menu itself or in one of the configuration dialog boxes you may always press the F1 help key to get online help explaining more about the option in question You may also click on the question mark icon at the top left of the dialog box and then click with the question mark icon on the item for which you need help Additionally you may right click the item for what s this style popup help Note that if you call help in this way you will not be able to use any cross references in the help window this is a Windows limitation Note that you may override the standard setting for the name of the configuration file by specifying C and a string of up to three characters as a parameter to the command line used for starting Glink For example if you use C xxx then xxx glinkconfig would be loaded instead of the standard DEF glinkconfig file This may be useful when running Glink in an environment where different configurations are required in different circumstances Mostly such needs are catered for by the dialing directory but there are cases when more complicated changes may be required In such cases you may use the following procedure First start your normal Glink Make the necessary changes to the configuration and use the Save As option in the Settings menu to save the
363. u is added following it If there is no entry selected the new menu is added at the end of the Menu setup line Add item As for Add menu but the entry is not a menu it points directly to some function Add separator As for Add item but the separator is not an entry It is displayed as a line in the list of entries under a menu and is normally used to delineate groups of similar logical functions in a menu with many entries Remove item This button is enabled whenever a menu item or separator in the list is selected and if clicked it removes the item 194 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Modem setup To view the modem setup options screen select Settings Modem Options from the Glink menu bar GLINK Modem properties Qo gat ptions S Strings Constant speed modem E call logging 4 Simple dial sequence Comments on call log Reset modem before dial Dial directory locking El Clock shows time online Password disable Wait for carrier 60 seconds Wait between dials 3 seconds Call logging This option controls whether or not a log of the calls you make using the dial directory should be made If you specify that logging is to be done the log is made on the file GLINK LOG in the Glink user directory Clock shows time online This option tells the program that rather than display the time of day in the status line it should dis
364. u will however receive a warning if ithe situation should arise Finally if you wish to digitally sign the package this is the time to do it The advantage of packing the software this way is that you can distribute it as a single executable file ideally suited for delivery with electronic mail or via the web If on the other hand you are providing the software on CD then repacking with GLPACK is optional Copying the files direct to CD will also work We advise however that you do this in two steps first using GLPACK as described above and then using GLPACK UNPACK to extract all files again to the CD master This method has the dual advantage that you get an extra check that the packing lists are valid and that only those files that are actually needed will be included Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 255 Administrator notes Directories used by the emulator For Windows Vista UAC User Access Control requirements Glink configuration directories U and CD now default to the SMyDocuments Glink and SCommonDocuments Glink or GlinkExecDir directories The default Glink directories are Per user GlinkExecDir SLocalAppData Apps Glink Professional ConfigDir CD SCommonDocuments Glink or GlinkExecDir UserDir U SMyDocuments Glink All users GlinkExecDir ProgramFiles NGlink Professional ConfigDir CD SCommonDocuments Glink or GlinkExecDir UserDir U SMyDocuments Glink The My Document
365. uations The files below cover most Western languages for mainframes using a seven bit national version of ASCII some few examples for mainframes using eight bit character sets other than Latin 1 and additionally some special cases 437 glinkxlit PC character set codepage 437 865 glinkxlit PC character set codepage 865 ara glinkxlit Arabic when using ASMO 708 on host cyr glinkxlit For use with ISO 8859 5 hosts if using Cyrillic fonts on PC def glinkxlit Standard US ASCII with ISO 8bit extensions the Windows character set no transliteration Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 263 Administrator notes fin glinkxlit Finnish when using ISO 7bit on host French when using ISO 7bit on host French Canadian when using ISO 7bit on host German when using ISO 7bit on host Italian when using ISO 7bit on host ra glinkxli rc glinkxli ita glinkxli TToETOORBY A oPE CET f f ger glinkxli al t2 glinkxlit For use with ISO 8859 2 hosts if using Latin 2 font on PC 1t7 glinkxlit For use with ISO 8859 13 hosts if using Baltic font on PC nor glinkxlit Norwegian when using ISO 7bit on host sf glinkxlit Swedish Finnish when using ISO 7bit on host spa glinkxlit Spanish when using ISO 7bit on host swe glinkxlit Swedish when using ISO 7bit on host Swiss when using ISO 7bit on host Convert to codepage 437 US from ISO host Convert to codepage 850 multinational from ISO host Convert to
366. up of the chosen interface s configuration dialog box To access TCP IP gateways Ggate TNVIP TN3270 TN5250 Telnet Rlogin use the SSHD system to provide SSH tunneling for your other TCP IP line interfaces for example Telnet connections to the SSH system or via the SSH system to other systems Glink allows you to do this by providing a PuTTY interface in the security group box of all of the TCP IP protocol configuration dialog boxes To use SSH with one of these you select Windows Sockets as your Communications Interface pick the protocol you want and check the radio button for SSH In either case you must have an SSH logon name and password for the SSHD server to which you connect or use as a tunnel SSH servers are normally configured on IP port number 22 and Glink will by default make the SSH connection to this port When use of Secure Shell is enabled in Glink SSH encryption will always be used whereas authentication is configurable If you want client authentication rather than just user name and password you will need a Public key authentication key pair Public key authentication is based on two keys a public key which anyone can know and is configured on the SSH system and a private key which only you know If you configure client authentication by Public key the SSH server will check your identity using your public key which you configure yourself on the server against your identity encrypted with your private key wh
367. ure in your web server to set up the demos The demos use a set of pre configured Glink configuration files which are installed in the SGLINKS Demo glink config directory The demos require outgoing internet access on the following ports Port Access type 23 TN3270 IBM 3270 30841 Ggate DSA DKU7107 VIP7800 30845 Glink license server 30851 Secure Ggate DSA SSL DKU7107 VIP7800 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Web modes How the web controlled demo works The web server considerations section explains what may need to be set up in the web server A virtual directory or alias must be created between the logical http address and the physical location on disk where the demo is installed Http address Physical location on disk http www myhost com glink c glwin demo glink Once this virtual link has been made the browser has access to all the files in and under that directory The web controlled demo consists of an HTML download page with a link to a self installing Glink package e g http www myhost com glink download glinksetup exe and some links to Glink command files e g http www myhost com glink startup web dku7107 to tp8test glink In this web demo links are located in the same HTML page http www myhost com glink index html Most web server will have index html configured as the default page A defaultasp page that transfers the link to the index html is also installed for Micros
368. uthentication when identifying your Glink to the SSH Daemon Public key authentication is based on two keys a public key which anyone can know and is configured on the SSH system and a private key which only you know If your private key is stored somewhere on the file system enter the path or choose Browse to look for it The Glink PuTTY interface requires that your private key is stored in PuTTY native format PPK If your private key has an associated passphrase then the passphrase must be entered in the SSHD Password field If you do not have a public private key pair but would like to begin using Public key authentication use the Generate button Glink starts the PuTTY key generation utility If the utility is not available in the Glink directory Glink will install it for you The key generation utility allows you to store your private key in PuTTY native format PPK and optionally encrypt it using a passphrase that will be required each time you use the key The next step is to configure your public key on the SSH server system You must use the Glink PuTTY SSHD network interface to open a command line SSH channel on the SSHD server system using your user name and password The exact procedure varies but typically you change into the ssh directory and open the file authorized keys with your favourite editor You may have to create this file if this is the first key you have put in it Then switch to the PuTTY key generation
369. ve if you wish to initia lize this directory with preinstalled files The user script directory will automati cally provide you with a OU parameter in the command line of the icon being installed WindowsDirectoryFrom You may possibly wish the network installation to copy some files to the Windows directory a good example of this might be the UVTI DLLs and host definition file If so then you can specify the name of a source directory with this directive for example WindowsDirectoryFrom K GLWIN WINFILES Unlike most other directives this directive will not carry over into the next section Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 49 Installation WorkingDirectory This directive lets you set the default directory that Glink will be positioned in when started up If not specified the Glink user directory will be used For example WorkingDirectory C GLWORK If the directory does not exist then it will be created automatically Examples 50 The simplest possible NETSETUP INI GLINKDATA file would look like this Admin Signoff TRU Installl Gl The extra lines defining the distributor name and contact have been omitted from this and the following examples for the sake of clarity This would do the following refer to the defaults for each of the directives for an explanation given that NETSETUP was started from the K NGLWIN directory 1 Create a group Gl
370. ve on exiting Notepad then continue with default settings on the Glink packaging tool def glinkconfig def glinkconfig ini glinkdata The Glinks installed with this generated package will automatically load the default configuration file and connect to the configured host system Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 249 Administrator notes Adding files to the Glink packages To add a file to the Glink package click the Edit custom addon files button This will initially display an empty text file in notepad Simply add files names to the file one file per line Please note that the files must be in the Glink folder structure and should be specified relative to the Glink folder For example MyWallpaper jpg MyGlink glink Configs myconfig glinkconfig Configs myconfig glinkconfig ini glinkdata Layouts mylayout glinklayout The Glink packing tool will pick up the files from the relative path and also install them to the same place when the package is executed SGLINK MyWallpaper jpg SGLINK MyGlink glink SGLINK Configs myconfig glinkconfig SGLINK Configs myconfig glinkconfig ini glinkdata SGLINK Layouts mylayout glinklayout If you save the file when exiting Notepad the packaging wizard will automatically add the extended PACKING LST syntax to include the file size You will see this information if you re edit the file MyWallpaper jpg 4560 MyGlink glink 115 Configs myconfig glinkconfig 3570 Co
371. vide equivalent functionality The following script could be used to save potentially dangerous configuration changes for example rather than simply saving using the entry in the settings menu Erase SGLUSE D05 glinkconfig Ren SGLUSE D04 glinkconfig D05 glinkconfig 276 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Administrator notes Ren SGLUSE D03 glinkconfig Ren SGLUSE D02 glinkconfig Ren SGLUSE D0l glinkconfig Ren SGLUSE DEF glinkconfig Config Save D04 glinkconfig D03 glinkconfig D02 glinkconfig DOl glinkconfig This assumes that we are working with the default configuration file DEF glinkconfig and that we want to keep five previous generations of that file obviously the script can be extended to tackle other situations A convenient way of making this way of saving readily accessible is to configure the script into the toolbar by way of a macro function Another function you can use to assist in recovery from unwanted changes is use of the default configuration file STD glinkconfig This file is loaded if present when the user selects the defaults item from the settings menu You should therefore always keep a configuration file that s known to be good using that name and recovery to a functioning configuration will always be simple You should also set the file as read only to prevent accidental overwriting or erasure Secure Shel
372. wallpaper If this option is checked then the wallpaper image will be displayed centered in relation to the emulator screen The image will other wise be displayed with its top left corner aligned with the top left corner of the screen Fix DKU attributes Some applications try to mark variable fields with attributes to highlight them on the screen If this is done on the DKU emulation running in non SDP attribute mode then the attribute has to be defined and reset outside of the actual variable field and this results in extra marked characters outside of the variable This option suppresses definition of attributes that overlap variables for a cleaner look to the emulation screen Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 225 Configuring the emulator This option may also be set with SET 3D script commands Frame wallpaper file This option allows you to specify the name of an image file bitmap or JPEG that will be used to fill any vacant space created by use of the margins settings The frame wallpaper file selection list is preinitialized with all installed images in the Glink directory The image will always be stretched to fit the current window size and will not scroll with the emulation window Note that if you want to use a single image to cover the entire window including the frame then you should specify that image as the wallpaper file and leave the frame wallpaper field empty Keep aspect ratio frame
373. x 132 monochrome display Gallagher amp Robertson Glink Administrator s Guide 101 Configuring the emulator 3179 2 is 24x 80 display 3196 Al is 24x80 monochrome display 5292 2 is 24x80 display 5291 1 is 24x80 monochrome display 5251 11 is 24x 80 monochrome display 3812 1 is printer 5553 B01 is DBCS printer If you select a printer type you will probably also need to specify the printer device name to connect to Alternatively you may select a screen model but also specify a printer device name to specify that an additional session should be started for the printer as well as the normal screen session TNVIP Resource name This option specifies the resource name or mailbox name that Glink will supply to the TNVIP server when logging in The resource name will correspond to a particular terminal profile defined in the server If you do not specify a resource name then the default profile will be used TNVIP Terminal type This option specifies the terminal type that Glink will identify itself with when logging into the TNVIP server and that will be reported by the TNVIP server to the host Glink will automatically switch its emulation mode to the appropriate mode at connect time Two wire connection Specifies for synchronous interfaces whether a two wire or four wire connect ion is being used Four wire is the normal case so unless you are sure leave this option OFF 102 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher am
374. you will need to set the option for the grave accent Otherwise leave the option set at OFF 240 Glink Administrator s Guide Gallagher amp Robertson Configuring the emulator Maximum packet size The program handles by default long packets of 800 characters in length which has been found to be suitable in most situations In some cases bad connection flow control problems you may wish to limit this to a somewhat lower size this may be done using this parameter Don t change this parameter unless you are sure you need to do so as you will otherwise reduce the speed of the transfer unnecessarily The long packet size may also be increased up to a maximum of 8000 characters However this is something that should be done with care because if you use extremely large packets then the cost of retransmitting a single packet can easily cost more than the small amount you gain from the increased packet size Maximum retries This option specifies how many times the built in Kermit should attempt retransmission of a data packet before aborting the transfer The default value of five times should not be changed unless you have special reasons for doing so Maximum window size The program will handle a window size of up to 31 without long packets or 7 with long packets If this causes flow control or other problems on your con nection you may limit the size of the window to a lower number Again don t change this value unless you are

Glink Administrators Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents